DSC PowerSeries NEO - Reference Manual V1.0

PowerSeries Neo Alarm Controller
V1.0 Reference Manual
Models:
HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2128
WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and
information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully
read. Contents
i
1: Introduction . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
About the System.....................................1
Features............................................................. 1
Available Models .............................................. 1
Compatible Devices.......................................... 2
2: Installation . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overview of Installation Process ............3
Alarm Controller Installation ................3
Mounting the Enclosure.................................... 3
Wiring .......................................................3
Terminal Descriptions....................................... 3
Wire Routing for Powe
r & Non-Power Limited4
Corbus Wiring................................................... 4
Installing Modules ...................................5
Zone Expander.................................................. 5
Output Expander ............................................... 5
Wireless Transceiver Module ........................... 5
Power Supply Wiring........................................ 5
Keypad Wiring.................................................. 6
Assigning Keypad Zones .................................. 6
Audio Verification Module ............................... 6
Alternate Communicator Wiring ...................... 6
Zone Wiring ...................................................... 6
PGM Wiring...................................................... 7
Bell Wiring........................................................ 7
Telephone Line Wiring ..................................... 8
Smoke Detector Wiring .................................... 8
Fire Zone Wiring: 2-wire Smoke Detectors...... 8
CO Detector ...................................................... 8
Ground Wiring .........
...........
...........
...........
........ 9
Connecting Power............................................. 9
3: Configuration . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Basic Configuration Steps.....................10
Using the Keypad...................................10
Special Keys ................................................... 10
LED Indicators................................................ 10
Enrollment..............................................10
Enrolling Modules .......................................... 10
Module Supervision .........................................11
Enroll Wireless Devices...................................11
Working with Partitions ....................... 11
Setting Up a Partition.......................................11
Bell/Siren Operation ........
................................11
Trouble Indicators .................................12
Keypad Partition Setup.........................12
Global Zones................................................... 12
Fire and CO Zone Types ................................. 12
Bell/PGM Support .......................................... 12
Communications ............................................. 12
Factory Defaults .............................................. 12
Alternate Communicator Setup........... 12
Real Time Clock.............................................. 13
Communication Paths ..................................... 13
Communications Options................................ 13
Communication Attempt Limit ....................... 13
Supervision Restore ........................................ 13
Remote Firmware Upgrade ............................. 13
Local Firmware Upgrade ..................... 13
Testing the System................................. 13
Walk Test ......................................................... 13
Viewing the Event Buffer................................ 13
4: System Operation . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Arming and Disarming......................... 14
Partition vs. Global Keypad................. 14
Labels ..................................................... 14
System Label ................................................... 14
Zone Labels ..................................................... 14
Partition Labels ............................................... 14
Module Labels................................................. 14
Event Labels.................................................... 15
Partition Command Output Labels.................. 15
Annunciation ......................................... 15
Door Chime ..................................................... 15
Temperature Display ....................................... 15
Low Temperature Warning.............................. 15
Keypad Function Keys ......................... 15
Function Key Definitions ................................ 15
Language Selection ............................... 16
[*] Commands ....................................... 16
[*][1] Bypass or Stay/Away/Night Zones ....... 17
[*][2] Trouble Display .................................... 17
[*][3] Alarm Memory Display ........................ 18
[*][4] Door Chime Enable/Disable ................. 19
[*][5] Program Access Codes ......................... 19
[*][6] User Functions ...................................... 21
[*][7] Command Outputs 1-
4.......................... 22
[*][8] Installer Programming .......................... 22
[*][9] No-Entry Arming .................................. 22
[*][0] Quick Arm/Exit..................................... 22
SMS Command and Control................ 22
SMS Command and Control Functions .......... 22
Visual Verification................................. 23
5: Programming . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 24
How to Program .................................... 24
Programming Methods......................... 24
Template Programming ................................... 24 Contents
ii
DLS Programming.......................................... 24
Installer Programming .................................... 25
Viewing Programming .................................... 25
Programming Hex and Decimal Data............. 25
Programming Descriptions...................26
Adding Labels................................................. 26
Zone Setup ...................................................... 27
System Times.................................................. 30
Access Codes .................................................. 30
PGM Configuration ........................................ 31
PGM Types ..................................................... 31
System Options ............................................... 37
Partition Setup ................................................ 42
Reporting ........................................................ 43
System Communications ................................ 46
DLS Programming.......................................... 50
Schedule Programming................................... 52
Wireless Programming.................................... 52
Systems Information ....................................... 53
Module Programming ..................................... 53
Testing............................................................. 54
Defaults........................................................... 54
6: Programming Worksheets . . . . . . . 55
7: Troubleshooting . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Testing.....................................................93
Troubleshooting .....................................93
Appendix A : Event Code
s . . . . . . . . . 98
Appendix B : Word Library . . . . . . . 104
Appendix C : Temp
late Programming
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Appendix D : Regula
tory Approvals 110
UL/ULC Installations ....................................111
SIA False Alarm Reduction Installations: Quick
Reference ...........................................................................113
Appendix E : ASCII Ch
aracters. . . . 114
Appendix F : Wiring Diagrams . . . . 115
Appendix G : Specificat
ions . . . . . . . 119
Appendix H : Index . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 122 xxv
Before Installing The Equipment
Ensure your package includes the following items:
•
Installation and User manuals,
including the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
READ and SAVE these instructions!

Follow all WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS specified
within this document and/or on the equipment.
•
HS2016/2032/2064/2128 alarm controller
•
Power Supply, direct plug-in
•Mounting hardware
Safety Instructions for Service Personnel
Warning:
When using equipment connected to the te
lephone network, always follow
the basic safety instructi
ons provided with this produc
t.
Save these instructions for future referenc
e. Inform the end-user of the safety prec
autions that must be observed when operatin
g this equipment.
Selecting A Suitable Locatio
n For The Alarm Controller
Use the following list as a guide to find a suitable location to install this equipment:
•
Locate near a telephone socket and power outlet.
•
Select a location free fr
om vibration and shock.
•
Place alarm controller on a flat, stable surface and follow the installation instructions.
Do NOT locate this product where people ma
y walk on the secondary circuit cable(s).
Do NOT connect alarm controll
er to electrical
the same circuit as
large appliances.
Do NOT select a location
that exposes your alarm controller to
direct sunlight, exce
ssive heat, moisture,
vapors, chemicals or
dust.
Do not install this equipment near wa
ter. (e.g., bath tub, ki
tchen/laundry sink, wet base
ment, near a swimming pool).
Do NOT install this equipment and accessories
in areas where risk of explosion exists.
Do NOT connect this equipment to
electrical outlets cont
rolled by wall switches
or automatic timers.
AVOID interference sources.
AVOID installing equipment near
heaters, air condi
tioners, ventilators,
and refrigerators.
AVOID locating equipment close to or on top
of large metal objects (e.g., wall studs).
•
See page 120 for information on locating smoke and CO detectors.
SAFETY Precautions Requir
ed During Installation
•
NEVER
install this equipment and/or tele
phone wiring during a lightning storm.
•
NEVER
touch uninsulated
telephone wires or terminal
s unless the telephone line has been di
sconnected at the network interface.
•
Position cables so that
accidents can not occur.
Connected cables must NOT be subjec
t to excessive mechanical strain.
•
Use only the power supply provided with this equipment.
Use of unauthorized power
supplies may cause damage.
•
For direct plug-in vers
ions, use the transformer
supplied with the device.
WARNING:
THIS EQUIPMENT HAS NO MAINS ON/OFF SWITCH. THE PLUG OF
THE DIRECT PLUG-IN POWER SUPPLY IS INTENDED TO
SERVE AS THE DISCONNECTING DEVICE IF
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE QUICKLY DISC
ONNECTED. IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT
ACCESS TO THE MAINS PLUG AND ASSOCIATED
MAINS SOCKET/OUTLET IS NEVER OBSTRUCTED.
IMPORTANT NOTE!
This alarm system must be installed and used within an environment
that provides the pollution degree
max 2 and over-voltages category
II NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS,
indoor only. The equipment is
DIRECT PLUG-IN (external transformer) and is designed to be
installed, serviced and/or repaired by
service persons only; [service
person is defined as a person having the appropriate technical
training and experience nec
essary to be aware of hazards to which
that person may be exposed in perfo
rming a task and of measures to
minimize the risks to that person or other persons]. There are no
parts replaceable by the end-user within this equipment. The wiring
(cables) used for installation of
the alarm system and accessories,
shall be insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP, Neoprene or
Polyamide.
(a) The equipment enclosure must be secured to the building
structure before operation.
(b) Internal wiring must be routed in a manner that prevents:
- Excessive strain or loos
ening of wire on te
rminal connections;
- Damage of conductor insulation
(c) Disposal of used batteries
must be made in accordance with
local waste recovery and recycling regulations.
(d) Before servicing, DISCONNECT the power and telephone
connection.
(e) DO NOT route any wi
ring over circuit boards.
(f) The installer is responsible to ensure that a readily accessible
disconnect device is incorporated in the building for permanently
connected installations.
The power supply must be Class II, FAIL SAFE with double or
reinforced insulation between the PRIMARY and SECONDARY CIRCUIT/
ENCLOSURE and be an approved type acceptable to the local authorities. All national wiring rules must be observed. 1
Section 1: Introduction
1.1 About the System
The PowerSeries Neo alarm panel is a feature-rich, scalable alarm
system designed for resi
dential and light commercial use. The alarm
panel supports both hardwired and wire
less devices. This section lists
the features of the alarm panel,
available models, and compatible
devices.
1.1.1 Features
The following features are availa
ble on the PowerSeries Neo alarm
controller.
Zones
•
16, 32, 64, or 128 wireless z
ones supported and 8 hardwired
zones available on the controller
•
40 zone types and 14 programmable zone attributes
•
Up to 16 separate wire
less keypads supported
•
Up to 32 separate wireless ke
ys or panic pendants supported
•
Up to 95 separate pr
oximity tags supported
Access Codes
•
Up to 98 access codes: one syst
em master code
, one installer
code, and one maintenance code
•
Programmable attributes for
each user code (see page 20)
Programmable Outputs (PGMs)
•
Up to 4 programmable outputs (P
GM) on the alarm controller
with 41 available options
•
148, 80, 38, 22 maximum programmable outputs
System Supervision Features
•
The PowerSeries Neo continuous
ly monitors a number of possi-
ble trouble conditions
and provides audible and visual indica-
tion at the keypad. Tr
ouble conditions include:
• AC power failure
• Zone trouble
• Fire trouble
• Telephone line trouble
• Communicator trouble
• Low battery condition
• RF jam
• AUX power supply fault
• Failure to communicate
• Module fault (supervisory or tamper)
Additional Features
•
2-way wireless device support
•
Visual verification
(images + audio)*
•
Proximity tag support
•
PGM scheduling
•
Quick arming
•
User, partition, module,
zone and system labels
•
Programmable syst
em loop response
•
Keypad and panel software ve
rsions viewable
through keypad
•
Doorbell zone type
•
Low battery PGM type
1.1.2 Available Models
The following alarm contro
ller models are available:
•
HS2016
•
HS2032
•
HS2064
•
HS2128
Model Differences
The table below lists the features of each alarm system model.
Table 1-1 Model Differences
*For UL installations, 2 repeaters
must be installed for proper signal
routing.
Features
HS2128 HS2064 HS2032 HS2016
Hardwired zones
128
64
32
16
Onboard zone inputs
8
8
8
6
Wireless zones
128
64
32
16
Partitions
8842
Users
95957248
Onboard outputs
4
4
2
2
Max outputs
148
80
38
22
Keypads
16
8
8
8
Wireless keys
32
32
32
16
Wireless sirens
16
8
8
4
Wireless repeaters

*8
8
8
4
Proximity tags
94
94
71
47
Alt Comm. phone #’s
4
4
4
4
User-programmable
phone #’s
8888
Lifesafety event buffer 1000
500
500
500
8-zone expander
HSM2108
15
7
3
1
Power supply
HSM2300
4333
Power supply/high-
current output
expander HSM2204
4311
8-output expander
HSM2208
16
8
4
2
2- way wireless inte-
gration module
1111
Audio verification
PC5950
1111 Section 1: Introduction
2
1.1.3 Compatible Devices
The following wireless
devices and modules are compatible with this
alarm controller.
NOTE:
On the chart below and throughout this document, x in the
model number represents the opera
ting frequency of the device as fol-
lows: 9 (912-919 MHz), 8 (868MHz), 4 (433MHz).
NOTE:
Only models operating in the band 912-919 MHz are UL/ULC
listed where indicated. Only
UL
approved devices are to be used with UL/
ULC listed systems.
Table 1-2 Compatible Devices
Modules
Wireless keypads
HS2LCDWFx
HS2LCDWFPx
HS2LCDWFPVx
Hardwired keypads
with 2-way wire-
less integration module
HS2LCDRFx
UL
HS2LCDRFPx
UL

HS2ICNRFx
UL
HS2ICNRFPx
UL
Hardwired keypads
HS2LCD
UL
HS2LCDP
UL
HS2ICN
UL
HS2ICNP
UL
HS2LED
UL
2-way wireless integration module
HSM2HOSTx
UL
8-zone expander
HSM2108
UL
8-output expander
HSM2208
UL
Power supply
HSM2300
UL
4 high current output expander
HSM2204
UL
Alternate communicator
3G2080
UL

3G2080R
UL

TL280
UL

TL280R
UL

TL2803G
UL

TL2803GR
UL

PCL-422
UL
Hardwired Devices
2-wire smoke detector
x= A, B, or C
A: ULC listed models
B: UL listed models
C: European and
Australian models
FSA-210x
UL
FSA-210xT
UL
FSA-210xS
UL
FSA-210xST
UL
FSA-210xLST
UL
FSA-210xR
UL
FSA-210xRT
UL
FSA-210xRS
UL
FSA-210xRST
UL
FSA-210xLRST
UL
4-wire smoke detector
x= A, B, or C
A: ULC listed models
B: UL listed models
C: European and
Australian models
FSA-410x
UL
FSA-410xT
UL
FSA-410xS
UL
FSA-410xST
UL
FSA-410xLST
UL
FSA-410xR
UL
FSA-410xRT
UL
FSA-410xRS
UL
FSA-410xRST
UL
FSA-410xLRST
UL
CO detector
CO-12/24
UL
12-24SIR
UL
FW-CO12
UL
FW-CO1224
UL
CO1224
UL
Wireless Devices
Wireless PG smoke detector
PGx926
UL
Wireless PG smoke and heat detector
PGx916
UL
Wireless PG CO detector
PGx913
UL
Wireless PG PIR motion detector
PGx904(P)
UL
Wireless PG PIR + camera motion
detector
PGx934(P)
UL
Wireless PG curtai
n motion detector
PGx924
UL
Wireless PG dual tech motion detec-
tor
PGx984(P)
Wireless PG mirror motion detector
PGx974(P)
UL
Wireless PG outdoor motion detector
PGx994
UL
Wireless PG glass break detector
PGx912
Wireless PG shock detector
PGx935
UL
Wireless PG flood detector
PGx985
UL
Wireless PG temperature detector
(indoor use)
PGx905
UL
Outdoor temperature probe (requires
PGx905)
PGTEMP-PROBE
Wireless PG key
PGx939
UL
Wireless PG key
PGx929
UL
Wireless PG panic key
PGx938
UL
Wireless PG 2-button key
PGx949
UL
Wireless PG indoor siren
PGx901
UL
Wireless PG outdoor siren
PGx911
UL
Wireless PG repeater
PGx920
UL
Wireless PG door/window contact
PGx975
UL
Wireless PG door/window contact w/
AUX
PGx945
UL
Central Station Receivers
SG-System I, II, III, IV, 5
Enclosures
The HS2128/HS2064/HS2032/HS2016 main
board can be installed
in the metal enclosures listed belo
w: Tamper protection switches can
be installed on all enclosures,
including door opening protection
and/or removal from the mounting
position. Doors can be secured
using screws or keylock.
• Model PC5003C (removable door) ma
de of 22Ga steel, painted,
dimensions: 248mm(L) x 298mm(W) x 76mm(H), weight: 4.5Kg
(with PCB, battery and transformer included) 3
Section 2: Installation
2.1 Overview of Installation Process
The steps below are provided to assist with the installation of the
alarm system. Read over this secti
on briefly to get an overall under-
standing of the order of installati
on. Working from this plan can help
reduce problems and reduce the overa
ll time required for installation.
Step 1 – Create a Layout
Draw a rough sketch of the site
and include all alarm detection
devices, zone expanders, keypa
ds and other required modules.
Step 2
–
Mount the Panel
Decide on a location for the alarm pa
nel and secure it to the wall
using suitable mounting hardware.
See 2.2.1 Mounting the Enclosure
on page 3.
Step 3
–
Wire the Alarm Controller
Wire each of the modules to the
alarm controller following the guide-
lines provided in section 2.
3.3 Corbus Wiring on page 4.
Step 4
–
Wire Zones
Complete all zone wiring. Follow
the guidelines provided in section
2.4.8 Zone Wiring on page 6 to conne
ct zones using no
rmally closed
loops, single EOL resist
or, double EOL resi
stors, fire zones and key-
switch arming zones.
Step 5
–
Complete Wiring
Complete all other wiring includi
ng bells or sirens, telephone line
connections, ground connections or
any other wiring necessary. Fol-
low the guidelines provided in sect
ion 2.3.1 Terminal
Descriptions
on page 3.
Step 6
–
Power up the Control Panel
Once all zone and alarm controller
wiring is complete, connect the
battery and power up the system. Th
e alarm controller will not power
up if only the battery is connected.
Step 7 – Enroll Keypads and Modules
All keypads must be enrolled in
order to operate on the system. To
enroll the first keypad, see page
11. To enroll opti
onal keypads, see
page 52.
Step 8
–
Confirm Module Supervision
By default, all modules
are supervised upon inst
allation. Supervision
is enabled at all times. To conf
irm that each module is properly
supervised, see [903] Confirm Module on page 54.
Step 9
–
Enroll Wireless Devices
Wireless devices
are enrolled via the wireless transceiver module
(HSM2HOSTx) or RF keypad and
Installer Programming section
[804]. See [804] Wireless Programm
ing on page 52 to enroll wireless
devices.
Step 10
–
Program the System
Section 5 on page 24 provides a comp
lete description of how to pro-
gram the alarm controller. It contai
ns complete descriptions of the
various programmable features a
nd options. Fill out the program-
ming worksheets starting on page 57
completely before attempting to
program the system.
Step 11
–
Test the System
Test the panel completely to ensure
that all featur
es and functions
operate as programmed.
2.2 Alarm Controller Installation
Begin the installation by mounting the alarm controller in the metal
enclosure using the stand-offs pr
ovided. Optional modules, such as
the HSM2108 and HSM2208, can also
be mounted in the enclosure.
Install hardware in the sequence
indicated on the following pages.
2.2.1 Mounting the Enclosure
Locate the panel in a dry area, pr
eferably near an unswitched AC
power source and the incoming te
lephone line. Complete all wiring
before applying AC or
connecting the battery.
2.3 Wiring
All wiring entry points on the enclos
ure are designated by arrows. All
circuits are classified UL power limited except for the battery leads.
Minimum 1/4” (6.4mm) separation mu
st be maintained at all points
between power limited and non-power
limited wiring and connections.
2.3.1 Terminal Descriptions
The following terminals are available on the PowerSeries Neo alarm
controller.
Terminal
Description
AC
Power terminals.
Connect the battery before connecting
the AC. Do not connect the battery or
transformer un
til all other wiring is
complete.
BAT+, BAT-
Battery terminal
s. Use to provide backup
power and additional current when sys-
tem demands exceed th
e power output of
the transformer, such as when the system
is in alarm.
Do not connect the battery until all other
wiring is complete.
AUX+, AUX-
Auxiliary terminals. Use to power
modules, detectors,
relays, LEDs, etc.
(700mA MAX). Connect the positive side
of device to AUX+, th
e negative side to
AUX-.
BELL+, BELL-
Bell/Siren pow
er. Connect the positive
side of any alarm warning device to
BELL+, the negative
side to BELL-.
RED, BLK, YEL, GRN Corbus
terminals. Use to provide
communication between the alarm
controller and connected modules. Each
module has four Corbus terminals that
must be connected to the Corbus.
PGM1 to PGM4
Programmable
output terminals. Use to
activate devices
such as LEDs.
(PGM1, PGM3, and PGM4: 50mA
PGM2: 300mA or can be configured as an
input)
Z1 to Z8
COM
Zone input terminals.
Ideally, each zone
should have one dete
ction device; how-
ever, multiple detect
ion devices can be
wired to the same zone.
TIP, RING, T-1, R-1
Telephone line terminals.
EGND
Earth ground connection.
PCLINK_1
DLS/SA
PCLINK_2
DLS/SA, Alte
rnate Communicator Section 2: Installation
4
2.3.2 Wire Routing for Power & Non-Power
Limited
All wiring entry points are designa
ted on the diagram by arrows. All
circuits are classified UL installation power limited except for the
battery leads which ar
e not power limited.
A minimum ¼” (6.4mm) separation must be maintained at all points
between power limited and non-pow
er limited wiring and connec-
tions. See page 115 for expanded diagrams.
Diagram 2-1: Wiring Routing
NOTE:
Wire entry for power limited wi
ring must be separated by a dif-
ferent entry access from non-power limited wiring.
2.3.3 Corbus Wiring
The RED and BLK Corbus terminals are used to provide power
while YEL and GRN are used for data communications. The 4 Cor-
bus terminals of the alarm controller must be connected to the 4 Cor-
bus terminals or wires of each module.
The following conditions apply:
•
Corbus should be run with minimum 22 gauge quad. two pair
twisted preferred.
•
The modules can be home run to
the panel, connected in series
or can be T-tapped.
NOTE:
Any module can be connected a
nywhere along the Corbus. Sep-
arate wire runs for keypads, zone
expanders etc. are not necessary.
NOTE:
No module can be more than 1,
000'/305m (in wire length) from
the panel. Do not use shield
ed wire for Corbus wiring.
Diagram 2-2: Corbus Wiring
Module (A) is wired co
rrectly as it is
within 1,000'/305m of the panel, in
wire distance. Module (B) is wired
correctly as it is
within 1,000'/305m
of the panel, in wi
re distance. Module
(C) is NOT wired correctly as it is
farther than 1,000'/305m from the
panel.
Current Ratings
In order for the system to operate
properly, the power output of the
alarm controller and power supply
modules cannot be exceeded. Use
the data below to ensure that the available current is not exceeded.
Table 2-1: System Output Ratings
Alarm Controller Current Calculation
Maximum (Standby or Alarm)
***See Corbus Curren
t Calculation Chart.
For UL, ULC and Commercial Listed
applications, the total standby and
alarm current cannot exceed 700mA.
*These units draw current from the
Corbus to power devices external
to the module. This current must be
added to the total Corbus current.
See manufacturer's specifications for
the current draw of each device.
PC Boar d
Cabinet
Stand Of f
Primar y:120V AC/60Hz.
Secondary: 16.5VDC 40V A
DSCPTD 1640U
Class II Tr ansf ormer
NO TE: Do not connect
transf ormer to receptacle
controlled by a switch
CON1
BAT+BA T-
POWER LIMITED
NON-POWER LIMITED
DSC Model BD7-12
or equivalent
Batter y
StandbyTime:
24Hrs min.
BLA CK
RED
TB-2

AC
+
AUX
-
+
BELL
DSC
UA 50 3
Cable Tie (not supplied) recommended
HS2016-4
HS2064
HS2128
Only
HS2016-4
HS2032
HS2064
HS2128
Only
HS2016/032/064/128
High Voltage . Disconnect AC

Power
and telephone lines before servicing
WARNING:
12V / 7 AHr
12V / 7 AHr
North America Only
-
BLK
RED
YEL
GRN
PGM
1
2
PGM
34
COM
COM
COM
Z1
COM
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
Z8
GND
Tip
Ring
R-1
T-1
PE (Protective Earth)
Device
Output
Rating (12V
DC)
HS2016
HS2032
HS2064
HS2128
AUX:
700mA
.
Subtract the listed rating for each
keypad, expansion module and accessory
connected to AUX or Corbus. At least
100mA must be reserved for the Corbus.
BELL:
700mA. continuous rating.
2.0A. short term. Available only with
standby battery connected. Not for UL/
ULC or EN certified applications
HSM2208
AUX:
250mA.Continuous rating. Subtract for
each device connected. Subtract the total
load on this terminal from the alarm panel
AUX/Corbus output.
HSM2108 AUX:
100mA. Subtra
ct for each device
connected. Subtract the total load on this
terminal from the panel AUX/Corbus
output.
AUX (700mA max. including
PGMs 1-4)
Corbus (700mA max.)***
PCLink+ (Alt. Com.:125mA)
Total (must not exceed 700mA)
Table 2-2:Corbus Current Calculation Chart
Item
Current (mA)
x Q
uantity
Total (mA)
HS2LCD
100
x
HS2ICN
100
x
HS2LED
100
x
HS2LCDP
100
x
HS2ICNP
100
x
HS2LCDRF
100
x
HS2ICNRF
100
x
HS2ICNRFP
100
x
Current required for
connected devices =
HSM2108*
30
x
HSM2208*
40
x
HSM2300/2204*
35
x
HSM2HOSTx
35
x
3G2080(R)/
TL2803G(R)/
TL280(R)
125 (PCLINK) x
Total Corbus Current = Section 2: Installation
5
Line Loss
Voltage loss through wire resistance
must be considered for all instal-
lations. To ensure proper
operation, at least 12.5V
DC
must be applied
to all modules on the system (when
AC is connected and the battery
is fully charged). If less than 12.5V
DC
is applied, system operation is
adversely affected.
To correct the problem, try an
y or all of the following:
1.
Connect an HSM2300/2204 power
supply between the alarm
controller and the module to provide power to the Corbus.
2.
Reduce the length of the Corbus run to the module.
3.
Increase the gauge of wire.
Capacitance Limits
An increase in capacitance on th
e Corbus affects data transmission
and causes the system to slow down. Capacitance increases for every
foot of wire added to the Corbus.
The capacitance rating of the wire
used will determine the maximum length of the Corbus.
For example, 22-gauge, non-shielded,
4-conductor wire has a typical
capacitance rating of 20 picofarads
per foot (which is 20nF/1000’).
For every 1000' of wire added – regardless of where it is run – the
capacitance of the Corbus increases by 20nF.
The following chart indicates the total wire distance allowed for the
capacitance rating of the wire used:
Table 2-3: Wire Capacitance
2.4 Installing Modules
Remove all power from the system
while connecting
modules to the
alarm controller.
2.4.1 Zone Expander
The main alarm controlle
r has connection terminal
s for zones 1 to 8.
Additional HSM2108 zone expanders
may be added to increase the
number of zones on the system. Each
zone expander consists of one
group of 8 zones. At enrollment,
the zone expander is automatically
assigned to the next available z
one slot. Connect the RED, BLK,
YEL and GRN terminals to the Corb
us terminals on the alarm panel.
Board current draw: 30mA.
Diagram 2-3: HSM2108 Zone Expander
Refer to the HSM2108 installation sheet for more information.
2.4.2 Output Expander
The HSM2208 module is used to add up to 8 low-current programmable
outputs to the alarm system.
The 4-wire Corbus connection is used by the panel to communicate with
the module. Connect the RED, BLK, YEL and GRN terminals to the
Corbus terminals on the alarm panel. Board current draw: 40mA.
Diagram 2-4: HSM2208 Output Expander

2.4.3 Wireless Transceiver Module
The HSM2HOSTx 2-way wireless in
tegration module provides com-
munication between wi
reless devices and the alarm controller.
Connect the HSM2HOSTx to the 4-wire Corbus of the alarm control-
ler according to the diagram below.
Diagram 2-5: HSM2HOSTx Wiring Diagram
After you have completed the wiring,
reconnect power to the security
system. Board currant draw: 35mA
2.4.4 Power Supply Wiring
The HSM2300/2204 power supply/hi
gh-current output module pro-
vides up to 1.0A of additional curre
nt and can be used to add up to
four programmable outputs (HSM2204
only) to the alarm system.
The 4-wire Corbus connection pr
ovides communication between the
module and alarm panel. Connect the RED, BLK, YEL & GRN ter-
minals to the RED, BLK, YEL & GRN Corbus terminals on the
alarm controller. If O1 is not used,
connect to Aux with a 1K resistor.
Board current draw: 1.2A.
Diagram 2-6: Power Supply Wiring
Wire Capacitance per 1000’
(300m)
Total Corbus Wire Length
15nF
5300’/1616m
20nF
4000’/1220m
25nF
3200’/976m
30nF
2666’/810m
35nF
2280’/693m
40nF
2000’/608m
SERIAL NUMBER
LED
SWITCH
SERIAL NUMBER
LED
SWITCH
CORBUS TO
HSM2HOST
AUX**
TO
EXPANSION
MODULE
KEYBUS
CONNECTION
TO CONTROL
PANEL
RED
BLK
YEL
GRN
RED*
BLK*
YEL
GRN
Battery standby capacity is at least for 24 hours for Fire
Applications.
Recommended Battery: DSC model BD7-12.
*
Red, Blk, 12 V
DC
@ 20mA
**
Refer to the Specifications Chart above for
the maximum current draw.
BATTERY
12V 7Ah
Maximum battery
charge current is
360 mA
BATTERY 1
12V 7Ah
Maximum battery
charge current is
360 mA
Residential
Burglary
TRANSFORMER
16.5V
AC
/ 40VA
PTD1640U /
PTD1640
TO
BLK
BATTERY 2
12V 7Ah
Same rating as
Battery 1
CON1
BAT+ BAT-
120VAC/
60Hz
Primary
EU, South Africa,
Australia, NZ etc:
primary 230VAC/ 50/60Hz Section 2: Installation
6
2.4.5 Keypad Wiring
To wire a keypad to the alarm c
ontroller, remove the keypad back-
plate (refer to the keypad installation
sheet) and connect the R, B, Y,
and G terminals to the correspondi
ng terminals on the alarm control-
ler.
Keypad Zone/PGM Wiring
Hardwired devices can
be connected to hardwired keypads with
inputs (zone) or outputs (PGM). Th
is saves from running wires back
to the control panel for every device.
To connect a zone device to
HS2LCD, HS2ICON and HS2LED key-
pads, run one wire to the P/Z term
inal and the other to B. For pow-
ered devices, use red and black to
supply power to the device. Run
the red wire to the R (positive) term
inal and the black wire to the B
(negative) terminal.
Keypad zones support Normally Clos
ed Loops, Single End of Line
and Double End of Line.
To connect the PGM output, run one wire to the P terminal and the
other to R.
Diagram 2-7: Keypad P/Z Terminals
NOTE:
When using end of line supervis
ion, connect the zone according
to one of the configurations outlined
in Section 2.4.8.. End of line resis-
tors must be placed on the device
end of the loop, not at the keypad.
Assigning Keypad Zones
When using keypad zone inputs, eac
h input used must
be assigned a
zone number in Inst
aller Programming.
First, ensure that you have enroll
ed all installed keypads into the
desired slots (See “[902] Add/Re
move Modules” on page 53). Next,
assign keypad zones by entering
programming section [861]-[876],
subsection 011 for keypads 1-16.
Enter a 3-digit zone number for
each of the keypad zones. This num
ber must be programmed into the
slot location that the keypad is assigned to.
NOTE:
If a keypad zone input is assigne
d to zone number 1 to 8, the
corresponding zone cannot be us
ed on the main control panel.
Once the keypad zones
are assigned, you must
also program zone
definitions and zone
attributes. See “[001]
Zone Type” on page 27
and [002] Zone Attributes on page 29.
2.4.6 Audio Verification Module
(Non-UL listed systems only)
The PC5950 Universal VOX Audio
Verification module provides
“talk/listen-in” capability for au
dio verification of alarms. The mod-
ule permits the central station to
monitor microphones and communi-
cate to occupants through speakers
. The following di
agram illustrates
how to wire the PC5950 to the alar
m control panel a
nd listening sta-
tions.
Diagram 2-8: PC5950 Wiring Diagram
2.4.7 Alternate Communicator Wiring
See Alternate Communicator installation manual.
2.4.8 Zone Wiring
Power down the alarm controller a
nd complete all zone wiring.
Zones can be wired to supervise
normally open devices (e.g., smoke
detectors) or normally closed devi
ces (e.g., door contacts). The alarm
panel can also be programmed for
single end-of-line or double end-
of-line resistors.
Zone programming is
done using the follow
ing programming sec-
tions:
•
[001] selects zone definition
•
[013] Opt [1] for normally closed or EOL; Opt [2] for SEOL or
DEOL
Observe the following guide
lines when wiring zones:
•
For UL listed installations use SEOL or DEOL only
•
Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG
•
Do not use shielded wire
•
Do not exceed 100

wire resistance. Refer to the chart below:
Table 2-4: Burglary Zone Wiring Chart
RED
BLK
YEL
GRN
To zone or
PGM output
Wire
Gauge
Maximum Length to
EOL Resistor (ft/meters)
22
3000 / 914
20
4900 / 1493
19
6200 / 1889
18
7800 / 2377
Figures are based on maximum wiring resistance of 100

B Universal Configuration Wiring Diagram
(Positive Bell Drive from Panel)
Mic Spkr
Audio
Station
Aux
Com
Mic Spkr
Audio
Station
Aux
Com
Mic Spkr
Audio
Station
Aux
Com
Mic Spkr
Audio
Station
Aux
Com
AUX
COM
ZONE
+ BELL-
1 2
PGM
SIREN
EOLR
*Panel
PC5950
To outside
phone line
Bell (Siren)
SIREN / EOLR
RM1 / RM1C
*
NOTE:
Connections may vary
depending on configuration
M1 M2 M3 M4
RED BLK
YEL GRN
TAM
AUX
SPK2
SPK1
COM
OFF
RNG
TIP
R-1
T-1
+ -
BELL
Trg/
Enb
Enb
NOTE
$Q5050&UHOD\
LVUHTXLUHGLQRUGHUWR
VXSSUHVV%HOO7URXEOH
LQGLFDWLRQ%HOO7URXEOHZLOO
RFFXULIDXGLRVHVVLRQLV
ORQJHUWKDQ%HOO7LPHRXW
,IQRVLUHQLVUHTXLUHG
UHSODFHVLUHQ(2/5ZLWKD
2KP:UHVLVWRU Section 2: Installation
7
Normally Open and Normally Closed
Connect hardwired devices to any
Z terminal and a
ny Com terminal.
Wire normally closed devices in se
ries and normally open devices in
parallel.
NOTE:
For UL Installations, do not
use normally closed loops.
Diagram 2-9: Normally Closed
The following chart shows zone st
atus under certain conditions for
NC Loops:
Table 2-5: NC Loop Status
Single End-of-Line (SEOL) Resistor
When SEOL resistors are installed
at the end of a zone loop, the
alarm panel detects if the circuit
is secure, open, or shorted. The
SEOL resistor must be installed
at the end of the loop for proper
supervision.
To enable SEOL supervision, progr
am section [013], options [1] and
[2] to OFF.
NOTE:
This option should be selected if
either normally closed or nor-
mally open detection device
s or contacts are used.
Diagram 2-10: SEOL Wiring
The following chart shows zone st
atus under certain conditions for
SEOL:
Table 2-6: SEOL Loop Status
Double End of Line (DEOL) Resistors
When double end-of-line (DEOL) resist
ors are installed at the end of
a zone loop, The second resistor enables the panel to determine if the
zone is in alarm, tampered or faulted.
NOTE:
Any zone programmed for Fire or 24-hr Supervisory must be
wired with a SEOL resistor
regardless of the type of zone wiring supervi-
sion selected for the panel. If you ch
ange the zone supervision options
from DEOL to SEOL or from NC
to DEOL, power the system down
completely, then power it back up for correct operation.
To enable DEOL supervision, progr
am section [013], option [1] to
OFF and option [2] to ON.
Diagram 2-11: DEOL Wiring
NOTE:
If the DEOL supervision option is
enabled, all hardwired zones
must be wired for DEOL
resistors, except for Fire and 24 Hour Supervi-
sory zones. Do not use DEOL resistor
s for Fire zones or 24 Hour Super-
visory zones.
NOTE:
Do not wire Fire zones to keyp
ad zone terminals if the DEOL
supervision option is selected.
NOTE:
This option can only be
selected if NC dete
ction devices or con-
tacts are used. Only one NC contac
t can be connected to each zone.
The following chart shows zone st
atus under certain conditions for
DEOL:
Table 2-7: DEOL Loop Status
2.4.9 PGM Wiring
Min/max operating voltages for devi
ces, sensors and modules is
9.5VDC - 14VDC.
PGMs switch to ground when activa
ted from the alarm controller.
Connect the positive side of the de
vice to the AUX+ terminal and the
negative side to a PGM terminal.
PGM 1, 3, 4 supply up to 50mA; PGM 2 supplies up to 300mA.
A relay is required for current le
vels greater than
50mA or 300mA.
PGM2 can also be used fo
r 2-wire smoke detectors.
NOTE:
Use SEOL resistors
on Fire zones only.
Diagram 2-12: LED Output With
Current Limiting Resistor and
Optional Relay Driver Output.
UL Compatibility ID For
FSA-210B Series is: FS200
NOTE:
For ULC listed installatio
ns, use FSA-210A and FSA-410A
series.
2.4.10 Bell Wiring
These terminals supply 700mA of current at 10.4 - 12.5VDC for
commercial/ residential installations. To comply with NFPA 72 Tem-
poral Three Pattern require
ments, section [013] Opt [8] must be ON.
Note that steady, pulsed alarms are also supported.
Diagram 2-13: Bell Wiring
Loop Resistance
Loop Status
0

(shorted wire, loop shorted)
Secure
Infinite (broken wi
re, loop open)
Violated
Loop Resistance
Loop Status
0

(shorted wire, l
oop shorted)
Violated
5600

(contact closed)
Secure
Infinite (broken wire, loop open)
Violated
ANY Z
TERMINAL
ANY COM
TERMINAL
ANY Z
TERMINAL
ANY COM
TERMINAL
Loop Resistance
Loop Status
0

(shorted wire, loop shorted)
Fault
5600

(contact closed)
Secure
Infinite (broken wire, loop open)
Tamper
11200

(contact open)
Violated Section 2: Installation
8
The Bell output is supervised an
d power limited by 2A PTC. If
unused, connect a 1000

resistor across Bell+ and Bell- to prevent
the panel from displaying a trouble. See [*][2] on page 17.
2.4.11 Telephone Line Wiring
Wire the telephone connection termin
als (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an
RJ-31x connector as indicated in
the following diagram. For connec-
tion of multiple devices to the te
lephone line, wire in the sequence
indicated. Use 26 AWG wi
re minimum for wiring.
Diagram 2-14: Telephone Line Wiring
NOTE:
Ensure that all plugs and jacks
meet the dimens
ion, tolerance
and metallic plati
ng requirements of 47 C.F.R.
Part 68, Sub-Part F. For
proper operation, no other telephone
equipment must be connected
between the control panel and
the telephone comp
any facilities.
2.4.12 Smoke Detector Wiring
All zones defined
as Fire must be wired
according to the following
diagram:
Diagram 2-15: Smoke Detector Wiring
See “[001] Zone Type” on page 27
for fire zone operation.
NOTE:
Smoke detectors must
be latching type. To reset a smoke detec-
tor, enter [*][7][2].
Table 2-8: Compatible
4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Fire Zone Wiring: 2-wire Smoke Detectors
If PGM 2 is programmed fo
r 2-wire smoke detector

connection, the
detectors must be wi
red according to the following diagram:
Diagram 2-16: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Wiring
NOTE:
The maximum number of smoke detectors on a 2-wire loop is
18. For more information on Fire z
ones, see section [001] Zone Type on
page 27.
NOTE:
Do not combine smoke detector models from different manu-
facturers on the same circuit. Operation may be impaired. Refer to the
smoke detector installation sh
eet when positioning detectors.
Table 2-9: Compatible
2-Wire Smoke Detectors
Table 2-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Initiating Circuit
2.4.13 CO Detector
The following hardwired CO detector
models can be used with Pow-
erSeries Neo alarm controllers:
•
Potter Model CO-12/
24, UL File E321434
•
Quantum Model 12-24SIR, UL File E186246
•
NAPCO Model FW-CO12 or FW-CO1224, UL File E306780
•
System Sensor Model CO1224, UL File E307195
NOTE:
For multiple unit conne
ctions, the leads between CO detectors
must be broken. The power supervis
ion relay must be powered from the
last detector
in the loop.
Wireless CO detectors are also available. When installing wireless
CO detectors, use
only model PG9913
UL
, PG8913, PG4913. An
HSM2HOSTx (x=9
UL
/8/4) wireless receiver or HS2LCDRF(P)x/
HS2ICNRF(P)x (x=9
UL
/8/4) wireless keypad are required when
installing wireless CO de
tectors. For more details on these wireless
devices, refer to their respective installation manuals.
NOTE:
Use only
UL
approved devices with UL
/ULC listed systems.
Table 2-11: CO Detector Ratings
Diagram 2-17: CO Detector Wiring
FSA-410B
FSA-410BLST
FSA-410BRST
FSA-410BT
FSA-410BR
FSA-410BLRST
FSA-410BS
FSA-410BRT
FSA-410BST
FSA-410BRS
Current ratings for DSC FSA-410 Series: 25mA
T-1
R-1
TIP
RING
RJ-31X
RED
GRN
BRN
GRA
To alarm
initiating
circuit
NO C N C
P ane l
EOLR
RM-2
1 PGM 2
COM
+ AUX -
V+
V
-
ZONE
Additional 2-wire smoke detectors must be
connected in parallel as shown above.
FSA-210B
FSA-210BLST
FSA-210BRST
FSA-210BT
FSA-210BR
FSA-210BLRST
FSA-210BS
FSA-210BRT
FSA-210BST
FSA-210BRS
Current ratings for DSC FSA-210B series: 35mA
Item
Specification
Style/Class, Supervised, Power Limited
Style B (Class B)
Compatibility Identifier
HS2-1
DC Output Voltage
9.7-13.8 VDC
Detector Load
2mA (MAX)
Single End of Line Resistor (SEOL)
2200

Loop Resistance
24

(MAX)
Standby Impedance
3000

(NOM)
Alarm Impedance
1200

(MAX)
Alarm Current
86mA (MAX)
Device
Description
Max Rating @12V
DC

CO-12/24
Potter model CO detector
40mA
12-24SIR
Quantum model CO detector 75mA
FW-CO12
FW-CO1224
NAPCO model CO detector 90mA
CO DETECTOR
RM-1/RM-2
POWER LOOP
SUPERVISORY
RELAY
(12V
DC
, 35mA)
ALARM
INITIATING
LOOP
RESISTANCE
100 ohm
SEOL
RESISTOR
(5600 ohm)
HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2128
ANY
COM
ZONE
INPUT
POWER
ALARM
TROUBLE
NC
C
NO
NC
C
NO
ANY
Z
(SEOL TYPE 41)
AUX
+
+
-
-
+
- Section 2: Installation
9
2.4.14 Ground Wiring
NOTE:
Using an insulated green wire
(minimum 22AWG), connect the
EGND terminal on the Corbus and
the grounding wire from the building
electrical installation to any of the
available holes on the back or side of
the metal cabinet. See the diagram attached to the cabinet for suggested
GND point location and hard
ware recommendations.
NOTE:
Wire and installation
hardware not included.
Diagram 2-18: Ground Installation
2.4.15 Connecting Power
The alarm controller requires a
16.5V, 40VA transformer. While
unplugged, connect the transformer
to the AC terminals on the con-
troller. The alarm controller can be programmed to accept a power
line frequency of either 50Hz AC or 60Hz AC. See programming
section [024], option [1].
NOTE:
For UL/ULC installations us
e only 60Hz.For ULC S559 appli-
cations, Standex transformer (Mode
l FTC3716) shall be employed for
direct-wiring.
AC (UL Listed Installations)
Primary: 120VAC/60Hz./0.33A
Secondary: 16.5VAC/40VA DSC PTD1640U, DSC PTC1640U Class
2 transformer.
NOTE:
Use DSC PTD1640 for Ca
nadian installations.
WARNING:
: Do not connect the battery or
transformer until all other wir-
ing is complete.
Batteries
Do not connect the battery until
all other wiring is complete.
NOTE:
A sealed, rechargeable, lead acid
battery or gel type battery is
required to meet UL requirem
ents for power standby times.
Connect the RED battery lead to the positive battery terminal and the
BLACK battery lead to the negative battery terminal.
The panel can be programmed to charge the battery at 400mA or
700mA. (See “[982] Battery Settings” on page 54).
NOTE:
Refer to Aux Loading and Ba
ttery Selection on page 112.
Battery Selection Charts
Use the following chart to determin
e the battery required to support
the main panel for either 4 hours or 24 hours in the standby mode.
The battery size is measured in amp hours (Ah).
Table 2-12: Standby Battery Guide
* with high current battery char
ge option enabled: [982] bit 1.
NOTE:
Battery capacity deteriorates with
age and the number of charge/
discharge cycles. Replace every 3-5 years.
Refer to Appendix D: Regulatory Ap
provals on page 110 for detailed
Aux. loading and batter
y charging information.
Battery Charging Current: 400mA/700mA*
Battery Size
Standby
4Hr
24Hr
4Ahr
700mA
----
7Ahr
700mA
180mA
14Ahr
700mA
470mA
Tighten nut to break paint and make
good connection to the cabinet 10
Section 3: Configuration
3.1 Basic Configuration Steps
Once basic installation of the alarm panel is complete, the following
general configuration options should be set:
•
create partitions, page 11
• assign keypads to partitions, page 12
• assign sirens to partitions, page 11
• create global zones, page 12
• set up partition acc
ount codes, page 12
• set up partition timers, page 30
•
enroll wireless modules and devices, page 10
•
assign zone types, page 27, and attributes, page 29
•
create zone
labels, page 26
•
add users, page 19
•
set up the alternate communicator if equipped, page 12
•
program phone numbers, page 46
•
set up call directions for the
central monitoring station, page 47
•
set up system timers, page 30
•
configure reporting codes, page 43
•
test the system, page 13
3.2 Using the Keypad
The PowerSeries Neo alarm panel is compatible with several differ-
ent keypad types (see 1.1.3 Comp
atible Devices on page 2); How-
ever, all keypads have certai
n basic functionality in common.
3.2.1 Special Keys
Scroll symbols < > on keypads with
LCD displays indicate that
options can be viewed by pres
sing the scroll
keys. These
keys can also be used
to position the cursor.
The
key is similar in function
to the “Enter” key on a personal
computer. It is generally used to
accept the existing programming
option. It is also the first key entr
y for [*] commands and can be used
to enter the letters A-F when in Installer Programming mode.
The
key is similar in function
to the “ESC” (escape) key on a
personal computer. It is generally
used to exit the current program-
ming section or to return
to the previous one.
3.2.2 LED Indicators
Keypads have the follow
ing status lights that
provide visual indica-
tion of basic system status:
Panel Status LED Operation
The red status LED, located on the
alarm controller PCB, indicates
the following:
•
Power up sequence – flashes rapi
dly until the end of the power-
up sequence.
•
Firmware indication – flashes dur
ing the firmware upgrade pro-
cess. If the firmware upgrade fa
ils, the LED fl
ashes rapidly.
•
Trouble indication – Fl
ashes when troubles are present. Trou-
bles are indicated according
to the following priority:
1 flash - no keypads enrolled
2 flashes - module supervision trouble
3 flashes - bus low voltage
4 flashes - battery trouble
5 flashes - AC trouble
6 flashes - AUX trouble
7 flashes - bell trouble
8 flashes - TLM trouble
How to Enter Data
Conventions Used In This Manual
Brackets [ ] indicate numbers or sy
mbols that must be entered on the
keypad.
e.g., [*][8][Installer Code][898] re
quires the following key entries:
[*] initiates a special command.
[5555] is the default inst
aller code. The default
installer code should
be changed during initial programming of the system.
[898] indicates the particular pr
ogramming section being accessed.
Entering Letters Manually
1.
In Installer Programming, enter
the section requiring text input
(usually a system label).
2.
Use the arrow keys [] to move
the cursor to a blank space or
existing character.
3.
Press the number key correspondi
ng to the appropriate letter.
Each number button accesses thre
e letters and a number. The
first press of the number key displa
ys the first letter. The second
press displays the second letter, etc.
4.
To select lower case letters press [*]. The Select Options list
opens. Scroll to “lower case”
and press [*] again to select.
5.
When the required letter or num
ber is displayed use the arrow
keys [] to scroll
to the next letter.
6.
When finished, press the [*] key, use the [] keys to scroll to
“Save” then press [*].
7.
Continue from step 2 until
all labels are programmed.
For information on entering hexade
cimal data, see Programming Hex
and Decimal Data on page 25.
3.3 Enrollment
All optional modules a
nd devices must be enrolled on the system.
During enrollment, the electronic seri
al number (ESN) of each device
is identified to the control pane
l and zones are assigned. A wireless
transceiver HSM2HOST or an RF
keypad must be enrolled first
before wireless device
s can be enrolled.
3.3.1 Enrolling Modules
During automatic and manual enrollment, if an attempt is made to
enroll more than the maximum num
ber of modules, an error tone
sounds and a message is
displayed on LCD keypads.
Ready:
Panel is ready to be armed.
Armed:
Panel is armed.
Trouble:
System trouble. Enter [

][2] to view troubles.
AC Power
: ON=AC present. OFF=AC absent.
*
1
A, B, C, 1
2
D, E, F, 2
3
G, H, I, 3
4
J, K, L, 4
5
M, N, O, 5
6
P, Q , R , 6
7
S, T, U, 7
8
V, W, X, 8
9
Y, Z , 9 , 0
0
Space Section 3: Configuration
11
Table 3-1 Module Capacity
Modules can be enrolled automati
cally or manually using section
[902] of Installer programming. Fo
r instructions on enrolling mod-
ules, see page 53.
To confirm that a module has been su
ccessfully enrolled, use Installer
Programming section [903].
See page 54 for details.
Enrolling the First Keypad
To enroll a hardwired keypad, connect the keypad to the alarm con-
troller, power up the alarm panel then press any button on the keypad.
To enroll a wireless keypad, firs
t connect the HSM2HOSTx wireless
integration module (or RF keypad)
to the alarm controller. Next,
power up the alarm panel and a wi
reless keypad. Press any button on
the keypad to enroll it on the
HSM2HOSTx. The HSM2HOSTx is
then enrolled on the alarm panel.
To enroll other keypads, see
page 53.
3.3.2 Module Supervision
By default, all modules
are supervised upon inst
allation. Supervision
is enabled at all times so that th
e panel can indicate a trouble if a
module is removed
from the system.
To check which modules are current
ly connected and supervised, see
[903] Confirm Module on page 54.
If a module is connected but is not
recognized by th
e system, it may
be due to any of the following reasons:
•
the module is incorrectly wi
red to the alarm controller
•
the module has exceeded it
s maximum wire run length
•
the module does not have enough power
•
the module is not enrolled on the wireless receiver
Removing Modules
Enrolled modules can be deleted
from the system
via programming
section [902]. For instructions,
see [902] Add/Remove Modules on
page 53.
3.3.3 Enroll Wireless Devices
Wireless devices are enrolled via the wireless transceiver module and
Installer Programming section
[804][000]. See “Compatible
Devices” on page 2. for a list
of supported wireless devices.
Wireless devices
are enrolled using one of
the following methods:
Auto Enrollment
To enroll a wireless de
vice using this method, press and hold the
Enroll button on the device for 2-5
seconds until the LED lights then
release the button. The alarm pa
nel automatically
recognizes the
device and the keypad displays a
confirmation message. The device
ID and next available z
one number are displayed.
Press [*] to accept
or scroll to another available
zone number. Batteries must be
installed in the wireless de
vice in order to enroll.
Various zone features are program
mable depending on the type of
device. Refer to page 27 for details.
Pre-Enrollment
Pre-enrollment is a two step process. The first step requires entering
each device ID ([804][001]-[716]). Ev
ery wireless devi
ce has an ID
printed on the sticker attached to
the device. The format is XXX-
YYYY where:
•
XXX identifies the type or model of the device
•
YYYY is a short encrypted ID used by the system to identify the
specific device
Pre-enrollment can be done at a
remote location and using DLS/SA.
The second step is to press the en
rollment button on the device, usu-
ally done on location. Installer
Programming does not have to be
entered at this step. Both steps mu
st be performed in order to com-
plete the enrollment.
3.4 Working with Partitions
A partition is a limited area of
the premises that
operates inde-
pendently from the other areas. Part
itioning a system can be benefi-
cial if the property has outbuildings that need to be secured
independently of a main area or if
the home has a separate apartment.
Each partition can have
it's own keypad or a
keypad can have access
to all partitions (only if all partiti
ons belong to the same owner). User
access to partitions is controlled via access codes. A master code can
access the entire system and partitions, while a user code is limited to
assigned partitions.
Setting up a partition
requires configuration of the following:
•
create the partition
•
define bell/siren operation
•
assign keypads
•
assign zones
•
assign users
3.4.1 Setting Up a Partition
Partitions are added or remove
d from the system by applying or
removing a partition mask via In
staller Programming section [200].
The number of available partit
ions depends on the alarm panel
model. See [200] Parti
tion Mask on page 42 for more information.
3.4.2 Bell/Siren Operation
Each partition must have a siren.
The system siren connected to the
bell output of the alarm controller
can be mounted in a central loca-
tion within hearing range of all pa
rtitions. Each par
tition can also
have wireless sirens
activated only on the as
signed partition. See
Wireless Programming on
page 52 for details.
Single Siren Output Operation
With a siren shared across all part
itions, control over
activation/deac-
tivation of the output depends on the
partition that initiated the alarm
sequence. Only the partition that or
iginated the alarm can deactivate
the bell output.
Global zones, such as smoke detect
ors shared by multiple partitions,
can deactivate the sire
n on all partitions the
zone is assigned to.
Bell Timeout
Each partition has a
dedicated maximum bell
activation time, pro-
grammable in minutes, to enable
activation or deac
tivation of the
siren according to events occurri
ng on the partition(s). See System
Times on page 30 for more information.
Fire Pre-Alerts
Smoke detector z
ones should be enrolled on
all partitions. If a smoke
detector zone assigned to only one pa
rtition activates, the only way to
silence the delayed fire pre-aler
t is by pressing a key on a keypad
assigned to that partition. If the sm
oke detector zone is assigned to all
partitions, pressing a key on a
ny keypad silences the pre-alert.
Multiple Siren Output Operation
When multiple sirens are used in the installation, they can be pro-
grammed to sound alarm conditions
for all partitions, or for individ-
ual partitions by using
a partition enable mask.
If hardwired sirens are used, this
is accomplished via bus power sup-
plies with a supervised high-current output. The output is then pro-
grammed as a Fire and Burglary PGM output type.
Module
HS2016 HS2032 HS2064 HS2128
HSM2108 8 Zone expander
23715
HSM2208 8 Output expander
24816
Wireless Keypad:
HS2LCDRF(P)4
HS2ICNRF(P)4
HS2LCDWF(P)(V)4
88816
HSM2300 Power Supply 1A
3334
HSM2204 4 High-current
Output
1134
HSM2HOSTx Transceiver1111
PC5950 Audio Verification
(not UL evaluated)
1111 Section 3: Configuration
12
NOTE:
Only the first output of the HSM2204 output module has bell
supervision. Some conditions, such as
an installer system test, may over-
ride the partition assignment and cause
all sirens to activate. User system
tests only activate the sirens/out
puts assigned to that partition.
3.5 Trouble Indicators
Both audible and visual trouble in
dications are available on all parti-
tions. For more information, see [*
][2] Trouble Display on page 17.
Programming section [013] option 3 c
ontrols whether or not troubles
are indicated when the alarm system is armed.
3.6 Keypad Partition Setup
Keypads can be configur
ed to control an indi
vidual partition or all
partitions. In general, a partiti
on keypad controls
the partition it is
assigned to. A Global keypad controls
all partitions. Global keypads
should be placed in co
mmon areas of the premises, such as points of
entry or reception areas, where the ability to arm and disarm more
than one partition at a time is required.
Partition keypads can also
be temporarily loaned to other partitions.
To select a keypa
d operating mode:
1.
Enter Installer Programmi
ng: [*][8][installer code].
2.
Select [861]-[876] to program keypads 1-16.
3.
Press [000] for partition assignment.
• For Global operation, key in 00.
• To assign a keypad to a partition, key in 01-08 for parti-
tion 1-8.
4.
Press the [#] key twice
to exit programming.
Continue this procedure at each
keypad until all have been
assigned to the correct partition.
Users are assigned par
tition access rights via the [*][5] menu.
Loaned Partition Setup
To loan a keypad to another partition:
1.
Press and hold [#]. The keypa
d switches to Global display.
2.
Select a partition by pressing digi
ts 1 to 8. The keypad is tempo-
rarily loaned to another partition.
If the keypad is inactive for more
than 30 seconds, it reverts to
its assigned partition.
3.6.1 Global Zones
If a zone is added to more than one
partition, it becomes a global
zone. A global zone is only arme
d when all assigned partitions are
armed and is disarmed when any
assigned partition is disarmed.
Global zones behave as follows:
•
A global Stay/Away type
zone is not activated
until all partitions
the zone is assigned to are armed in the Away mode. Interiors
must be activated on all partitions
for the global Stay/Away zone
to be active.
•
A shared zone bypassed on one
partition is bypassed on all par-
titions the zone is assigned to.
•
An entry delay started on a global
zone sounds an entry delay on
all keypads assigned to
partitions the global
zone is assigned to.
•
A global Delay type zone follows
the longest programmed delay
time of the partitions it is assigned to.
3.6.2 Fire and CO Zone Types
Fire zones only pl
ace the partition they are assigned to into alarm.
Other partitions retain their current state.
A fire
reset
only resets pa
rtitions they are assigned to.
One or more fire zones may
be located on
any partition.
On alarm, the fire auto-scroll display appears on all partition keypads
and on all global keypads. Fire al
arm silence and fire system reset
may be done directly on any partition
keypad. To silence a fire or CO
alarm from a global keypad requires that the global keypad be loaned
to one of the partitions
the zone is assigned to.
3.6.3 Bell/PGM Support
PGMs must be assigned to one, some
or all partitions. See section
[009] for partition assignment.
NOTE:
Bell PGM type requires s
upervision and follows arming
squawks by partition
3.6.4 Communications
Account codes are assigned to al
l system and partition events.
For SIA communications, a single ac
count code (programmed in sec-
tion [310][000]) is used for all events
. The partition is identified via
Nri1-8. System events use Nri0.
When using communicati
on formats other than SIA, individual
account codes can be programmed
for each partition. See [310]
Account Codes on page 47.
3.6.5 Factory Defaults
Individual modules, as we
ll as the alarm panel
itself, can have their
programming returned to factory
default settings. Hardware is
defaulted via the following In
staller Programming sections:
•
[991] Default Keypads
• 000 – Default all keypad programming
• 001-016 – Default keypads 1-8
•
[993] Default alternate communicator
•
[996] Default wi
reless receiver
•
[999] Default system
See Defaults on page 54 for more information.
Default All labels
Use programming section [000][999
]. The following labels are
returned to factory default settings:
•
Zone Label
•
Partition Labels
•
Module Labels
•
Partition 1-8 Command Output 1 to 4 Labels
•
Schedule 1 to 4 Labels
•
Event Labels
•User Labels
System and modul
e programming is not affected.
Hardware Reset Main Control Panel
Perform the following to restore the
main control panel to default set-
tings:
1.
Power down the system.
2.
Remove all wires between Zone
1 and PGM 1 on the alarm con-
troller.
3.
Connect a short betw
een Zone 1 and PGM.
4.
Power up the system (A
C only) for 60 seconds.
5.
Power down the system
and remove the short.
6.
Power up the system again. Fa
ctory defaults are restored.
Hardware default is logged to the event buffer.
3.7 Alternate Communicator Setup
The alternate communicator is an optional wireless communications
device that can be used as a ba
ckup to the PSTN connection or as a
primary means of communication be
tween the alarm panel and the
central monitori
ng station. The alternat
e communicator communi-
cates via 3G (HSPA) or Ethernet.
The following configuration steps ar
e required to set
up the alternate
communicator:
•
Install the alternate communicator and wire it to the alarm panel
(use PCLINK_2 header)
•
Enroll the alternate comm
unicator with Connect 24
•
Set the communication path: [300]
•
Enable the alternate comm
unicator: [382] option 5
•
Enable event reporting: [307]/[308]
•
Program communicati
on delay timer: [377]
•
Program DLS access: [401] option 07 Section 3: Configuration
13
Refer to the 3G2080(R)/ TL2803G(R)/
TL280(R) installation manual
for details.
3.7.1 Real Time Clock
This feature synchronizes the alarm
panel time and date
with that of
the alternate communicator, provide
d real time clock support is avail-
able. Time and date ar
e updated at 4:05 PM or when the system time
is lost. This feature is enabled/di
sabled in Installer Programming sec-
tion [024] option 5.
3.7.2 Communication Paths
The path of communication between
the alarm panel and the central
station must be established through
either the alarm panel’s on-board
Public Switched Telephone Networ
k (PSTN) connection or through
the alternate communicator (cellu
lar or Ethernet) if equipped.
Paths to four receivers can be
programmed in Installer Programming
section [300] options 001 - 004.
For more information, see [300]
Panel/Receiver Communication
Paths on page 43.
3.7.3 Communications Options
The following alarm panel options
must be programmed when con-
figuring the alternate communicator:
[300] option 02: communication path (see page 43)
[380] option 01: communications
enabled/disabled (see page 48)
[382] option 05: enable communica
tor and all associated options:
telephone number, reporting code
and call direction (see page 49)
[308][351]-[356] reporting codes (see page 46)
[401] option 7: DLS access (see page 46)
3.7.4 Communication Attempt Limit
If a telephone line monitoring (TLM
) trouble is present, the number
of PSTN dialing attempts is reduced
from the programmed value to 0
attempts. See programming section
[380] option 7 – Reduced Dialing
Attempts on page 49 for details.
3.7.5 Supervision Restore
If the alarm system experiences a failure to communicate (FTC) with
the central monitoring station, it automatically attempts to transmit
the event when communications are restored.
3.7.6 Remote Firmware Upgrade
Firmware upgrades are automatical
ly pushed to the alarm panel and
modules from connect 24 or DLS.
A message is displayed on LCD
keypads indicating a firmware upgrad
e is available. On all keypads,
the blue proximity tag bar flashe
s one second on - one second off.
Users authorize the firmware
upgrade through [*][6][master
code][17].
During the update, a message indicating that a firmware upgrade is in
progress is displayed on the LCD
keypad. If the firmware update
fails, an error message is
displayed on LCD keypads.
Firmware updates are performed
under the following conditions:
•
The system is not armed
•
No AC trouble is present
•
No low battery trouble is present
•
No FTC trouble is present
•
Every alarm in memory has been viewed
•
No events are being communicated
•
An alternate communicator is present
Remote firmware upgrade is po
ssible for the following modules:
•
hardwired keypads, including RFK
•
wireless transceivers
•
alternate communicators
NOTE:
For UL listed installations, do
not use remote programming
unless an installer
is on the premises.
3.8 Local Firmware Upgrade
Alarm panel firmware can be upgrad
ed locally via DLS. Firmware
upgrade prevention rules are ignored when performing a local firm-
ware upgrade.
To perform a local firmware upgrade:
1.
Remove the front cover of the alarm panel and plug the DLS
header into the PCLink 2 connector on the alarm controller.
2.
Power down and power up the system.
NOTE:
The DLS session must be initiated within 10 seconds of
power up. Do not attempt to perfor
m a firmware upgrade if low bat-
tery trouble is present.
3.
Open the Flash Utility within DLS, select the latest firmware
file from the Web or browse to a saved flash file on your hard
drive. Follow the steps as prom
pted by the Flash Utility applica-
tion. A message is displayed when download is complete.
4.
Once the firmware update is
complete, the system powers up.
3.9 Testing the System
3.9.1 Walk Test
Installer Walk Test
Walk test enables the installer to test the operation of each detector
by tripping zones without causing an
actual alarm. Enter section
[901] to initiate a walk test. When a
zone is tripped, all system sirens
emit a tone to indicate that the zone is working correctly.
After 15 minutes without z
one activity, the walk
test termin
ates auto-
matically. To manually exit walk
test mode, enter [901] again.
3.9.2 Viewing the Event Buffer
The event buffer contains logs of
events that ha
ve occurred on the
alarm system beginning with the mo
st recent. The capacity of the
event buffer is scalable and can
hold 500/1000 events (depending on
panel model) before rolling over.
The buffer displays events accord-
ing to their time stamp, beginning with the most recent. The event
buffer can be uploaded when
it reaches 75% capacity.
NOTE:
Each event displays the time
and date, a description of the
event, the zone label, access c
ode number or any other pertinent
information. To view the ev
ent buffer, press [*][6][master
code][*][*]. 14
Section 4: System Operation
4.1 Arming and Disarming
The following table describes th
e various arming and disarming
methods available.
Table 4-1 Arming/Disarming Methods
For detailed arming/disa
rming instructions, see the PowerSeries Neo
User Manual.
4.2 Partition vs. Global Keypad
Keypads can be configur
ed to control an indi
vidual partition or all
partitions (see Keypad
Partition Setup on page
12). Loaning a keypad
to another partition does not requi
re an access code; However, no
function that requires an access code
can be performed on that parti-
tion unless the user’s code
has sufficient permission.
Single Partition Operation
Single partition keypads provide acce
ss to alarm functionality for an
assigned partition.
Single partition keypads behave as follows:
•
Display the armed state of the partition
•
Display open zones, if
the zone belongs to the partition the key-
pad is on
•
Display bypassed zones and al
low zone bypassing or creating
bypass groups of zones assigned to the keypad partition
•
Display system troubles (system
low battery, system component
faults/tampers)
•
Display alarms in memory that occurred on the partition
•
Allow the door chime to be enabled/disabled
•
Activate system test (sounds be
lls/PGMs assigned to the parti-
tion)
•
Allow label programming (zone, pa
rtition and user labels for the
partition)
•
Control command outputs (those assi
gned to the partition, or
global outputs such as
smoke detector reset)
•
Display temperature
(not evaluated by UL)
Global/Multiple Partition Operation
1.
Global keypads display a list of
all active partitions or assigned
partitions along with their curr
ent state. The Global status
screen displays the following:
12345678 (RA!N----)
R = Ready
A = Armed
! = Alarm
N = Not Ready
- = Partition not enabled
In the following example, partition
1 is armed, partition 2 is dis-
armed and ready, partition 3 is di
sarmed and not ready, partition
4 is in alarm, and partitions 4-8 are not enabled.
Global keypads behave as follows:
•
Troubles are displayed and s
ounded on the global keypad. Trou-
bles can be viewed from the gl
obal keypad display by pressing
the right scroll key then (*).
The Troubles menu is displayed.
An access code may be required to enter the [*][2] menu
depending on system programming.
•
Keypad function keys can be programmed for Global Stay Arm,
Global Away Arm and Global Disarm.
•
Multiple partition arming may
be done from a global keypad
assigned to the same pa
rtitions as the user.
4.3 Labels
Various custom labels can be crea
ted to make identification of the
alarm system, partitions, zones and
modules simpler. Labels are cre-
ated by inputting text
manually, by selecting words from the Word
Library or by downloading/uploadi
ng using DLS and Connect 24
interactive software. See “[000
] Label Programming” on page 26.
4.3.1 System Label
This feature is used to program a
custom label for the security sys-
tem. This label is used in the event buffer when system events occur.
The maximum label size is 14 ASCII characters.
See page 27 for pr
ogramming details.
4.3.2 Zone Labels
Customized labels can be created for each zone on the alarm system.
These labels are used on various disp
lays and events to identify the
zone. The maximum label size
is 14 x 2 ASCII characters.
See page 26 for
more details.
4.3.3 Partition Labels
Each partition on the alarm system
can have a unique label to identify
it. This label is displayed on par
tition keypads and event messages.
The maximum label size is 14 x 2 ASCII characters.
See page 27 for
more details.
4.3.4 Module Labels
Labels can be created for the fo
llowing optional
system modules:
•keypads
•
8 zone expander modules
•
8 output expander modules
•
wireless transceiver
•
power supply
•
4 high-current output module
•
alternate communicator module
•siren
•repeater
The maximum label size is 14 ASCII characters.
See page 27 for
more details.
Method
Description
Aw a y A r m
for 2 seconds + [Access Code*]
Stay Arm
for 2 seconds + [Access Code*]
Night Arm
+ [Access Code*]
Disarm
[Access Code]
No-Entry
Arming
+ [Access Code*]
Quick Arm/
Quick Exit
*
1
*
9
*
0
12345678
ARN!---- Section 4: System Operation
15
4.3.5 Event Labels
Customizable labels can be cr
eated for the following events:
•
Fire alarm
•
Fail to arm
•
Alarm when armed
•
CO alarm
The maximum label size is 14
ASCII characters. See page 27 for
more details.
4.3.6 Partition Command Output Labels
This feature is used to program
custom labels for command outputs.
These labels are used with output
activation events in the event buf-
fer. The maximum label size is
14 x 2 ASCII characters. See page 27
for more details.
4.4 Annunciation
4.4.1 Door Chime
The keypad can be programmed to use one of four different door
chime tones for each zone on the
system. Chime is active only during
the disarm state. Only one door ch
ime option can be enabled for each
zone.
•Beeps
•
Bing-Bong
•
Ding-Dong
•
Alarm Tone
Chime is enabled/disabled on a
partition using the [*][4] command.
4.4.2 Temperature Display
Indoor and outdoor temperature can
be displayed on system keypads
if configured in keypad programming section [861]-[876]>[023]
option 7, and sections [041]-[042].
Temperature is detected using
wireless temperature sensors installed on the system. Refer to Com-
patible Devices on page 2.
Global keypads only disp
lay outdoor temperature.
4.4.3 Low Temperature Warning
Keypads can be configured to
detect low ambient temperature.
If the temperature at the keypad drops to 6° C ± 2° C (43° F ± 3°F),
the keypad zone goes into alarm.
When the temperature rises above
9° C ± 2° C (48° F ± 3° F), the keypad zone is restored.
When this option is enabled, the ke
ypad’s zone input
functionality is
disabled. The keypad’s PGM
output is not affected.
Refer to section [861]-[876]>[023] option 8 for more information.
NOTE:
This feature has not been
evaluated by UL/ULC.
4.5 Keypad Function Keys
Keypads have 5 programmable functio
n keys that can be configured
to perform one of th
e following actions:
Table 4-2 Function Ke
y Programming Options
To program a function key:
1.
Enter Installer Programming [*][8].
2.
Enter section [861] fo
r function key programming.
3.
Enter [001] to [005] to select a function key to program.
4.
Enter a 2-digit number to assi
gn a function key operation - [00] -
[68]. See table above.
5.
Continue from step 3 until a
ll function keys are programmed.
6.
Press the [#] key twice to exit Installer Programming.
Programmed function
keys must be pressed for 2 seconds in order to
activate the function.
4.5.1 Function
Key Definitions
This section provides detailed de
scriptions of ea
ch programmable
function key option.
[00] Null Function Key
This option deactivate
s the function key. The key does not perform
any function when pressed.
[02] Instant Stay Arm
This feature is similar to the Stay
Arm function key, except that no
acknowledgment beeps are sounded, no
exit delay is applied and the
system arms immediately.
If no Stay/Away zone types are progr
ammed, the alarm system arms
in Away mode.
NOTE:
Do not use this function with CP-01 installations.
[03] Stay Arm
Only perimeter zones are armed.
Interior zones are bypassed regard-
less of whether or not
delay zones are tripped dur
ing the exit delay.
[04] Away Arm
All interior and perime
ter zones are armed.
This option only works
while the system is disarmed.
[05] No-Entry Arm [*][9]
All Delay 1 and Delay 2 zones beco
me instant zones. If a door or
window is opened the system goes
immediately into alarm. This
function is typically used when no
occupants are expected to return
to the site during the armed period. Activation of this function key
requires an access code. This func
tion only works whil
e the system is
disarmed.
See [*][9] No-Entry Arming on pa
ge 22 for more information.
[06] Chime On/Off
This function turns the door chime on
or off and is the equivalent of
pressing [*][4]. The alarm system must
be disarmed to use this func-
tion. If option 7 in section [023] is
enabled, this function key requires
an access code.
[07] System Test
This function performs a system test
when pressed and is the equiva-
lent of entering [*][6][Access Code
][4]. The alarm system must be
disarmed to use this function. Se
e System Test on page 21 for more
information.
[09] Night Arm
All perimeter and interior zones,
excluding Night zones, are armed.
This key only works while the system
is disarmed or armed in Stay
mode.
If no Night type zones are programme
d, the alarm system arms in
Away mode with an audible exit de
lay. Exit delay is silent and no
acknowledgment beeps are sounded.
Arming in this mode activate
s the Away Arming PGM output.
[12] Global Stay Arm
This function arms all partitions a
ssigned to the user in Stay mode,
provided they are ready to arm. If a
partition is not ready, the system
cannot be armed. An access code
is required with this option.
[00] Null Function Key
[17] Arm Interior
[02] Instant Stay Arm
[21]-[24] Command Output 1 to 4
[03] Stay Arm
[29] Bypass Group Recall
[04] Away Arm
[31] Local PGM Activate
[05] [*][9] No-Entry Arm
[32] Bypass Mode
[06] Chime On/Off
[33] Bypass Recall
[07] System Test
[34] User Programming [*][5]
[09] Night Arm
[35] User Functions [*][6]
[12] Global Stay Arm
[37] Time & Date Program
[13] Global Away Arm
[39] Trouble Display [*][2]
[14] Global Disarming
[40] Alarm Memory [*3]
[16] Quick Exit
[61]-[68] Partition 1 to 8 Select Section 4: System Operation
16
[13] Global Away Arm
This function arms all partitions as
signed to the user in Away mode,
provided they are ready to arm. If a
partition is not ready, the system
cannot be armed. An access code
is required with this option.
[14] Global Disarming
This function disarms all partitions
assigned to the user. An access
code is required with this option.
[16] Quick Exit
Pushing this key allows the user to
exit the premises
without disarm-
ing the system. This func
tion is equivalent to entering [*][0] at the
keypad while the partition is armed. If quick exit is not enabled on
the system, or if the system is disa
rmed, pressing this key causes an
error tone. An access code is not re
quired to use this key. See 3 –
Quick Exit on page 38 for more information.
[17] Arm Interior
This key removes or enables automatic bypass on all Stay/Away
zones (equivalent to pres
sing [*][1] while armed).
If Night zones are programmed, the
system arms in Night mode. If no
Night zones are programmed, the syst
em arms in Away mode. If the
system is armed in Stay mode,
the resulting armed mode depends on
the presence of Night zones. If ar
med in Night or Away mode, this
key switches the system back to
Stay mode. Pressing this key does
not switch the system from Night to Away.
This key only works while the sy
stem is armed and requires an
access code entry if section
[015] option 4 is disabled.
[21]-[24] Command Output 1 to 4
This function controls command out
puts 1-4 and is the equivalent of
entering [*][7][X], where X is 1, 3 or 4.
An access code is require
d to use this function.
Selecting command output 2 is the
equivalent of pressing [*][7][2]
sensor reset. See 103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2] on page 34 for more
information.
[29] Bypass Group Recall
This function bypasses all zone
s belonging to the bypass group.
Zones must be saved in the bypass
group for this function key to
operate. An access code
is required to use this
feature if section [023]
option 4 is enabled.
[31] Local PGM Activate
This function controls a PG
M connected to a keypad.
[32] Bypass Mode
This function places the keypad in
Zone Bypass mode. Selecting this
function is the equivalent of pres
sing [*][1] while disarmed. If an
access code is required for bypassing,
the user must enter the access
code before using this function. An
access code is re
quired if section
[023] option 4 is enabled.
[33] Bypass Recall
This function bypasses th
e same set of zones
that were bypassed the
last time the partition was armed.
This function is equivalent to
pressing [999] while in the [*][1] me
nu. An access c
ode is required
to use this feature if sec
tion [023] option 4 is enabled.
[34] User Programming
This function is the equivalent of
entering [*][5]. An access code is
required to use this func
tion. This key only works while the system is
disarmed.
[35] User Functions
This function puts the keypad in us
er programming mode and is the
equivalent of entering [*][6]. An ac
cess code is required to use this
function. If section [023] option 8 is
off, only the Master code can
access the [*][6] menu.
[37] Time & Date Program
This function places the keypad
in date/time programming mode. A
valid access c
ode is required.
[39] Trouble Display
This function puts the keypad in tr
ouble display mode
and is equiva-
lent to pressing [*][2]. This func
tion only works while the system is
disarmed. This function key requires
a code if section [023] option 5
is enabled.
[40] Alarm Memory
This function puts the keypad in al
arm memory display mode and is
equivalent to pressing
[*][3]. This function only works while the sys-
tem is disarmed. This
function key requires a code if section [023]
option 6 is enabled.
[61]-[68] Partition 1 to 8 Select
This function selects partition 1-8 wh
en the assigned key is pressed.
Pressing and holding the key for 2 se
conds selects the next partition.
4.6 Language Selection
The keypad can be programmed to
display messages and labels in
different languages. Perform the
following from the Installer Pro-
gramming menu:
1.
Enter installer programming [*][8][installer code]
2.
Enter section [000]>[000].
3.
Select a language using the scroll buttons or by entering a hotkey:
Table 4-3 Languages
4.
Press [#] to exit.
4.7 [*] Commands
[*] commands provide convenient ac
cess to alarm system features.
The following commands are available:
[*][1] Bypass zones
[*][2] View troubles
[*][3] View alarms in memory
[*][4] Door chime on/off
[*][5] User programming
[*][6] User functions
[*][7] Command output 1-4 on/off
[*][8] Installer
programming mode
[*][9] No entry arming
[*][0] Quick arm/Exit
While in a [*] command menu, use th
e [*] key to select an option and
the [#] key to exit to the previous screen. On an LCD keypad, use the
scroll keys to view options.
[01] – English
[15] – Greek
[02] – Spanish
[16] – Turkish
[03] – Portuguese
[18] – Croatian
[04] – French
[19] – Hungarian
[05] – Italian
[20] – Romanian
[06] – Dutch
[21] – Russian
[07] – Polish
[22] – Bulgarian
[08] – Czech
[23] – Latvian
[09] – Finish
[24] – Lithuanian
[10] – German
[25] – Ukrainian
[11] – Swedish
[26] – Slovakian
[12] – Norwegian
[27] – Serbian
[13] – Danish
[28] – Estonian
[14] – Hebrew
[29] – Slovenian Section 4: System Operation
17
4.7.1 [*][1] Bypass or Stay/Away/Night
Zones
The [*][1] command functions diff
erently depending on whether the
system is armed or disarmed.
NOTE:
For UL/ULC listed installatio
ns, group bypass is not allowed.
When The Alarm System is Disarmed
Users can bypass individual zone
s or a programmed group of zones
using the [*][1] keypad command.
Zones are commonly bypassed if
users want to have access to an area
while the partition is armed, or to
bypass a defective zone (bad contac
t, damaged wiring)
until service
can be provided. A bypassed z
one does not cause an alarm.
When the partition is disarmed, a
ll zones that were bypassed using
[*][1] are no longer bypassed, except for 24-hr zones.
If the Code Required for Bypass opti
on is enabled, an access code is
required to enter bypass mode. Only
access codes with the Bypass
attribute enabled can bypass zones (s
ee Access Code
Attributes on
page 20).
Bypassing zones with an LCD keypad:
1.
Ensure the system is disarmed.
2.
Press [*] to enter the function
menu. The keypad di
splays “Press
[*] for < > Zone Bypass.”
3.
Press [1] or [*], then key in your access code (if required).
4.
Scroll to a zone or key in the three-digit zone number. Only
zones enabled for zone bypassing
are displayed. Press [*] to
bypass the zone.
“B” appears on the display to i
ndicate the zone is bypassed. If a
zone is open, “O” appears on the di
splay. When an open zone is
bypassed, the “O” is replaced by “B.”
5.
To clear a bypassed zone, repeat
the above procedure. The “B”
disappears from the display indica
ting that the zone is no longer
bypassed.
6.
To exit bypass mode and return
to the ready state, press [#].
Bypassing zones with a LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Ensure the system is disarmed.
2.
Press [*][1], then enter your
access code (if required).
3.
Enter the three-digit number of
the zone(s) to be bypassed. The
zone light turns on to indicate
that the zone is bypassed.
4.
To clear a bypassed zone, repeat
the above procedure. On LED
keypads, the zone light turns off to indicate that the zone is no
longer bypassed.
5.
To exit bypass mode and return
to the ready state, press [#].
NOTE:
LED Keypads display the bypa
ss status of zones 1-16 only.
Other Bypass Features:
The following features are also av
ailable on the [*][1] zone bypass
menu:
Bypass Open Zones
Displays all currently open or bypassed
zones. Use the scroll keys to
view zones. Open zone
s are indicated by an (O
). To bypass a zone,
press [*]. A bypassed zone is indicated by a (B).
NOTE:
Zones with tampers or faults
must be manually bypassed.
Bypass Group
Displays a programmed group of
zones (bypass group) commonly
bypassed. Press [*] to bypass all zones in the group.
Program Bypass Group
To program a bypass group, bypass
all desired zones then select
Bypass Options > Program Bypass
Group. The selected zones are
saved to the bypass group. When finished, press [#] to exit.
In order to program a bypass group, a
master or supervisor code with
access to the appropriate partition must be used.
Bypass Recall
Press [*] while in this menu to bypass the same group of zones that
were bypassed the last time the partition was armed.
Clear Bypasses
Press [*] to clear all bypasses.
Shortcuts from the [*][1] base menu:
991 = bypass group
995 = program group 1
998 = bypass open zones
999 = bypass recall
000 = clear group
When The Alarm System is Armed
When the system is armed, pressi
ng [*][1] toggles
between stay,
away or night arming. If a night zone
is on the system, pressing [*][1]
either prompts the user for an acce
ss code if required, or sounds an
acknowledgment tone and ch
anges the arming mode.
NOTE:
If section [022], Option 5 [Stay/Away Toggle] is on, the system
does not change from Away to Stay mode.
The zone attribute for zone bypassi
ng must be enabled (see section
[002] Zone Attributes, Option 04).
Holdup zones should not be part of bypass groups.
A zone that is manually bypasse
d via [*][1] will bypass the alarm,
fault, and tamper conditi
ons when DEOL is used.
If a 24-hour zone is bypassed, ensure
that the zone is restored or dis-
abled before removing the bypass.
4.7.2 [*][2]
Trouble Display
This feature is used to view syst
em troubles. If a trouble is present,
the keypad Trouble indicator illuminat
es and an audibl
e indication is
emitted (two short beeps every 10 se
conds, except while in AC fail-
ure). Silence the audible
indicator by pressing [#].
Troubles may be viewed while the sy
stem is armed or disarmed. The
system may be programme
d to show all troubles while armed or only
fire troubles. See section [13]
option 3 on page 37 for details.
The system can be configured to re
quire a user code to view [*][2]
system troubles. See se
ction [023] option 5.
To view trouble conditions:
•
Press [*][2] to enter the Trouble menu.
On an LCD keypad, scroll to a trouble type then press [*] to
view the specific trouble. The
zone name and
trouble condition
for each trouble are displayed on the screen.
On LED/ICON keypads, zone
indicator lights illuminate to
identify existing trouble
types (e.g., Zone li
ght 1 represents Ser-
vice Required trouble type).
Press the number key correspond-
ing to a zone light to view the specific trouble. Lights 1-12
illuminate to indicate
the trouble as follows:
Table 4-4: Trouble Indications
Trouble 01
–
Service Required:
[01]
Bell Circuit Trouble: Th
e bell circuit is open.
[02]
RF Jam: The HSM2HOSTx has
detected an RF Jam condition.
[03]
Aux Supply Trouble: The al
arm controller, HSM2204 or
HSM2300 has an overcu
rrent condition on Aux.
[04]
Time and Date: System time
and date require programming.
[05]
Output 1 Fault: An HSM2204
module has detected an open
condition on output #1. Section 4: System Operation
18
4.7.3 [*][3] Alarm Memory Display
The Memory light flashes if an alar
m, tamper or fault event occurred
during the last armed period or
while the panel was disarmed (24
hour zones). Press [*][3] to view
zones in alarm memory. To clear
the memory, arm and disarm the system. When viewing alarms in
memory, LCD keypads indicate the la
st zone that has gone into alarm
first, followed by other al
arms in numerical order.
Trouble 02 – Module Battery Trouble:
[01]
Panel Low Battery Trouble: The
battery voltage (under load) is
below 11.5V. Restores at 12.5V.
[02]
Panel No Battery: No battery
connected to alarm controller.
[04]
HSM2204 01 - 04 Low Battery: An HSM2204 has a battery
voltage less than 11.5V.
[05]
HSM2204 01 - 04 No Battery:
No battery connected to
HSM2204.
[07]
HSM2300 01 - 04 Low Battery: An HSM2300 has a battery
voltage less than 11.5V
[08]
HSM2300 01 - 04 No Battery:
No battery connected to
HSM2300.
Trouble 03 – Bus Voltage:
[01]
HSM2HOSTx Bus Low Voltag
e: The HSM2HOSTx module
has measured less than 6.3V on its Aux input.
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16 Bus Low Voltage: A hardwired keypad has a
bus voltage of less than 6.9V fo
r ICON/LCD (RF version) and 7.7V
for non-RF models.
[04]
HSM2108 01 - 15 Bus Low Voltage
: A zone expander has a bus
voltage of less than 5.9V.
[05]
HSM2300 01 - 04 Bus Low Voltage: A power supply has a bus
voltage of less than 6.9V.
[06]
HSM2204 01 - 04 Bus Low Voltage: A high current output
module has a bus voltage
of less than 6.9V.
[08]
HSM2208 01 - 16 Bus Low Voltage: The low current output
module has detected a voltage le
ss than 5.9V on its aux input.
Trouble 04 – AC Troubles:
[01]
Zone 001 - 128 AC Trouble: An AC trouble has been detected
on a PGX934 PIR + Camera.
[03]
Siren 01 - 16 AC: A siren has an AC trouble.
[04]
Repeater 01 - 08 AC: A wirele
ss repeater has an AC trouble.
[05]
HSM2300 01 - 04 AC: An HSM2300 has an AC trouble.
[06]
HSM2204 01 - 04 AC: An HSM2204 has an AC trouble.
[07]
Panel AC: The alarm controller
has an AC failure condition.
Trouble 05 – Device Faults:
[01]
Zone 001 - 128: A zone is in
fault. Additional information dis-
played on LCD keypads for the following troubles: Fire (2-W
Smoke, PGX916, PGX926, PGX
936), Heat (PGX946), Freeze
(PGX905), CO (PGX913), and Probe
Disconnected (PGX905). Also
generated by a short on hardwired zone
s when DEOL is used or by a
wireless supervisory fault.
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16: A wireless or ha
rdwired keypad is in fault.
[03]
Siren 01 - 16: A siren is in fault.
[04]
Repeater 01 - 08: A wireless repe
ater is in fault (supervisory or
loss of AC/DC).
Trouble 06 – Device Low Battery:
[01]
Zone 001- 128: Wireless
zone has a low battery.
[02]
Keypad 01-16: Keypad has a low battery.
[03]
Siren 01 - 16: Siren has a low battery.
[04]
Repeater 01 - 08: Repeater has a low battery.
[05]
User 01 - 95: Wireless Key has a low battery.
Trouble 07 – Device Tampers:
[01]
Zone 001 - 128 Tamper: A wirele
ss or hardwired zone config-
ured for DEOL operation is in tamper.
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16 Tamper: A hardwire
d or wireless keypad is in
tamper.
[03]
Siren 01 - 16 Tamper: A wireless siren is in tamper.
[04]
Repeater 01 - 08 Tamper: A wireless repeater is in tamper.
Trouble 08 – RF Delinquency Trouble:
[01]
Zone 001 - 128 RF Delinquency
: No response fro
m a wireless
zone for 13 minutes. This troubl
e prevents arming until acknowl-
edged or cleared using [*][2].
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16 RF Delinquency:
No response from a wireless
keypad for 13 minutes.
[03]
Siren 01 - 16 RF Delinquency:
No response from a wireless
siren for 13 minutes.
[04]
Repeater 01 - 16 RF Delinquency:
No response from a wireless
repeater for 13 minutes.
Trouble 09 – Module Supervisory Trouble:
[01]
HSM2HOSTx not responding.
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16 not responding.
[04]
HSM2108 01 - 15 not responding.
[05]
HSM2300 01 - 04 not responding.
[06]
HSM2204 01 - 04 not responding.
[08]
HSM2208 01 - 16 not responding.
Trouble 10 – Module Tamper Trouble:
[01]
HSM2HOSTx Tamper.
[02]
Keypad 01 - 16 Tamper.
[04]
HSM2108 01 - 15 Tamper.
[05]
HSM2300 01 - 04 Tamper.
[06]
HSM2204 01 - 04 Tamper.
[08]
HSM2208 01 - 16 Tamper.
Trouble 11 – Communications:
[01]
TLM: Telephone line disconne
cted from control panel.
[02]
Receiver 01-04 FTC Trouble: Fa
ilure to communicate using
programmed receiver paths.
[03]
Alt. Comm SIM Lock: SIM card
has incorrect or unrecognized
PIN.
[04]
Alt. Comm Cellular: Radio or SIM card failure, low signal
strength detected, or
cellular network fault.
[05]
Alt. Comm Ethernet: Ethernet
connection unavailable. A valid
IP address is either not programme
d or the module was unable to get
an IP with DHCP.
[06]
Receiver 01-04 Absent: Alternat
e communicator unable to ini-
tialize a receiver.
[07]
Receiver 01-04 Supervision: Alte
rnate communicator unable to
communicate with a receiver.
[09]
Alt. Comm Fault: The altern
ate communicator has stopped
responding.
[10]
Alt Comm FTC Trouble: The al
ternate communicator has failed
to communicate an internal ev
ent not generated by the panel.
Trouble 12 – Not Networked Troubles:
[01]
Zone 001-128 Not Networked Troub
le: Generated
when a zone
becomes out of sync with the wire
less network or has not been syn-
chronized with the network after enrollment.
[02]
Keypad 01-16 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a key-
pad becomes out of sync with the
wireless network
or has not been
synchronized with the network after enrollment.
[03]
Siren

01-16 Not Networked Trouble:
Generated when a siren
becomes out of sync with the wire
less network or has not been syn-
chronized with the network after enrollment.
[04]
Repeater 01-08 Not Networked
Trouble: Generated when a
repeater becomes out of sync with
the wireless network or has not
been synchronized with th
e network after enrollment.
[05]
Wireless Key 01-32 Not Networke
d Trouble: Generated when a
wireless key becomes out of sync
with the wireless network or has
not been synchronized with
the network after enrollment. Section 4: System Operation
19
This feature can be programmed to
require an access code. See sec-
tion [023] option 6 for details.
A programmable function
key may be configured to display alarms
in memory. See “Keypad Functio
n Keys” on page 15 for details.
If configured, alarms in memory
must be cleared on 24-hour zones
before arming.
4.7.4 [*][4] Door
Chime Enable/Disable
When this feature is enabled, the keypad emits a tone whenever a
zone programmed as a Chime type
is opened or closed. Pressing
[*][4] toggles between enabled a
nd disabled. The door chime attri-
bute for each zone is programmed
in section [861]-[876], subsections
101-228.
A function key can also be programm
ed to enable/disable this fea-
ture. See “Keypad Function Keys” on
page 15 for details. This fea-
ture may require an access code
. See section [023], option 7 for
details.
The following door chime sounds may be selected:
• 6 beeps
• "Bing-Bing"
• "Ding-Dong"
• Alarm tone
4.7.5 [*][5] Program Access Codes
Use this section to perform
the following functions:
•
press [1] to program user co
des 02-95, and master code 01
•
press [2] to enroll a proximity tag
•
press [3] to enroll/assign a wireless key
•
press [4] to add a custom label for each user
•
press [5] to assign users to partitions
•
press [6] to program user attributes
Assign Access Codes
In order to access alarm system func
tionality, users must be added to
the system. This involves creating a unique access code and assign-
ing attributes to each user. Ac
cess codes are programmed via the
[*][5] menu.
Access Code Types
The alarm system provides the following access code types:
* Can only change master code if
section [015] option 6 is off.
** Yes if [023] option 8 is on.
The first two codes in the previous table are system codes. They can
be changed but not deleted. The ot
her codes are user-defined and can
be added or deleted as necessary.
By default, access codes have the
same partition and attribute progr
amming as the code used to pro-
gram them.
Access codes are either 4 or 6 di
gits in length, depending on the set-
ting of programming section [041].
Duplicate codes
are not valid.
Installer Code
This code provides access to Installer Programming [*][8]. The
installer code can access all parti
tions and perform any keypad func-
tion. This code can be program
ed by the installer in section
[006][003]. The default is 5555 (4-digit) or 555555 (6-digit).
Master Code - Access Code [01]
By default the master code can ac
cess all partitions
and can perform
any keypad function. This code ca
n be used to program all access
codes, including the supe
rvisor and duress codes.
If section [015] option 6 is on, the
master code can
only be changed
by the installer via Installer Programming.
The default is 1234 (4-digit) or 123456 (6-digit).
Maintenance Code
The maintenance code can only be
used to arm and disarm the sys-
tem. It cannot bypass z
ones. Use [*][9] to arm the system, cancel
auto-arming, or perform [*][7] command functions. No arm/disarm
bell squawks are sounded when the
maintenance code is used. The
Maintenance code can be
programed by the installer in programming
section [006][003]. The default is AAAAAA.
User Codes - Access
Codes [02] to [95]
This type of access code is used
to arm and disarm assigned parti-
tions and perform other functions as
programmed. It
can access the
[*][6] menu if programming option [023] option 8 is on. This code
cannot access the [*][5] and [*][8] menus.
User access codes are created by the
master user or s
upervisor users.
Supervisor Codes - Access Codes [02] to [95]
A supervisor code is a user code
with the Supervisor attribute
enabled. Users with this attribute can access the [*][5] and [6] user
code programming section for the
partition they are assigned to.
However, these codes can only progr
am codes which have equal or
lesser attributes. These attributes are changeable via the [*][5] menu.
A supervisor code is created by the
master user or other supervisor
users.
Duress Codes - Access
Codes [02] to [95]
Duress codes function the
same as user access codes, except they
transmit a duress reporting code wh
en used to perform any function
on the system.
Duress codes cannot be used to ac
cess [*][5], [*][6] or [*][8] menus.
Duress codes are created by the mast
er user or supervisor users.
NOTE:
Section [019] option 6 must be
on to select the Duress Codes
attribute.
One Time Use Code
A one time use code is a user code
with the One Time User attribute
enabled. This access code enables the user to arm the alarm system
an unlimited number of times. Howe
ver, a user with this code can
only disarm the system once per day.
The ability to disarm is reset at
midnight or when the one
time user code is
keyed in by the master
code user.
NOTE:
One time use code cannot be
applied to wireless keys.
One time use codes are created by the
master user or
supervisor users.
To add an access code using an LCD keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][master/supervisor
code] to edit access codes 02-95.
2.
Use the scroll keys to select
a user then press [*] to edit.
3.
On the “Press (*) for Access C
ode” menu, press [*]. The current
access code
is displayed.
4.
Key in the new acce
ss code. The code is
saved when the last
number is keyed in.
To erase an access code, select the user number and enter [*] as
the first digit.
A “-” beside a user code indica
tes it is not programmed. A “P”
indicates the code is programmed.
A “T” indicates the code is
programmed and a proximity tag is enrolled.
On an LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][master/supervisor code]
2.
Key in a 2-digit user number.
Code
Add
User
Delete
User
Arm Disarm [*][5] [*][6] [*][8]
Installer
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Master
All*
All
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Maintenance
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
User
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No** No
Supervisor
All but
Master
All but
Master
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
N o
Duress
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
One-time user No
No
Yes
1/day
No
No
No Section 4: System Operation
20
3.
Press [1] to select access code.
4.
Key in a new access code.
Access Code Attributes
Each user code has 6 attributes
that can be toggled on or off.
The default attributes of an access code are the same as the code used
to enter [*][5], whether a new code
is programmed or an existing one
is edited. The available attributes are as follows:
•
Supervisor
•
Duress code
•
Zone bypassing
•
Remote access
•
Bell squawk
•
One time user code
1 – Supervisor
Converts standard user into supe
rvisor user. See Access Code Types
on page 19 for details.
2 – Duress Code
Converts standard user code into duress code. See Access Code
Types on page 19 for details.
3 – Zone Bypassing
Users with this attribute can bypass
zones. Section [023] option 4,
Access code required for [*][1], mu
st be on to use this attribute.
4 – Remote Access
Users with this attribute can access the alarm system remotely via
SMS.
7 – Bell Squawk
When this option is assigned, the main bell squawks when the alarm
system is away armed. For example, use the arm/disarm bell squawk
attribute to have wireless key ac
cess codes squawk the bell, while
other codes are silent. To do this, enable this attribute on all access
codes associated with wireless keys
. This option is off by default for
all access codes.
NOTE:
1 squawk indicates arming comp
leted; two squawks indicates
disarming completed.
NOTE:
This feature is inde
pendent of the system option “Bell Squawk
on Away Arming.” See page 39.
The master code cannot use the Bell
Squawk attribute, but is required
to enable it for other codes.
8 – One Time Use Code 'Maid's Code'
Converts standard user code in
to one time use
code. See Access
Code Types on page 19 for details.
Do not apply this code to users
with wireless keys assigned.
Using an LCD keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][master code].
2.
Use the scroll keys to choose a user (02-95) then press [*] to
select.
3.
Scroll to “Press [*] for User Options” then press [*] to select.
4.
Scroll to a user attribute and press [*] to toggle it on or off.
Using an LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][master code]
2.
Key in the 2-digit number of the access code to edit.
[5] for attribute programming.
3.
Press the keypad number key corre
sponding to an attribute to
toggle it on or off.
Add User Labels
Custom labels can be programmed for
each user to more easily iden-
tify them on the alarm system. Labe
ls can be a maximum of 16 char-
acters.
Using an LCD keypad:
1.
Press [*][5] then select a user (02-95).
2.
On the “Press [*] for User
Labels” screen, press [*].
3.
Key in the custom user label.
For instructions on how to input
labels, see page 26.
Assigning Proximity Tags
This section is used to a
ssign proximity tags to users.
NOTE:
A proximity tag cannot be assigned to the master code.
Using an LCD keypad:
1.
In the [*][5] menu, select a
user or enter a user number.
2.
Select “Press [*] for Prox Tag”,
then pass the enrolled tag near
the tag reader on the keypad.
A proximity tag can only be
assigned to one user at a time. Invalid (un-enrolled) proximity
tags cannot be used.
To delete a proximity tag, select a user and then select Press [*] for
Prox Tag. Press the [*] key when
prompted to dele
te the proximity
tag.
Using an LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][Master/Supervisor Code].
2.
Key in a 2-digit user code.
3.
Key in [2].
4.
Pass the enrolled tag near the tag reader on the keypad.
To increase authentication flexibility, user access can be achieved by
entering a valid user code or by
swiping a proximit
y tag. Alterna-
tively, users can be required to ente
r a valid access code and present a
proximity tag. See [040] User
Authentication on page 42.
NOTE:
A proximity tag can not be assigne
d to the Master code. If a user
code with a proximity tag is delete
d, the proximity tag must be re-
enrolled.
Assigning Users to Partitions
Each user code must be assigned to
a partition(s) in order for the user
to be recognized by the alarm system
. By default, each code has the
attributes of the code used to program it.
Using an LCD keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][master code] then select a user (02-95).
An “N” indicates they are not yet assigned to a partition. A “Y”
indicates they are assi
gned to a partition.
2.
Scroll to the partition assi
gnment screen then press [*].
3.
Use the number keys
to assign partitions.
4.
Press [#] to exit.
NOTE:
The master code has access to
all partitions
and cannot be
modified.
Using an LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Press [*][5][Master/Supervisor Code].
2.
Key in the 2-digit ac
cess code of the user.
Key in [4]. A zone lights illuminat
es to indicate which partition
the user is currently assigned to. (e
.g., if zone light 1 is on, the
code is assigned to partition 1).
3.
Press the keypad number key co
rresponding to the appropriate
partition (e.g., press 1 to a
ssign the user to partition 1).
User Authentication Options
The alarm panel can be configured to
accept one of two user authen-
tication methods:
1) User code or proximity tag - th
e user can access the system by
entering a valid code or by
presenting a proximity tag.
2) User code and proximity tag - th
e user must enter a valid code and
present a proximity tag to access the system. The user code and
proximity tag must match. For exampl
e, if the tag is associated
with user 04, user code 04 must
be entered after presenting the
tag. Any other user code
is treated as invalid.
See [040] User Authentication on page 42.
NOTE:
An access code does not have to
be programmed in order for a
proximity tag or wireless
key to be operational. Section 4: System Operation
21
4.7.6 [*][6] User Functions
The [*][6] command provides access
to functions described below. If
section [023] option 8 is on, any user code can access this menu. If
option 7 is off, only the master
code can acce
ss this menu.
Event Buffer
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Event Buffer
Keypad: [*][6][master code] > [*]
This option is used to view system events stored in the event buffer.
Events are listed in the order they occurred, starting with the most
recent. The time and date are listed for all events. Some events may
have a second screen with a descript
ion. An asterisk (*) on the first
screen indicates that a se
cond screen is available.
If programmed, the event buffer au
tomatically uploads to DLS/SA
when it reaches 75% capacity. Se
e section [410] options 3 and 5.
System Test
Menu: [*][6][master code] > System Test
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 04
Select this option to test the
alarm system's be
ll output, keypad
buzzer and lights, communic
ator and standby battery.
Time and Date
Menu: [*][6][master c
ode] > Time and Date
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 01
Use this section to program the alarm system clock.
Enter time and date using the
following format: (HH:MM); (MM-
DD-YY). Valid time entries are
00-23hours, 00-59 minutes. Valid
date entries are 1-12 months, 1-31 days.
Other programming options that ma
y effect this user function:
[901]/[902] – Daylight Savi
ngs Begin/End on page 30.
Auto-Arm/Disarm
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Auto Arm/Disarm
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 02
With this feature enabled, the alarm system automatically arms in
away mode (stay/away zones acti
ve) or disarms at a programmed
time each day (see Auto-Arm Ti
me below). The ke
ypad emits three
beeps to indicate the system is arme
d and one long beep to indicate it
is disarmed.
All arming inhibit features such as
latching tampers, AC
inhibit, etc.
also inhibit Auto Arming and send
the Auto Arm Cancellation code.
Auto-Arm Time
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Auto Arm Time
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 03
This function is used to program th
e time of day each alarm system
partition automatically arms. To program an auto-arm time, select a
day of the week and then key in
the time. On LED/ICON keypads,
zone lights 1-7 represent Sunday to
Saturday. Valid time entries are
00-23 hours: 00-59 minutes.
At the programmed time, the keypad
buzzers beep for a programmed
duration (for ULC commercial bur
glary installations minimum dura-
tion is 10 minutes) to warn that automatic arming is in progress. The
siren also squawks once every 10 se
conds during this warning period
if programmed to do so. When th
e warning period is complete, the
exit delay elapses then the system arms in away mode.
Auto-arming can be canceled or
postponed only by entering a valid
access code during the
programmed warning period. When a code is
entered, the warning is silenced an
d auto-arming is ca
nceled or post-
poned, depending on the auto-arm postpone timer. The Auto Arm
Cancellation reporting code is
transmitted (if programmed).
NOTE:
Auto-arming will not silence an active bell.
NOTE:
The Auto Arm Cancellation reporting code is also transmit-
ted if arming is inhibited
by one of the following:
•
AC / DC Inhibit Arm
•
Latching System Tampers
•
Zone Expander S
upervisory Fault
Other programming options that
may effect this function:
[151]-[158] Partition Auto-Arm/Disarm on page 42
[014] System Option 2 on page 38
Enable DLS/Allow System Service
Menu: [*][6][master c
ode] > System Serv/DLS
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 05
This function enables and disables the DLS window for either 1 or 6
hours depending on the programming of section [025] option [7].
NOTE:
DLS programming is
not UL tested.
Other programming options that
may effect this function:
[020] System Option 8, bit [021] System Option 9 on page 40
[025] System Option 13, bit 7 – 1 Hour DLS Window on page 41
User Call-up
Menu: [*][6][master code] > User Call-up
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 06
When selected, this function makes a single attempt to call the down-
loading computer. The downloading
computer must be waiting for
the call before downloading can be performed. Only one call-up is
attempted. If a DLS phone number
is not programmed, the alarm
panel attempts to reach the DLS co
mputer via IP connection. If the
communicator is not properly confi
gured for IP, an error tone is
sounded.
Late to Open
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Late To Open
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 09
This function enables or disables
the Late to Open option. This
option sends a reporting code to the
central monitoring
station if the
partition has not been disa
rmed by a programmed time.
Other programming options that
may effect this function:
[201] Open/Close Events 1, opti
on [211] Miscellaneous Open/Close
Events on page 44.
Late to Open Time
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Late To Open Time
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 10
This function is used to program the
time of day the partition must be
disarmed by when the Late to Open
option is enabled. A separate
time can be programmed for each day
of the week. Valid data entries
are 00:00 - 23:59. 99:99 disables
the late to open feature for the
selected day.
Select a day of the week by scrolli
ng while in the Late to Open menu,
or by using keys 1-7 to select S
unday to Saturday respectively.
SMS Programming
Menu: [*][6][master c
ode] > SMS Programming
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 11
This function is used to program
up to 8 phone numbers for SMS
command access and communications
. SMS enables users to send
commands to the alarm pa
nel via a mobile device.
Leave an SMS phone number bla
nk to disable it. SMS phone num-
bers are not related to phone numbers
used to dial the central moni-
toring station.
NOTE:
If SMS command and control feat
ures are disabled (section
[382] option 5) then this function is
not accessible. See the alternate
communicator installation manual for more information.
Brightness Control
Menu: [*][6][master code
] > Brightness Control Section 4: System Operation
22
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 12
This function is used to change the
brightness level of keypad display
backlighting. Use the scro
ll keys to increase an
d decrease brightness
or enter a value from 00 to 15. Selecting 00 turns off keypad back-
lighting.
Contrast Control
Menu: [*][6][master code] > Contrast
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 13
This function is used to change th
e contrast level of keypad displays.
Use the scroll keys to increase and decrease contrast or enter a value
from 00 to 15. Selecting 00
turns off keypad contrast.
Buzzer Control
Menu: [*][6][master code
] > Buzzer Control
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 14
This function is used to change
the volume level of keypad buzzers.
Use the scroll keys (LCD keypads
) or the [*] key (LED/ICON key-
pads) to increase and
decrease volume or ke
y in a value from 00 to
15. Selecting 00 turns
off the keypad buzzer.
NOTE:
For UL/ULC listed installations, do not turn off the keypad
sounder.
Authorize Firmware Update
Menu: [*][6][master code
] > Authorize Update
Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 17
This function is used to give author
ization to the system to start the
firmware upgrade process after a
ll firmware upgrade files for the
keypads, HSM2HOST, control pane
l and alternate communicator
have been fully downloaded.
Once this option is activated, th
e keypads and syst
em automatically
exit [*][6] and indicate that th
e firmware update is in progress.
4.7.7 [*][7] Command Outputs 1-4
Menu: [*][7][master code if
required] > Output Control
Keypad: [*][7][master
code if required]
This option is used to activate or
deactivate command outputs 1 to 4
for each partition.
Using an LCD keypad:
1.
Press [*][7] to enter Output Control mode.
2.
Scroll to an output and press [*]
to select it, or key in a PGM
number. The output is toggled on or off.
Using an LED/ICON keypad:
1.
Press [*][7] to enter Output Control mode.
2.
Key in a command output number.
The output is toggled on or
off.
NOTE:
If no command outputs are programmed this function is not
available. Other programming options th
at may effect th
is user function:
[009] PGM Types, options 121-124 – Command Outputs 1-4 on page
32.
4.7.8 [*][8] Inst
aller Programming
Use this option to place the alar
m system in Installer Programming
mode. Installer Programming is used to manually program alarm
panel and module options.
An installer’s code is required to access
this function.
Installer Programming is exited automatically after 20 minutes of
inactivity.
When viewing data in sections w
ith an LCD keypad, use the [] keys to scroll.
Other programming options that ma
y effect this user function:
[990] Installer Lockout Enable/Disable on page 54.
4.7.9 [*][9] No
-Entry Arming
This function is used to arm the
alarm system whil
e occupants are on
the premises. Pressing [*][9] and then
keying in an access code arms
the panel without an entry delay
on delay type zones and bypasses
stay/away and night type zones.
After the exit delay, delay 1 and de
lay 2 type zones
behave the same
as instant zones. Stay/away zone
s remain bypassed. The entry delay
can be activated or deac
tivated at any time while the system is armed
using [*][9].
NOTE:
If the alarm system is armed usi
ng [*][9], disarming is only pos-
sible from a keypad inside the premis
es unless a wireless key is used.
NOTE:
Entry of a valid access code is
required following this key only
when the system is disarmed. Wh
en armed, if programming section
[015] option 4 (Quick Armi
ng/Function Key) is off,
an access code entry
is required.
Global delay zones always
have an entry delay, even if the system is
armed using [*][9].
4.7.10 [*][0] Quick Arm/Exit
This feature operates differently
depending on whether or not the
alarm system is armed or disarmed.
When disarmed:
Pressing [*][0] arms the alarm syst
em without having to enter an
access code. This provides a fast
method of arming for regular users
and allows users without an ac
cess code to arm the system.
NOTE:
The Quick Arm feature (section [015] option 4) must be enabled
in order for this function to operate as intended.
When armed:
This feature provides a means to exit the premises while the alarm
system is armed without havi
ng to disarm then rearm it.
Pressing [*][0] starts a 2-minute
timer that enables any door pro-
grammed as a delay
zone to be opened and cl
osed once without trig-
gering an alarm.
If the door is not closed at the end of the exit window, the entry delay
sequence begins. Any addi
tional activity on anothe
r zone triggers the
associated alarm
or delay sequence.
4.8 SMS Command and Control
The user can perform certain func
tions on the alarm panel by remote
using SMS text messages. In addi
tion, the system sends SMS mes-
sages to the user to confirm co
mmands . SMS programming options
are accessed through programming section [851].
The security system only responds
to SMS messages sent from desig-
nated phone numbers (programmed
in section [851]>[311]-[342]).
For more information on SMS comm
and and control, and for a com-
plete listing of communicator pr
ogramming options, refer to the
alternate communicator installation manual.
4.8.1 SMS Command a
nd Control Functions
The following alarm system functions are controllable via SMS:
•
Stay arm the system
•
Away arm the system
•
Night arm the system
•
Disarm the system
•
Activate/deactivate
command output 1-4
•
System status request
•
Alarm memory request
•
Zone bypass
•
Zone unbypass
SMS text messages must be formatted as follows:
<
access code>
e.g., Stay Arm partition 1 1234
Once the command is received and executed by the alarm system, the
user receives a conf
irmation text message. Section 4: System Operation
23
4.9 Visual Verification
This feature enables the central st
ation operator to view captured
images of the premises in the even
t of an alarm event. Combination
camera/motion detectors can be inst
alled throughout the premises to
provide visual verification covera
ge. The microphone on the camera
PIR can be disabled.
Visual verification sessions ar
e triggered by the following:
•Fire key
•
Medical key
•
Panic key
To set up video verifi
cation on a partition:
•
Enroll the camera PIR; [804]
•
Set video ve
rification options; [804]>[841]:
• [001] Visual Verification Enable/Disable
• [002] View Time Window
• [003] View Other Alarms
•
Input a custom label to identify the camera PIR; [000]>[001]
•
Enable this option on the altern
ate communicator (section [10]
option 2).
Refer to the Camera PIR installation manual for more details.
NOTE:
Visual Verification ha
s not been evaluated
by UL and shall be
disabled for UL certified installations. Section 5: Programming
24
Section 5: Programming
5.1 How to Program
This section describes how to
view alarm system programming
options using the supported keypad types.
5.2 Programming Methods
The alarm system can be progra
mmed using the following methods:
Table 5-1 Programming Methods
5.2.1 Template Programming
Template programming allows the in
staller to quickly program the
minimum functions required for ba
sic operation. The installer is
prompted to enter a 5-digit code that selects predefined programming
configurations:
Digit 1 – zone 1-8 definition options
Digit 2 – system EOL options
Digit 3 – alarm controll
er communications options
Digit 4 – alarm controller call directions
Digit 5 – DLS connection options
(see Appendix C: Template Prog
ramming Tables on page 105 for
programming information).
Perform template programming after
completing the hardware instal-
lation. Ensure you have the inform
ation listed below available.
Record this information in the programming worksheets for future
reference:
•
Monitoring station telephone nu
mber - provided by the alarm
monitoring service.
•
Monitoring station account code
- provided by the alarm moni-
toring service.
•
Downloading access code.
•
Entry delay - installer defined.
•
Exit delay - installer defined.
•
Installer code - programmable,
unique 4-digit code. The default
value is [5555].
To perform template programming:
1.
At the “Ready to Arm” screen, enter [*][8][installer code][899].
2.
At the “Enter Data” screen, en
ter [00001] to accept the existing
default programming.
Once this section has been entered, the installer cannot exit until all
sections are completed. Enter new
data and/or press the [#] key to
accept the displayed data
and proceed to the ne
xt section. Changing a
single digit, then pressing the [#] ke
y advances to the next section but
does not save the changed data. Enter
all 5 digits or scroll to the end
of template programming
and exit to save data.
3.
After entering [00001], the firs
t telephone number is displayed.
Enter the monitoring station te
lephone number after the “D.”
Press [#] to complete the entry.
4.
After programming the first te
lephone number, en
ter a system
account code.
• The system account code ca
n be any 6-digit combination
of numbers (0-9) and letters
(A-F). If the system account
code is 4-digits, the last
two digits must be “FF.”
• To enter letters A through F, press [*] then the numbers 1
through 6 for the letter A thro
ugh F respectively. Press [*]
again to revert back to de
cimal entry. E.g., to enter
“1234FF” press [1234*66].
See “[310] Account Codes”
on page 47 for additional
details.
5.
After programming the system
account code, the downloading
access code is disp
layed. Enter the new downloading access
code or press [#] to proceed to
the next step. See section [402]
PSTN DLS Phone Number Programming on page 51 for addi-
tional details.
6.
The entry delay is the amount of
time given to disarm the alarm
system, after entering the premis
es through a delay type zone,
before an alarm is sounded. Pre
ss [>][>][>] to accept the default
time of 30 seconds (030) or en
ter an entry delay between 001
and 255. E.g., Press 020 for a de
lay of 20 seconds. See “[005]
System Times” on page 30
for additional details.
7.
The exit delay is the amount of
time given to exit the premises
after the alarm system is armed. Press [>][>][>] to accept the
default time of 120 seconds or
enter an exit delay between 001
and 255. E.g., press 030 for a de
lay of 30 seconds. See “[005]
System Times” on page 30

for additional details.
8.
After programming the exit delay,
enter a 4 or 6-digit installer
code, depending on the value in se
ction [041] Access Code Dig-
its on page 42. See [006] Inst
aller Defined Ac
cess Codes on
page 30

for installer code details.
9.
Press [#] to exit Template Programming.
5.2.2 DLS Programming
DLS programming involves downl
oading custom programming
using DLS software and a computer
. This can be done locally or by
remote.
NOTE:
For UL listed system
s an installer must be on the premises.
Local Programming With PC-Link
Follow the steps below in the sequence indicated to set up local pro-
gramming using DLS:
1.
Connect AC Wiring.
In a new installation, the backup battery requires 24 Hrs.
charging. AC Power is require
d for PC-Link Programming until
the battery is charged.
2.
Plug the PC-Link header into the alarm controller. A DLS ses-
sion is initiated on the DLS computer.
3.
When the session is complete,
remove the PC-Link cable from
the alarm controller.
4.
Complete the installation.
Remote Programming
DLS programming can be performed
remotely by connecting to the
alarm system via telephone line,
cellular network or Ethernet.
Refer to section [401] DLS/SA
Options on page 50 for details.
NOTE:
AC Power must be present for the alarm system to answer
incoming calls from DLS.
Method
Description
Procedure
Template
programming
Use pre-defined
templates to quickly
apply basic
programming and to
set up DLS
downloading.
Press [899] at the “Enter
Section” screen.
See Template Programming
below for details.
DLS
programming
Download and apply
programming using
DLS-V™ (v.1.4 or
higher) software.
For local DLS, use a PC-
Link cable and laptop with
DLS-IV software installed.
For remote DLS, use a
telephone line, cellular
network or the Internet.
Installer
programming
Manually program all
alarm system and
device options.
Press [*][8][installer code]
while the system is
disarmed. Section 5: Programming
25
5.2.3 Installer Programming
Installer Programming is used to
manually program alarm system
options. Access this mode by keying
in [*][8][Installer Code]. Use
the scroll keys to navigate through
the menus or jump directly to a
specific section by keying in a section number.
Programming consists of
toggling on and off options in each section
or by populating data fields. For
descriptions of all programming
options, see 5.3 Programming
Descriptions on page 26.
5.2.4 Viewing Programming
Programming sections ca
n be viewed from any system keypad. The
method for viewing and
selecting programming
options using LCD,
LED and ICON keypads depends on
the keypad type used. See
below for specific instructions
on programming with each keypad
type.
Generally, programming options are
accessed in the following way:
1.
Enter Installer Programming mode ([*][8]).
2.
Navigate to a specific programming section.
3.
Select an option to view
or change it’s programming.
All programming options are numbere
d and can be accessed by navi-
gating through the menu (LCD) or by
keying in the program section
number. The programming wo
rksheets and descript
ions later in this
section provide a place to record
custom programming settings and
are numerically listed to assist in locating specific sections.
Keypad Types
The sections below describe how
programming is viewed and inter-
preted using each of the supporte
d keypad types. For more informa-
tion on each keypad type, see the in
struction sheet included with the
keypad.
LED and ICON
Both of these keypads use LEDs
to communicate information. The
programming icon illuminates to indicate the alarm system is in
Installer Programming mode. The
Armed light turns off and the
Ready light turns on while
in a programming section.
Programming sections fa
ll under two categories: those that require
options to be “toggled” on or off, a
nd those that require data to be
keyed in.
Toggle options are indica
ted across the top of the display using zone
numbers 1-8. For example, if op
tions 1 and 4 are on, the display
appears as follows on the different keypads:
Figure: 4 LED and ICON displays
To enable or disable a toggle option, press the number key on the
keypad corresponding to the option.
Sections requiring data input, such
as phone numbers, display infor-
mation in a binary format using z
one LEDs 1-4 as described in the
following chart:
Figure: 5
When a section is entered, the ke
ypad immediately displays the first
digit of information programmed. Using the example in Figure 5
above, if zone 1 and 4 are illuminated, the first programmed digit in
the section is 9. Use the scroll ke
y [>] to advance to the next digit.
For sections that require multiple
two or three-digit numbers, the
keypad beeps three times after each entry and moves to the next item
on the list. After the last digit in
the section is en
tered, the keypad
beeps rapidly eight times and ex
its the programming section. The
Ready light turns off and the Armed light turns on.
To exit programming at any time, pre
ss the [#] key. All changes made
up to that point are saved.
LCD Keypad
LCD keypads use a full-message di
splay that provides visual and
numerical navigation through the
programming sections. The Armed
light illuminates when Installer Pr
ogramming mode is
activated. Use
the scroll keys to move through me
nu options and press [*] to select.
Alternatively, enter a specific section number. The Armed light
flashes to indicate a sub-section has
been selected. Press [*] to select
a sub-section. The Ready light il
luminates and the information pro-
grammed in the section is displayed.
For programming sections with
toggle options, press the correspond-
ing number on the keypad to turn the option on or off. The display
changes accordingly.
Sections requiring data i
nput, such as phone numbers, display the full
data in fields up to 32 characters long.
To input data, use the scroll keys to
select a character then press the
keypad button corresponding to the nu
mber/letter required. Scroll to
the next character and repeat the procedure as needed.
For information on ente
ring HEX data, see below.
A 2-second error tone is sounded if an invalid key is pressed.
Press the [#] key to exit the program
section at any time. All changes
made up to that point are saved.
5.2.5 Programming Hex and Decimal
Data
Hexadecimal (HEX) digits may be
required during programming. To
program a HEX digit,
press the [*] key while in a programming sec-
tion that requires a data entry. HE
X programming mode activates and
the Ready light begins to flash.
The following table indicates whic
h number should be pressed to
enter the corresponding HEX digit:
Table 5-2 HEX Digit Programming
The Ready light continues to flash
after the HEX digit is entered. If
another HEX digit is required pr
ess the corresponding number. If a
decimal digit is required, press th
e [*] key again. The Ready light
illuminates and the panel returns to regular decimal programming.
Example: To enter ‘C1’ for a closi
ng by user 1, enter [*] [3] [*], [1]
[*] to enter hexadecimal m
ode (Ready light flashes)
[3] to enter C
[*] to return to decimal mode (Ready light is on)
[1] to enter digit 1
If an error is made while inputting
data, press the [#] key to exit the
section. Select that section again and re-enter the information cor-
rectly.
When using a pulse communications
format, a decimal zero [0] does
not transmit for account and repor
ting codes. Program
ming a zero [0]
tells the alarm system not to send any pulses for that digit. Decimal
zero [0] is a filler digit. To make
a zero [0] transmit, it must be pro-
grammed as a He
xadecimal ‘A.’
4
1
Value
Enter
Telephone Dialer
HEX [A]
HEX [B]
HEX [C]
HEX [D]
HEX [E]
HEX [F]
Press [*][1][*]
Press [*][2][*]
Press [*][3][*]
Press [*][4][*]
Press [*][5][*]
Press [*][6][*]
Not supported
Simulated [*] key
Simulated [#] key
Dial tone search
Two-second pause
End of number Section 5: Programming
26
Example: For the 4-digit account number ‘4032’, enter [4] [*] [1] [*]
[3], [0].
[4] to enter the digit 4
[*] to enter Hexadecimal m
ode (Ready light flashes)
[1] to enter A
[*] to return to decimal m
ode (Ready light is solid)
[3] to enter the digit 3
[2] to enter the digit 2
5.3 Programming Descriptions
This section provides descriptions of
all alarm controller options pro-
grammable by the installer.
5.3.1 Adding Labels
[000] Label Programming
Zone and other labels on the al
arm system can be customized.
Program labels locally or downl
oad/upload using DLS and Connect
24 interactive software. Local la
bel programming is done via a sys-
tem keypad, as described below.
[000] Language Selection
(LCD keypads only)
Use this section to set the langua
ge displayed by LCD keypads. To
select a language:
1.
Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][Installer Code].
2.
Enter programming section [000]>[000].
3.
Key in the 2-digit number
corresponding to the language
required. See below:
[001][001]-[128] Zone Labels
Customized labels can be created fo
r each available zone. Labels can
be programmed at the keypad or
downloaded/uploa
ded using DLS
and Connect 24 interactive software. The maximum label size is 14 x
2 ASCII characters.
Manual Labels
The following procedure describes how
to add zone labels using the
LCD keypad:
1.
Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][Installer Code].
2.
Press [*], scroll to
Zone Labels and pres
s [*] again.The first
zone is displayed. Alte
rnately, press [000][001].
3.
Scroll to the zone label to be programmed or key in the zone
number. (e.g., 001 for zone label 1).
4.
Scroll to the desired character’
s location using the[] keys.
5.
Enter the number of the corres
ponding character group until the
desired character is disp
layed (see table below).
Example: Press the “2” key 3 times to enter the letter “
F.
”
Press the “2” key 4 times to enter the number “
2.
”
To delete a character, use the [] keys to move the cursor
under the character, then press [0].
If any key other than [] is pressed before [0], the cursor
moves one space to the right
and deletes that character.
6.
Press [#] to save the changes and exit.
Zone Label Options
To access zone label options such
as using ASCII characters, chang-
ing letter case and clearing the displa
y, press [*] while in Zone Label
programming. The Select Option menu
is displayed. Use the []
keys to access the following options:
Word Library
The Word Library is a database of words commonly used when pro-
gramming labels. Individua
l words can be combined as needed (e.g.,
Front + Door). Words that do not fit on the first line are automatically
moved to the bottom line.
To program a custom label using the Word Library:
1.
Enter Installer Program
ming: [*][8][Installer Code].
2.
Press [*], scroll to Zone Labe
ls and press [*] again.The first
zone is displayed. Alte
rnately, press [000][001].
3.
Scroll to the zone label to be programmed or key in the zone
number (e.g., 001 for zone label 1).
4.
Press [*] to open the Select Option menu.
5.
Press [*] again to select the Word Entry option.
6.
Enter the 3-digit number corresponding to a word (see Appen-
dix B: Word Library on page 104) or use the scroll keys []
to view words in the library.
7.
Press [*] to select the word.
8.
To add another word, repeat
the above procedure from step 4.
9.
To add a space, press
the right scroll key [>].
10. To clear characters, select Cl
ear to End or Clear Display from
the Select Options menu.
To save the current label, press [#] to exit label programming.
01 = English
11 = Swedish
22 = Bulgarian
02 = Spanish
12 = Norwegian
23 = Latvian
03 = Portuguese
13 = Danish
24 = Lithuanian
04 = French
14 = Hebrew
25 = Ukrainian
05 = Italian
15 = Greek
26 = Slovakian
06 = Dutch
16 = Turkish
27 = Serbian
07 = Polish
18 = Croatian
28 = Estonian
08 = Czech
19 = Hungarian
29 = Slovenian
09 = Finnish
20 = Romanian
10 = German
21 = Russian
Press
To Select/Display
[
*
]
[#]
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[SELECT]
[ESCAPE] (note: exit
s without saving label)
[SPACE]
[A], [B], [C], [1]
[D], [E], [F], [2]
[G], [H], [I], [3]
[J], [K], [L], [4]
[M], [N], [O], [5]
[P], [Q], [R], [6]
[S], [T], [U], [7]
[V], [W], [X], [8]
[Y], [Z], [9], [0]
Option
Description
WORD ENTRY
Provides access to the Word Library, a collec-
tion of words commonly used when program-
ming labels. See below for details.
ASCII ENTRY
Used to access unc
ommon characters or as a
primary method for programming labels. 255
character entries are available. Use the []
keys to scroll through the characters or enter a
3-digit number from 000-255. Press [*] to
select a character. See page 114 for available
ASCII characters.
CHANGE CASE
This option toggles
the letter between upper
case (A, B, C) and lower case (a, b, c).
CLEAR TO END
This option clears the display from the cursor to
the end of the display.
CLEAR DISPLAY This option
clears all characters.
SAVE
Saves the new label. Section 5: Programming
27
[051] Zone Tamper Label
This label is displayed when a zone is tampered. The maximum label
size is 14 x 1 ASCII characters.
[052] Zone Fault Label
This label is displayed when a zone
is in fault. The maximum label
size is 14 x 1 ASCII characters.
[064] CO Alarm Message
Use this section to program a cust
om label that is displayed on key-
pads during a carbon monoxide alar
m. The maximum label size is 14
x 2 characters.
[065] Fire Alarm Message
Use this section to program a cust
om label that is displayed on key-
pads during a fire alar
m. The maximum label size is 14 x 2 charac-
ters.
[066] Fail To Arm Event Message
This message is displayed on all pa
rtition keypads if a user attempts
to arm the system when it is not ready to arm. The message clears
after five seconds. The maximum la
bel size is 16 x 2 characters.
[067] Alarm When Armed Event Message
This message is displayed if an alarm occurred while the system was
armed. The message is displayed wh
en the system is disarmed and
remains on the screen for 5 seconds
. Following this, the zones that
went into alarm are displayed.
The maximum label size is 16 x 2
characters.
[100] System Label
Use this section to program a custom label for the security system.
This label is used in the event buffer when system events occur. The
maximum label size is
14 x 1 characters.
[101]-[108] Partition 1-8 Labels
Use this section to program a name
for each partition for display on
partition keypads and ev
ent messages. The maximum label size is 14
x 2 characters. See “Programming”
on page 24 for specific instruc-
tions on how to program labels.
[201]-[208] Partition Command Output Labels
Use this section to program cust
om labels for command outputs.
These labels are used with output
activation events in the event buf-
fer. Enter subsection [201] to [208]
to select partition 1 to 8, then
enter subsection [001] to [004] to
select command output 1 to 4 label.
The maximum label size is 14 x 2
characters. See “Programming” on
page 24 for specific instructi
ons on how to program labels.
[601]-[604] Schedule Labels
Use this section to program cu
stom labels for command output
schedules. These labels are used to
identify schedules for PGM com-
mand outputs 1-4. The maximum la
bel size is 16 characters. See
“Programming” on page 24 for specif
ic instructions on how to pro-
gram labels.
[801] Keypad Labels
Use this section to create custom labels for keypads on the system.
Select 001-016 for keypads 1-16.
[802][001]-[016] HSM2108 Zone Expander Labels
Use this section to create custom
labels for Zone expanders on the
system. Select 001-016 fo
r zone expanders 1-16.
[803][001]-[016] HSM2208 Output Expander Label
Use this section to create a cust
om label for the output expander.
Select 001 for HSM2208. Select
001-016 for zone expanders 1-16.
[806] HSM2HOSTx Label
Use this section to create a custom label for the 2-way wireless trans-
ceiver.
[809][001]-[004] HS2300 Power Supply Label
Use this section to create custom
labels for power supplies on the
system. Sele
ct 001-004 for power supply 1-4.
[810][001]-[004] HS2204 High-Current Output Supply
Label
Use this section to create custom
labels for high-current output sup-
plies on the system. Select 001-004 for output supply 1-4.
[815] Alternate Co
mmunicator Label
Use this section to create a custom label for the alternate communica-
tor.
[820][001]-[016] Siren Labels
Use this section to create custom labels for sirens on the system.
Select 001-016 for sirens 1-16.
[821][001]-[008] Repeater Labels
Use this section to create custom
labels for wireless repeaters on the
system. Sele
ct 001-008 for output supply 1-8.
[999][Installer Code][999] Default Labels
This section is used to return all labels to factory settings. Installer
code is required to
verify deletion.
5.3.2 Zone Setup
The following section describe
s zone programming options.
[001] Zone Type
A zone type defines how a zone ope
rates within the system and how
it responds when triggered.
[001]-[128] Select Zone
Every zone on the system must be
assigned a zone type. The avail-
able zone types are listed below.
000
–
Null Zone
Assign to all unused zones.
001
–
Delay 1
Commonly assigned to primary points
of entry. Follows entry delay 1
and exit delay timers (section [005]).
Arming the alarm system starts
the exit delay timer. After the ex
it delay has expi
red, opening the
door starts the entry delay timer.
During entry delay, the keypad
buzzer prompts the user to disarm the system.
002
–
Delay 2
Commonly assigned to secondary points of entry (further from the
keypad). Follows entry delay 2 timer (section [005]).
003
–
Instant
Commonly used for perimeter doors an
d windows, this zone type fol-
lows the exit delay. The alarm is triggered instantly if the zone is
tripped after the exit delay expires.
004
–
Interior
Commonly assigned to interior moti
on sensors near a point of entry,
such as a foyer or hallway, that mu
st be accessed to
reach the keypad.
The alarm is activated if the system
is armed and a delay type zone
(e.g., front door) is not tr
ipped first, or if the
entry/exit timer expires
before the alarm is disarmed. Otherwise, the zone is instant if tripped. Section 5: Programming
28
005
–
Interior Stay/Away
Similar to Interior zone type except
that the system
bypasses the zone
when armed in Stay mode. Commonl
y used to activate perimeter
zones while permitti
ng free movement throughout the interior.
006
–
Delay Stay/Away
Similar to delay 1 except that th
e zone is bypassed when armed in
Stay mode. Commonly used with
motion detectors that cover an
entry point.
007
–
Delayed 24-Hour Fire
This zone is used with smoke dete
ctors and functions similar to the
standard fire zone, except the
communicator delays the alarm mem-
ory and transmission by 30 seconds
. If the alarm is acknowledged by
pressing any key, the siren is silenc
ed and the transmission aborted. If
the smoke detector is
not restored after the
alarm has been acknowl-
edged, the siren output activates
after 90 seconds and another 30-sec-
ond delay starts. A code
is required to silence the alarm. A tamper or
fault causes a fire troubl
e to log and transmit.
008
–
Standard 24-Hour Fire
This zone is used with smoke de
tectors. The siren sounds instantly
when the smoke detector
is activated. If enabled, the communicator
immediately transmits the alarm to the monitoring station. A tamper
or fault of this zone type causes
a fire trouble to log and transmit.
009
–
Instant Stay/Away
Commonly assigned to interior moti
on sensors. This zone type is
bypassed when armed in Stay mode
, but functions like an Instant
zone [003] when armed in Away mode.
010
–
Interior Delay
Commonly assigned to interior mo
tion sensors. When Away armed,
this zone type functions like the In
terior zone type. When Stay or
night armed, tripping the zone acti
vates entry delay 1. Tripping this
zone during exit delay
does not cause the system to arm in Away
mode, as tripping a regular
Delay type zone does.
011
–
Day Zone
Commonly used in areas where im
mediate notification of entry is
desired. When disarmed, tripping
this zone activates the keypad
buzzer but does not log or report the
event. When armed, tripping this
zone activates the siren then
logs and reports the event.
NOTE:
An alarm during exit delay causes the siren to activate and
remain on when exit delay expires.
012
–
Night Zone
Commonly assigned to interior mo
tion detectors in
areas accessed
during the night. This zone functions
like an Interior Stay/Away zone
[005] when armed using any method
except the following: If Stay
armed, this zone is bypassed; if
armed using [*][1], this zone is
bypassed.
017
–
24-Hour Burglary
This zone type is active at all times. It reports an alarm if the alarm
system is armed or disarmed. This
zone type sounds the siren for the
length of Bell time-out if the
audible attribut
e is enabled.
018 – 24-Hour Bell/Buzzer
When the alarm system is armed and th
is type of zone is tripped, the
siren activates for the duration of
the bell time-out. If the alarm sys-
tem is disarmed when this type of
zone is tripped, the keypad buzzer
activates until an acce
ss code is entered.
023
–
24-Hour Supervisory
This zone is active and reports alarms at all times when tripped. The
siren and keypad buz
zer do not activate.
024
–
24-Hour Supervisory Buzzer
When tripped, the keypad buzzer
emits a steady tone until a valid
access code is entered.
025
–
Auto Verify Fire
(
Hardwired smoke detectors
)
When the zone is activated, a 30-
second delay begins but no fire
alarm sounds. If the same zone is
activated again up to 60 seconds
after the delay expires, the alarm is triggered immediately. If the
same zone is activate
d after 60 seconds, the
entire sequence begins
again.
If a second fire zone is violated
during the auto-verify sequence, both
zones a fire alarm is
immediately triggered.
(
Wireless smoke detectors
)
When the zone is activated, a 40-
second delay begins. The alarm is
triggered if the zone is still faulte
d after 30 seconds. If the zone is no
longer in alarm, an 80-second veri
fication timer begins. If any fire
zone is activated during this
period, the alarm is triggered.
If another fire zone is
activated during the auto
verify sequence, both
zones go into alarm immediately.
Note: Wireless smoke detectors used wi
th this zone type must have a
built in siren to act as a pre-alert to the system alarm.
027
–
Fire Supervisory
When this zone is tripped, the
keypad buzzer activat
es and a supervi-
sory alarm is sent to the monitoring
station. A valid
access code must
be entered to silence the buzzer.
040
–
24-Hour Gas
Instant alarm when activated, audibl
e alarm at default.
This zone type
may be assigned to any device type.
041
–
24-Hour CO
This zone type is used with CO dete
ctors. In the event of an alarm, a
distinctive siren cadence is sounded.
This is followed by a 5-second
pause and then repeated. After
4 minutes, the 5-second pause is
extended to 60 seconds; however, BT
O must be progr
ammed with a
value of 5 minutes or higher. The
siren is silenced when an access
code is entered or the siren times out.
042
–
24-Hour Holdup
Instant alarm when activated, silent alarm at default.
NOTE:
Not for use in UL listed installations.
043
–
24-Hour Panic
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
045
–
24-Hour Heat
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
046
–
24-Hour Medical
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
047
–
24-Hour Emergency
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
048
–
24-Hour Sprinkler
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
049
–
24-Hour Flood
Instant alarm when activated,
audible alarm at default.
051
–
24-Hour Latching Tamper
Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default. The alarm
system cannot be armed until In
staller Programming is entered.
052
–
24-Hour Non-Alarm
This zone is active at all times
but does not cause an alarm. Zone
attributes such as Zone Bypassi
ng and Door Chime affect the func-
tionality of this zone. This zone
type can also be assigned to a tem-
perature sensor if indoor/outdoor
temperature display is required
without temperature warni
ngs or alarm conditions. Section 5: Programming
29
056
–
24 Hour High Temperature
This zone type is us
ed with temperature se
nsors and is activated
when the temperature rises above
a programmed threshold (set in
section [804]>[828]). Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at
default. This zone type
generates an alarm when the system is armed
or disarmed.
NOTE:
The temperature threshold includes a 2.5 °C (5 °F) differ-
ence between a given st
ate and its restored c
ondition. For example,
an alarm at 6 °C is restored at 3.5°C (High temperature) or 8.5°C
(Low temperature), depending
upon the zone type selected.
The zone type for temperature se
nsors must be 24 Hour High/Low
Temperature in order for the
sensor to operate properly.
057
–
24 Hour Low Temperature
This zone type is us
ed with temperature se
nsors and is activated
when the temperature drops below
a programmed threshold (set in
section [804]>[828]). Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at
default. This zone type
generates an alarm when the system is armed
or disarmed.
060
–
24-Hour Non-Latching Tamper
This zone is always
active and reports a tamper condition with no
audible alarm when opened or tamper/faulted.
066
–
Momentary Keyswitch Arm
Often used with a keyswitch modul
e*, turning the key alternately
arms and disarms the system and silences the alarms. Tampers and
faults only initiate their respecti
ve trouble sequence. The keypad
gives no indication when this
zone type is activated.
NOTE:
With audible alarm active, us
ing the keyswitch when dis-
armed is the same as entering an ac
cess code at the keypad. Using the
keyswitch during the firs
t 30 seconds of a dela
yed fire alarm is the
same as pressing a key at the ke
ypad (the 90 second delay starts).
Activation of a keyswitc
h zone arms or disarms the system. Activa-
tion of this zone type is NOT logge
d nor is the Police code transmit-
ted. Bypassed zones of this ty
pe are not un-bypassed when the
system is disarmed. When the zone
is bypassed, a zone bypass event
buffer log and communication occu
rs immediately, NOT when the
system is armed.
*Keyswitch module not for use in
UL/ULC listed installations.
067
–
Maintained Keyswitch Arm
Often used with a keyswitch modul
e, turning the key arms the sys-
tem. The system cannot
be disarmed by turning the key again. Tam-
pers and faults only in
itiate their respective trouble sequence.
Note:
DO NOT use for wireless zones.
Activation of the zone does
not log or transmit the Police code
. Bypassed zones of this type are
not un-bypassed when the system is
disarmed. When the zone is
bypassed, a zone bypass event buf
fer log and communication occurs
immediately, NOT when the system is armed.
With an audible alarm active, usi
ng the keyswitch wh
en disarmed is
the same as entering an access co
de at the keypad. Activating this
zone type during the first 30 seconds
of a delayed fire alarm is the
same as pressing a key at the keypa
d (the 90 second delay starts). If
left in the open state, the system
does not arm until the zone is
restored and tripped again.
068
–
Momentary Keyswitch Disarm
Use with a keyswitch module. Activa
ting and restoring
this zone dis-
arms the partition and silences alarms. Tampers or faults do not dis-
arm the zone.
Note:
Do not use as a global zone.
069
–
Maintained Keyswitch Disarm
Used with a maintained keyswitch.
Activating this
zone disarms the
partition.
Tampers or faults on this zone
do not disarm the partition.
071
–
Doorbell Zone
This zone type sounds a chime through keypads on the partition
when activated. No alarms are gene
rated. Various ch
ime tones can be
programmed. Disabling do
or chime on the partiti
on also disables the
chime on this zone.
NOTE:

Do not use as a global zone.
[002] Zone Attributes
Zone attributes are used to custom
ize the operation of zones. When a
zone type (section [001]) is programm
ed, the default zone attribute is
automatically assigned.
When programming attributes using LED/ICON keypads:
Ready light ON: Program attributes [1-8]
Ready light and Armed light ON: Pr
ogram attribute [9-16] (press [1]
for option 9, press [6] for option 14 etc.)
Press [9] to switch between attribut
es [1-8] and attributes [9-16].
NOTE:
These attributes override defa
ult settings. Do NOT change
fire zone attri
butes from their default settings.
[001]-[128] Select Zone
The attributes listed below can be
enabled and disabled for each
zone.
01
–
Bell Audible
ON: An alarm activates the siren.
OFF: Silent alarm.
02
–
Bell Steady
ON: Siren output is st
eady when in alarm.
OFF: Siren output pulses when in alarm.
03
–
Door Chime
ON: The keypad chimes when the zone
is open and when the zone is
secured.
OFF: The zone does not chime.
04
–
Bypass Enabled
ON: The zone can be manually bypassed.
OFF: The zone cannot be bypassed.
05
–
Force Arm
ON: The system can be armed with
the zone open. The zone is tem-
porarily bypassed and, when secure
d, is monitored by the system.
OFF: The system cannot be ar
med if the zone is open.
06
–
Swinger Shut Down
ON: When the zone goes into alarm for the number of times pro-
grammed in the Swinge
r Shutdown Counter (see page 47), it shuts
down with no further tran
smissions sent to th
e monitoring station.
The siren follows swinger shutdown if programmed.
OFF: Swinger shutdown
is disabled. All alarms are transmitted.
07
–
Transmission Delay
ON: Reporting of zone alarms is delayed for the programmed time in
section 377 (see page 48). If a valid acce
ss code is entered within this
time, no alarm signal is communicated.
OFF: When an alarm occurs, the re
porting code is transmitted imme-
diately.
08
–
Burglary Verification
ON: Enabled for cross zoning/police
code. Zone alarms are not com-
municated until a
burglary verified event occurs.
OFF: Not enabled for cr
oss zoning/police code.
09
–
Normally Closed (NC)
ON: The zone requires a normally closed loop.
OFF: The zone follows program
ming in section [013] option 2.
See note after option 11. Section 5: Programming
30
10
–
Single End of Line (SEOL) Resistors
ON: The zone requires a single
end-of-line resistor (5.6K).
OFF: The zone follows program
ming in section [013] option 2.
See note after option 11.
11
–
Double End of Line (DEOL)
ON: The zone requires two e
nd-of-line resistors (5.6K).
OFF: The zone follows programmi
ng in section [013] option 2.
NOTE:
If more than 1 option is enabled for options 09, 10, and 11
the lowest attribute number take
s precedence. If options 09 and 10
are both enabled the zone follows
the normally closed loop configu-
ration.
12
–
Fast Loop/Normal Loop Response
ON: Follows a fast loop response of 50ms.
OFF: Follows a normal loop respons
e as programmed in the Zone
Loop Response T
ime section.

5.3.3 System Times
This section describes how to progr
am various timers applicable to
the entire alarm system.
[005] System Times
This is the base menu used by inst
allers to progra
m timers, including
system area [000], partition time
rs [001]-[008], and daylight saving
time [901]/[902]
[000] – System Area
Bell Cutoff Time:
System sirens follow this timer. Fi
re alarms follow this timer if sec-
tion [014] option 8 (Fire Bell Conti
nues Option) is off. System tam-
pers follow this timer. The bell
cutoff time is programmed in
minutes. Valid entries are 001 to 255 minutes.
Keypad buzzer alarms do
not follow this timer.
Burglary Verification Timer:
If another zone with the Burglary
Verification attribute enabled is
violated within the duration of this
timer, a burglary verified event is
communicated and logged. “Burglar
y Verified” is displayed on the
keypad when the system is disarmed.
The burglary verification timer is
programmed in minutes. Valid
entries are 000 to 255 minutes.
Zone Loop Response Time
Loop response time is a
3-digit entry from 005 to 255 programmed in
10ms increments. The minimum av
ailable loop res
ponse time is
50ms (e.g., program 005 for 50ms).
Automatic Clock Adjust
This value adds or subtracts seconds
from the system clock at the end
of each day to compensate for inaccuracies. To determine the adjust-
ment value, monitor the time lost or gained by the alarm system over
a period of time and calculat
e the average gains or loses.
Example #1: The clock loses an av
erage of 9 seconds per day. Pro-
gram the alarm controller to adju
st the clock by 51 seconds for the
last minute of each day. This spee
ds up the alarm controller’s clock
by 9 seconds, correcting the problem.
Example #2: The clock gains an aver
age of 11 seconds per day. Pro-
gram the alarm controller to adju
st the clock by 71 seconds for the
last minute of each day.
This slows down the al
arm controller’s clock
by 11 seconds, correcting the problem.
If the Auto-arm time is set for 23:59,
any change to the Clock Adjust
option will directly affect the Auto-arm pre-alert time.
[001]-[008] Partition 1-8 Timers
The following timers can be
applied to each partition.
NOTE:
For UL installations, the Entr
y Delay plus the Communica-
tions Delay must not exceed 60 seconds.
Entry Delay 1:
This value determines the entry de
lay time for delay
1 type zones.
Valid entries are 001 to 255 seconds.
Entry Delay 2:
This value determines the entry de
lay time for delay
2 type zones.
Valid entries are 001 to 255 seconds.
NOTE:
The system follows the entry timer that activates first.
Exit Delay:
This value determines the exit delay time when arming the system.
During exit delay, both the Ready
and Armed LEDs are on. When the
exit delay expires, both LEDs turn off.
[901]/[902] – Daylight Savings Begin/End
Daylight Begin [001] and Daylight End [002]:
Set the date and time daylight
savings starts and ends.
Month

Valid entries are 001-012 (January to December).
Week
Valid entries are 000-005
Enter “000” to program a specific date (1-31) in the Day field. Enter
001-005 to program the specific week of the month. 005 is the last
week of the month.
Day
1-31 (if 000 is programmed in the
Week field). 0-6 (Saturday-Sun-
day) if 001-005 is programmed in the Week field.
Hour
Valid entries are 0-23 hours. This is the time of day to advance or
turn the clock back.
Increment
:
Valid entries are 1 or 2 hours. This
is the number of hours to advance
or turn the clock back.
5.3.4 Access Codes
This section is used by installers to program the installer code, the
master code and the maintenance
code. For information on program-
ming other access code
s, see 4.7.5 [*][5]
Program Access Codes on
page 19.
[006] Installer De
fined Access Codes
This is the base menu used by instal
lers to program the installer code
[001], the master code [002] and
the maintenance code [003]. See
below for details.
[001] – Installer Code
This code is used by the installer to gain access to Installer Program-
ming [*][8]. Users with th
is access code have ac
cess to all levels of
system programming.
[002] – Master Code
This code is used by the master
user, a person designated to perform
operational tasks beyond those of the
standard user. The master code
provides access to functionality in the [*][5] and [*][6] menus.
[003] – Maintenance Code
This code is usually assigned te
mporarily to maintenance personnel
who must deactivate the alarm to enter the premises. The mainte-
nance code can arm and disarm th
e system, but does not grant access
to any other functionality. Section 5: Programming
31
5.3.5 PGM Configuration
This section describes how to se
t up and configure programmable
outputs.
PGMs are used to send electrical current to external devices such as
lights and sirens, usually when an alarm event occurs. The alarm con-
troller provides up to three 50mA PGMs and one 300mA PGM.
PGM outputs can be expanded usi
ng the optional 8-output expander
(HSM2208) and the 4 high-curre
nt output expander (HSM2204).
Programming an output is a four-step process:
1.
Program the PGM
2.
Assign the PGM to a partition.
3.
Assign an output attribute.
4.
Assign an output option.
Refer to [011] PGM Config. Opti
ons on page 70 for PGM slot align-
ment.
[007] PGM Programming
This is the base menu used by th
e installer to assign PGMs to the
main bell and a partition.
[000] Main Bell Partition Assignment
This programming section is
used to define whic
h partitions activate
the main bell when they go into alarm. All partitions are selected by
default.
[001]-[164] PGM Partition Assignment
This option enables the installer to assign each PGM output to a par-
tition. To assign a PGM to a part
ition, first select the PGM output
(PGM 1-164), then sele
ct the partition (1-8).
NOTE:
This field is only supported by
PGM types that have multiple
partition capabilities (e.g., comm
and outputs, away arming). It does
not affect system outputs
(e.g., ground start pulse).
[008] PGM Timer Programming
[000] PGM Minutes/Seconds
This option determines if the timer is in minutes or seconds.
[001]-[164] PGM Timer
This timer programs the duration (i
n seconds or minutes) that PGMs
1-164 activate if programmed to follow the PGM Timer.
Select option 001-164 for PGM 1-164.
This option does not affect out
puts programmed as Sensor Reset.
5.3.6 PGM Types
The output types described in this
section can be as
signed to alarm
controller and output expander module PGMs.
[009] PGM Types
Each alarm controller supports
up to 2 or 4 PGMs and can be
expanded using HSM2208 output e
xpander modules. PGM attributes
are defined in section [010] PG
M Attributes on page 33. Program-
mable Output Attributes.
[001]-[164] Select PGM
100 – Null PGM
This option deactivates the PGM output.
101 – Burglary and Fire Bell Follower
This PGM output follows:
• Fire pre-alerts
• Temporal three fire signal (if enabled)
• All audible burglary and
fire alarms by partition
• Bell cut-off time
• Bell squawk conditions
• Audible exit fault
This output activates when the alar
m output is active and turns off
when the alarm output is silenced.
The siren pattern matches the pro-
grammed cadence for the zone that we
nt into alarm. Cadence priority
is as follows:
•
fire alarm cadence
•
CO alarm cadence
•
other alarm cadences
This output will NOT fo
llow bell squawks of
any kind. The main
siren still activates for all alarms.
102 – Delayed Fire and Burglary
This output type operates
the same as the Burglary and Fire Bell Fol-
lower (PGM type 01), but does no
t activate until the transmission
delay time expires.
When a zone with transmission dela
y enabled is tripped, the Bell,
Regular Fire and Burglary PGMs activate. At the end of the transmis-
sion delay, the delayed Fire a
nd Burglary output activates.
This PGM is usually used to cont
rol outdoor sirens. If a false alarm
occurs, the user has time to disarm
the system before the external
sirens activate.
NOTE:
If a zone alarm occurs but
does not follow transmission
delay, this PGM activates immediately, even if transmission delay is
active for a different zone alarm.
This output activates for
audible exit fault and
does not interfere with
the operation of any other programmable output.
103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2]
This output is normally active and
deactivates for 5 seconds when a
[*][7][2] fire reset command is ente
red or when an auto verify alarm
is detected. This option is used
to reset power for latching smoke
detectors. The keypad buzzer does no
t sound for the 5-second period.
Refer to page 8 for instructi
ons on wiring smoke detectors.
104 – 2-Wire Smoke
When this PGM is programmed, the onboard PGM functions as an
input instead of an output. 2-wire
smoke detectors can be connected
to this input, which means that a z
one input does not need to be used.
The PGM is also supervised, and a
trouble condition is generated if a
2.2K
Ω
resistor is not pr
esent between the PGM terminal and Aux+.
The 2-wire smoke detect
or input creates an instant and latching
alarm.
109 – Courtesy Pulse
Courtesy pulse causes an output
to activate for the entry and exit
times, plus 2 minutes. This
option is typically used
to activate a cour-
tesy light near the exit door for the
duration of the entry/exit times.
111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow
PGM output activates with the keypa
d buzzer when triggered by the
events below. The PGM output remains active for the duration of the
keypad buzzer.
This PGM type does not activate
for local key presses or trouble
beeps.
114 – Ready to Arm
This PGM activates when the system is ready to arm (all non-force
armed zones on the system are restored). The PGM output de-acti-
vates when an access code is entered to arm the system and the exit
delay begins. This PGM operates as
described during walk test mode
(if all zones are restored).
• 24-hour supervisory buzzer
zone alarm
• No activity arm pre-alert
• Entry delay
• Audible exit fault
• Audible exit delay
• Door chime Section 5: Programming
32
115 – System Armed Status
This output activates when all sele
cted partitions are armed (end of
the exit delay) in either Stay or
Away modes. The output de-activates
when the system is disarmed.
116 – Away Armed Status
This PGM switches on at the begi
nning of exit delay when the sys-
tem is armed with stay/away zones ac
tivated. If the system is armed
with the stay/away zones always ac
tive, then the away output is
active.
117 – Stay Armed Status
This PGM output activates if the system is armed with the stay/away
zones bypassed.
120 – Away Armed with No Zone Bypasses Status
When assigned to a single partition,
this PGM output activates when
the system is armed with stay/a
way and night zones active, and no
zones are bypassed.
If assigned to multiple partitions,
all partitions must be armed in
away mode with no bypassed zone
s before the PGM activates. If a
force armable zone is violated at the time of arming, the PGM does
not activate. When the zone is restored, the PGM activates.
121-124 – Command Outputs 1-4
Command Outputs 1-4 are user-activ
ated by entering [*] [7] [1-4] at
any keypad. When an output is
activated, three acknowledgment
beeps are sounded.
PGM outputs of this type can be
programmed to follow a pre-defined
schedule (programmed in secti
on [601]-[604] Programming Sched-
ule 1-4 on page 52). Even if the out
put follows a schedule it can be
manually turned ON, OFF or follow the schedule through [*][7].
To select a schedule for these PG
M outputs to follow, see [009]
PGM Types on page 31.
129 – Partition Status Alarm Memory
This feature is intended to be used
on a keyswitch plat
e, with a light
controlled by this PGM to indicate
system status. The output acti-
vates (steady) at the
beginning of exit delay when the partition is
armed. If an alarm occurs on the ar
med partition, th
e output flashes
for the remainder of the armed period. If an alarm occurs on a dis-
armed partition (24 Hr Zone), the
output flashes until the alarm is
acknowledged.
This output will not activate duri
ng a walk test or for FMP key,
holdup or audible/silent
PGM2 input alarms.
132 – Holdup Output
When a Holdup zone (Type [42]) go
es into alarm, this output acti-
vates until the partition is either
armed (access code, keyswitch,
[*][0], etc.) or disarmed. A tamper
or fault on a holdup zone type
does not activate this output. This
output does not activate In Walk
Test mode. If a global
holdup alarm occurs, each partition with
holdup zones assigned must be armed
or disarmed before the holdup
output deactivates. If holdup alarms
occur on multiple partitions, an
access code must be entered at ea
ch partition before the output deac-
tivates.
NOTE:
Not for use with UL/ULC listed installations.
134 – 24-Hour Silent Input (PGM 2)
With this input the keypad does not
indicate an alarm, the siren
remains silent, and the si
gnal is sent to the cent
ral station.
This input
does not follow swinger shutdown. A 2.2K

EOL resistor
is required
for this input (to Aux+). If a short
or open occurs, an alarm is gener-
ated.
Not for use with UL installations.
135 – 24-Hour Audible Input (PGM 2)
LCD keypads indicate that the syst
em is in alarm, the siren sounds
for the duration of bell timeout, and
the signal is sent to the central
station. This input does not
follow swinger shutdown. A 2.2K

EOL
resistor is required for this input
(to Aux+). If a short or open occurs,
an alarm is generated
for all partitions and
sirens. PGM partition
assignment does not affect this PGM type.
146 – TLM and Alarm
This output activates wh
en a telephone line fault condition is present
AND an alarm occurs. The output remains active until an access code
is entered to disarm or the TLM
trouble is restored. The output acti-
vates for all audible and silent al
arms (except duress) if a TLM trou-
ble is present. If an alarm activates this output in the disarmed state, it
will deactivate when the system is armed or the telephone line is
restored. This output type
also activates if alarms are in memory (not
only for currently active alarms) when the TLM fault occurs. The
alarms in memory must have exceeded the bell timeout.
147 – Kissoff
This PGM output activates for two seconds after the alarm system
receives a kissoff signal from the central station.
148 – Ground Start
This output activates for two se
conds before the alarm system
attempts dialing to obtain a dial tone on Ground Start telephone
equipment. Two 2-second pauses must
be inserted at the beginning of
the telephone number when using this option.
149 – Alternate Communicator
This output can be used to notify
the home owner, before they enter
the premises, that an alarm has oc
curred. This output can be pro-
grammed to activate when any of
the following system events
(alarms) occur on the system:
•
Fire (Fire Key, Fire Zones)
•
Panic (Panic Key and Panic Zones)
•
Burglary (Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away and 24-hour Bur-
glary Zones)
•
Opening/Closing Events
•
Zone Auto-Bypass. (Please see
08 – Zone Auto-Bypass on page
35 for details).
•
Medical (Medical Key, Me
dical and Emergency Zones)
•
Burglary Verified
•
Opening After Alarm
•
Emergency Alarm
•
Duress Alarm
In the armed state, this output deactivates when the system is dis-
armed. If an alarm activates this out
put in the disarmed
state, the out-
put deactivates if a valid access code is entered within the bell
timeout or if the system is armed
after the bell time
out has expired.
This output activates for silent an
d audible alarms or medical condi-
tions only. It will not activate
during pre-alert or delays.
NOTE:
The PGM attributes for this option, programmed in section
[010], differ from the standard sele
ction of attributes normally pro-
grammed.
155 – System Trouble
This output can be programmed to
activate when any of the follow-
ing trouble conditions are present:
•
Service Required
•
Loss of Clock
•
DC Trouble
•
Bus Voltage
•
AC Trouble
•
Device Fault
•
Device Low Battery
•
Device Tamper
•
RF Delinquency
•
Module Supervisory
•
Module Tamper
•
Communications Section 5: Programming
33
•
Not Networked
This output deactivates when all
of the selected trouble conditions
are cleared.
156 – Latched System Event (Strobe)
This output can be used to notify
the home owner, before they enter
the premises, that an alarm has
occurred. This output can be pro-
grammed to activate when any of
the following alarms occur on the
system:
•
Burglary (Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away and 24-Hour Bur-
glary Zones)
•
Fire (Fire Key, Fire Zones)
•
Panic (Panic Key and Panic Zones)
•
Medical (Medical Key, Me
dical and Emergency Zones)
•
Supervisory (Supervisory,
Freezer and Water Zones)
•
Priority (Gas, Heat, Sprinkler and 24-Hour Latching Zones)
•
Holdup (Holdup zones)
•
Output follows pulse timer (section [008] PGM Timer Pro-
gramming on page 31).
This output does not activate
during pre-alert or delays.
In the armed state, the output deac
tivates only once th
e system is dis-
armed.
If an alarm activates this output in
the disarmed st
ate, the output
deactivates when a user enters a
valid access code
during bell time-
out. The output also deac
tivates if someone arms the system after the
bell timeout has expired.
If assigned to a single pa
rtition, the output activates when an enabled
alarm event occurs on the assigned
partition. When assigned to mul-
tiple partitions, the out
put activates when an alarm occurs on any par-
tition and, if configured to latch, w
ill deactivate when any partition is
disarmed. (or a valid disa
rming procedure is used).
157 – System Tamper
This output activates when any ta
mper condition is present and deac-
tivates when all tamper conditions
are cleared (if set for steady oper-
ation). If set for a pulsed operation,
the output deactivates when the
PGM Output timer expires. These tampers include zone tampers
(DEOL), case tampers, TLM troubl
e, RF jam, and all zone and
device tampers.
161 – DC Trouble
This output activates when one of
the following low battery condi-
tions is detected:
•
Alarm controller low or absent battery
•
Module low or absent battery
•
Wireless zone low battery
•
Wireless keypad low battery
•
Wireless siren low battery
•
Wireless key low battery
The output can be configured to fo
llow the state of the low battery
trouble(s) or it can activate for
a period of time
and automatically
restore.
165 – Proximity Tag Used
This output activates when the selected proximity tag is presented.
Assign this output to a user by entering a user number from 001 to
095. To enable this attribute for all proximity tags, enter 000 in PGM
attribute [011]. See [011] PGM
Configuration Options on page 37.
175 – Bell Status and Programming Access Output
This PGM activates when the sire
n, Installer Programming mode or
DLS/SA is active. It deactivates after bell timeout, when Installer
Programming is exited or when
DLS/SA programming is discon-
nected.
176 – Remote Operation
This output is activated and deac
tivated remotely on command from
DLS software.
NOTE:
Not for use with UL/ULC listed installations.
184 – Open After Alarm
This output activates when the syst
em has been disa
rmed after an
alarm. It deactivates when a valid user code is entered or when the
PGM Output timer expires.
200 – Zone Follower - PGM By Zone
This option allows the PGM to ac
tivate when the assigned zone is
opened and deactivate when the zone
is restored or, if programmed,
when a valid access code is entere
d. This PGM follows the state of
the assigned zone, regardless of th
e partition the zone or PGM is
assigned to.
To program which zone the PGM will follow, see [011] PGM Con-
figuration Options on page 37.
201-216 – Zone Follower (Zones 1-128)
This output type is assigned to a
group of zones and is normally acti-
vated, but deactivates when a zone
is tripped. Zone
s are assigned to
this output in the following groups:
If multiple zones are enabled, any ac
tive zone in that group triggers
the output. The PGM will not activ
ate again until all zones are
restored.
[010] PGM Attributes
The following options are used to
program the operating characteris-
tics of the main bell and PGM outputs.
[000] Main Bell Mask
This programming section is used to
configure the types of audible
alarms that trigger the main bell output on the alarm controller. All
options are selected by default.
Fire Alarm
ON: Fire alarm ([F] key, Fire z
ones) activates the main siren.
OFF: Fire alarm does not activate the main siren.
CO Alarm
ON: CO alarm activates the main siren.
OFF: CO alarm does not ac
tivate the main siren.
Burglary Alarm
ON: Burglary alarm (Delay, Instant,
Interior, Stay/Away, Night, Inte-
rior Delay, Instant Stay/Away, Da
y, 24-hour Burglary) activates the
main siren.
OFF:

Burglary alarm does not activate the main siren.
24-Hour Flood Alarm
ON: Main bell activates in the event of a 24-Hour Flood alarm.
OFF:

Main bell does not activate in
the event of a 24-Hour Flood
alarm.
Bell Squawks
ON: Squawks activate the main siren.
Bell squawks must be enabled
to use the following options:
• Bell Squawk on arm (single)
• Bell Squawk on disarm (double)
• Bell Duration Auto-Arm (single every second)
201 – Zones 1-8
209 – Zones 65-72
202 – Zones 9-16
210 – Zones 73-80
203 – Zones 17-24
211 – Zones 81-88
204 – Zones 25-32
212 – Zones 89-96
205 – Zones 33-40
213 – Zones 97-104
206 – Zones 41-48
214 – Zones 105-112
207 – Zones 49-56
215 – Zones 113-120
208 – Zones 57-64
216 – Zones 121-128 Section 5: Programming
34
• Bell Squawk on Exit
(single every second)
• Bell Squawk on Entr
y (single every second)
• Bell Squawk on Trouble
(single every 10 seconds)
OFF: Squawks do not acti
vate the main siren.
[001]-[164] PGM 1-28 Attributes
The following PGM attributes can be
assigned to a PGM. Each attri-
bute has various toggle options, de
pending on the PGM type selected
(section [009]).
101 – Fire and Burglary
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
102 – Delay Fire and Burglary
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2]
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
03 – Access Code Required
/ No Code Required
ON – Access code required for activation
OFF – No access code required for activation
109 – Courtesy Pulse
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow
01 – True Output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation, activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated duri
ng normal operation, deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active until an
access code is entered or cer-
tain criteria have been met,
depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active unt
il the PGM output timer expires.
09 – Entry Delay
ON: activates on entry delay.
OFF: does not activate on entry.
10 – Exit Delay
ON: activates on exit delay.
OFF: does not activate on exit delay.
11 – Door Chime
ON: activates when chime is enabled.
OFF: does not activate when chime is enabled.
12 – Keypad Buzzer Zone
ON: activates when keypad buzzer goes into alarm.
OFF: does not activate when
keypad buzzer goes into alarm.
13 – Audible Exit Fault
ON: activates when audible ex
it fault pre-alert begins.
OFF: does not activate when audi
ble exit fault pre-alert begins.
14 – Auto-Arm Pre-Alert
ON: activates when auto-arming pre-alert begins.
OFF: does not activate when
auto-arming pre-alert begins.
114 – Ready To Arm
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
115 – Armed Status
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
116 – Armed Away Mode
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
117 – Armed Stay Mode
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
121-124 – Command Output 1-4
01 – True Output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation, activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal
operation, deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active until
an access code is entered or
certain criteria have been me
t, depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active until
the PGM output timer expires.
03 - Access Code Required / No Code Required
ON – Access Code Re
quired for Activation
OFF – No Access Code
Required for Activation
129 – Partition Status Alarm Memory
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
132 – Holdup Output
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
146 – TLM Alarm
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
147 – Kissoff Output
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
148 – Ground Start
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal opera
tion. Activated when triggered.
OFF: active during normal operatio
n. Deactivated when triggered.
149 – Alternate Communicator
01 – True Output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation, activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal op
eration, deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active
until an access code is entered or cer-
tain criteria have been me
t, depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active until
the PGM output timer expires.
04 – Fire Alarm Section 5: Programming
35
ON: activates with fire alarm, [F
] key, fire zones, 2-wire smoke.
OFF: does not activa
te with fire alarm.
05 – Panic Alarm
ON: activates with panic al
arm, [P] key, panic zones.
OFF: does not activate with panic alarm.
06 – Burglary Alarm
ON: activates with burglary alarm.
OFF: does not activate with burglary alarm.
07 – Open/Close
ON: activates with opening or closing.
OFF: does not activate
with opening or closing.
08 – Zone Auto-Bypass
ON: activates when a zone
is automatically bypassed.
OFF: does not activate when
a zone is automatically bypassed.
09 – Medical Alarm
ON: activates with medical alarm, [
+
] key, medical zones.
OFF: does not activate
with medical alarm.
10 – Burglary Verified
ON: activates with burglary verified alarm (or police code).
OFF: does not activate with
burglary verified alarm.
11 – Open After Alarm
ON: activates when the system is disarmed with an alarm in
memory.
OFF: does not activate when th
e system is disarmed with an
alarm in memory.
12 – Emergency Alarm
ON: activates with zone emergency alarm.
OFF: does not activate wi
th zone emergency alarm.
13 – Duress Alarm
ON: activates with duress alarm.
OFF: does not activate with duress alarm.
155 – System Trouble
01 – True Output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation, activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated duri
ng normal operation, deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active until an
access code is entered or cer-
tain criteria have been met,
depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active unt
il the PGM output timer expires.
04 – Service Required
ON: activates on service required trouble condition.
OFF: does not activate on se
rvice required trouble condition.
05 – Loss of Clock
ON: activates on loss of clock trouble condition.
OFF: does not activate on
loss of clock trouble condition.
06 – DC Trouble
ON: activates if a panel low or
no battery trouble is detected, or
if an HSM2204/2300 1-4 low or no battery trouble is detected.
OFF: does not activate
on DC Trouble condition.
07 – Bus Voltage
ON: activates when a system module has measured a low Aux
voltage.
OFF: does not activate fo
r a module low voltage trouble.
08 – AC Trouble
ON: activates when any system
device detects
an AC Failure
condition.
OFF: does not activate
for AC Failure conditions.
09 – Device Fault
ON: activates if one of the foll
owing device fault conditions is
present:
• zone 001 – 128 fault
• keypad 01 -16 fault
• siren 01 – 16 fault
• repeater 01 – 08 fault
• fire trouble
• CO trouble
• gas trouble
• heat trouble
• freeze trouble
• probe disconnected trouble
OFF: does not activate if a de
vice fault condition is present.
10 – Device Low Battery
ON: activates if any
of the following device low battery condi-
tions is present:
• zone 001 – 128
• keypad 01 – 16
• siren 01 – 16
• repeater 01 – 08
• user 01 – 32 (wireless keys)
OFF: does not activate if a devi
ce low battery condition is pres-
ent.
11 – Device Tamper
ON: activates if any
of the following device tamper conditions
is present:
• zone 001 – 128
• keypad 01 – 16
• siren 01 – 16
• repeater 01 – 08
OFF – does not activate if a devi
ce tamper condition is present.
12 – RF Delinquency
ON: activates if any of the foll
owing RF delinquency troubles is
detected:
• zone 001 – 128
• keypad 01 – 16
• siren 01 – 16
• repeater 01 – 08
OFF – does not activate if an
RF delinquency condition is pres-
ent.
13 – Module Supervisory
ON – activates if any of the
following module supervisory trou-
bles is detected:
• HSM2HOST
• keypad 01 – 16
• zone expander 01 – 15
• HSM2204 1 – 4
• HSM2300 1 – 4
• HSM2208 01 – 16
OFF – does not activate if a
module supervisory trouble is
detected.
14 – Module Tamper
ON – activates if any of the fo
llowing module tamper conditions
is present:
• HSM2HOST
• Keypad 01 – 16
• Zone expander 01 – 15
• HSM2204 1 – 4
• HSM2300 1 – 4
• HSM2208 01 – 16 tamper troubles
OFF – does not activate if a modul
e tamper condition is present.
15 – Communications
ON – activates if any of the
following communications condi-
tions is present:
• TLM trouble
• FTC receiver 1 – 4
• SIM Lock trouble
• Cellular Trouble
• Ethernet Trouble Section 5: Programming
36
• Receiver 1 – 4 absent
• Receiver 1 – 4 supervision trouble
• SMS Configuration trouble
• Alt comm. Fault.
OFF – does not activate if a co
mmunications trouble condition
is present.
16: – Not Networked
ON – activates if any of the fo
llowing not netw
orked conditions
is present:
• Zone 001 – 128
• Keypad 01 – 16
• Siren 01 – 16
• Repeater 01 – 08
• User 01 – 95 (wireless ke
ys) not networked troubles
OFF – does not activate if a not
networked trouble condition is
present
156 – Latched System Event
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated duri
ng normal operation. Deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.
OFF: output remains
active until an access
code is entered or
certain criteria have been me
t, depending on the PGM type.
04 – Fire Alarm
ON: activates with fire alarm, [F
] key, fire zones, 2-wire smoke.
OFF: does not activa
te with fire alarm.
05 – Panic Alarm
ON: activates on panic al
arm (audible or silent).
OFF: does not acti
vate on panic alarm.
06 – Burglary Alarm
ON: activates on burglary alarm.
OFF: does not activate on burglary alarm.
07 – Medical Alarm
ON: activates on medical alarm.
OFF: does not activate on medical alarm.
08 – Supervisory
ON: activates on supervisory alarm.
OFF: does not activate
on supervisory alarm.
09 – Priority Event
ON: activates on priority alarm.
OFF: does not activa
te on priority alarm.
10 – Holdup
ON: activates on Holdup alarm.
OFF: does not activate on Holdup alarm.
11 – Duress Alarm
ON: activates on duress alarm.
OFF: does not acti
vate on duress alarm.
12 – Emergency Alarm
ON: activates on emergency alarm.
OFF: does not activa
te on emergency alarm.
13 – Fire Supervisory
ON: activates on fire supervisory alarm.
OFF: does not activate
on fire supervisory alarm.
14 – Fire Trouble
ON: activates on fire trouble condition.
OFF: does not activate
on fire trouble condition.
15– CO Alarm
ON: activates on CO alarm.
OFF: does not activa
te on CO alarm.
157 – System Tamper
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal op
eration. Deactivated when
triggered.
09 – System/Module Tampers
ON: activates when any modul
e tamper condition occurs.
OFF: does not activate when
any module tamper condition
occurs.
10 – Zone Tampers
ON: activates when any zone
tamper condition occurs.
OFF: does not activate when
zone tamper conditions occur.
161 – DC Trouble
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal op
eration. Deactivated when
triggered.
02 – PGM Timer
ON: output remains active
until an access code is entered or cer-
tain criteria have been me
t, depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active until
the PGM output timer expires.
09 – Battery Low
ON: activates when a lo
w battery trouble occurs.
OFF: does not activate when
a low battery trouble occurs.
10 – Battery Absent
ON: activates when a batt
ery absent trouble occurs.
OFF: does not activate when a
battery absent trouble occurs.
165 – Prox Used
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal operati
on. Deactivated when triggered.
175 – Bell Prog Access
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal oper
ation. Deactivated when trig-
gered.
176 – Remote Operation
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal oper
ation. Deactivated when trig-
gered.
184 – Open After Alarm
01 – True output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal oper
ation. Deactivated when trig-
gered.
201 – 216 Zone Follower Zones 1-128
01 – True Output/Inverted
ON: deactivated during normal
operation. Activated when
triggered.
OFF: activated during normal op
eration. Deactivated when
triggered.
02 – Timed Output / Latched Output
ON: output remains active
until an access code is entered or cer-
tain criteria have been me
t, depending on the PGM type.
OFF: output remains active until
the PGM output timer expires.
09-016 – Zone Terminals 1-8
ON: zones associated with term
inals 1-16 are enabled for zone
follower operation. Section 5: Programming
37
OFF: zones are not enabled
for zone follower operation.
[011] PGM Configuration Options
This section is used to config
ure PGM types that offer multiple
options.
[001]-[164] Select PGM
The following options may be selected for each PGM:
Zone Follow PGM By Zone
This option is used to specify the
zone that PGM type 200 follows.
Enter 000-128 to select zone 1-128.
Proximity Tag Used
This option is used to define which proximity tag will activate PGM
outputs programmed as [165] Prox Used. Enter 000 to enable this
PGM attribute for all user proximity
tags, or enter user number 002-
095 to have this attri
bute activated by a specific user proximity tag.
Command Output 1-4
This option is used to assign a
schedule, program
med in section
[601]-[604], for the command output PGMs to follow.
[012] System Lockout
Keypad Lockout – Number of Invalid Local Attempts
This option controls the number
of invalid access code entries
allowed before the keypad is locked.
When keypad lockout occurs, the
system is inac
cessible by keypad
for the programmed duration. If the num
ber of invalid attempts is not
reached within one hour, or if a va
lid access code is
entered, the
counter is reset to 0.
Valid entries are 000 to 255 minutes. Entering
000 disables the feature. Presenting
an invalid tag counts toward key-
pad lockout.
Keypad Lockout Duration
This programming option determines
the length of time the keypad is
locked out for. If the system cold starts while in keypad lockout, the
lockout is removed. Valid entrie
s are 000 to 255 minutes. Entering
000 disables keypad lockout.
Remote Lockout DLS
This programming option determines
the number of invalid access
code entries allowed via SMS or DLS
before remote access is locked
out for the programmed duration (see below). If the number of
invalid attempts is not reached wi
thin one hour, or if a valid access
code is entered through SMS or DLS,
the counter is reset to 0. The
valid entries are 003 to 255 atte
mpts. Default is 6 attempts.
NOTE:
DLS tries to connect using
the programmed DLS Access
code first and, if unsuccessful,
using the default
DLS access code.
Two failed attempts are counted
if both codes are incorrect.
Remote Lockout Duration
This programming option determines how long the remote lockout
lasts for. If the system cold starts
while in remote lo
ckout, the lockout
restarts for the programmed durati
on. Valid entries are 001 to 255
minutes. Entering 000 disa
bles remote lockout.
5.3.7 System Options
[013] System Option 1
1 – NC Loop/EOL
ON: All zones are wired
as normally closed circ
uits with returns con-
nected to a COM terminal. The end-
of-line resistor is not required.
An alarm is generated wh
en the circuit is opened.
OFF:

All zones must be
wired with an end-of-l
ine resistor configura-
tion, determined by option 2 below.
NOTE:
The valid EOL value is 5600 Ohms (5.6K

).
2 – DEOL/SEOL
ON: All zones use Double-End-of-Lin
e resistors, except Standard
Fire, Delayed Fire, Auto-Verified
Fire, Co and Supervisory zone
types. DEOL resistors en
able detection of zone faults and tampers.
The tamper resistor (5.6K

) is placed in parallel across the alarm
activating device, and the si
ngle EOL resistor (5.6K

) is placed
between the alarm and tamper contacts.
This allows detection of zone fa
ults (shorted zone), tampers (open
zone), alarms (11.2K

), and restored zones (5.6K

).
If the zone is disarmed and placed in
the tamper or fault state, trouble
beeps sound on all system keypads until a key is pressed on each par-
tition. A zone tamper is sent to th
e monitoring station if programmed.
If the zone is armed and a tamper is activated, the tamper alarm and
zone alarm are logge
d and transmitted.
OFF:

All zones must have a 5.6K

resistor. If the zone is shorted or
open, it is in the tripped state. If
the zone is open and programmed as
a fire zone, it is in the trouble st
ate. The EOL and DEOL zone attri-
butes override this system option.
NOTE:
Zone Faults (Supervisories)
on wireless zones do not cause
an audible alarm while armed.
3 – Show All Troubles When Armed
ON:

The Trouble LED illuminates when troubles are present on the
system in both the armed and disarmed state.
OFF:

The Trouble LED illuminates for all troubles while disarmed,
but only for Fire Troubles while armed.
4 – Tamper/Faults Do Not Show As Open
ON: The zone LED does not illuminate
if the zone is in the tamper or
fault states. Only the Trouble LED illuminates.
OFF: The respective zone LED illuminates if the zone is in the tam-
per or fault states. The Trouble LED also illuminates.
5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6]
ON: The auto-arm schedules ([151] -
[158]) are accessible to install-
ers via [*][6] as well as Installer Programming.

OFF: The auto-arm schedules ([151]
- [158]) are only accessible to
installers via Inst
aller Programming.
NOTE:
This toggle controls access
for all eight partitions.
6 – Audible Exit Fault
ON: If a delay type zone is violated
after the exit delay has expired,
an entry delay warning is sounded
through the keypad and siren indi-
cating that an improper exit was made. If the alarm system is dis-
armed within the entry dela
y period no signal is sent.
OFF: The entry delay warning is
sounded only through the keypad.
7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger
ON: Once an event reaches its sw
inger shutdown limit programmed
in section [377] Communication Vari
ables on page 47, it will no lon-
ger log events to the event buffer un
til the swinger shutdown is reset.
This avoids filling the event buffer with false events.
OFF:

The event buffer continues to log events to the buffer even after
the event has gone into swinger shutdown.
8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling
ON:

All fire bells sound in the tempor
al three pattern.
Cadence is as
follows: (500ms ON, 500ms OF
F, 500ms ON, 500ms OFF, 500ms
ON, 1.5 sec. OFF).
OFF:

All fire bells
will sound with the sta
ndard 1 second on/1 second
off fire bell cadence.
NOTE:
Must be on for UL/ULC installations. Section 5: Programming
38
[014] System Option 2
1 – Bell Squawk
ON: The siren emits a single squa
wk when armed in any manner,
including Auto-arm, and a double squawk when disarmed.
When the system is disarmed, the siren emits a series of three squawk
pairs to indicate alarms in memory.
OFF: The siren does not squa
wk when arming or disarming.
NOTE:
For UL/ULC, must be enabled if
wireless keys are used with
the alarm system.
2 – Bell Squawk on Auto-Arm
ON: The siren squawks once ever
y 10 seconds during the auto-arm
pre-alert time.
OFF: The siren does not squawk during auto-arm pre-alert.
3 – Bell Squawk On Exit
ON: The siren squawks once per se
cond during exit delay, changing
to 3 squawks per second for the final 10 seconds.
OFF: The siren does not squa
wk for exit delay conditions.
4 – Bell Squawk On Entry
ON: The siren pulses with the sa
me timing as the keypad buzzer
during entry delay, changing to 3 s
quawks per second for the final 10
seconds.
OFF: The siren does not ac
tivate during entry delay.
5 – Bell Squawk On Trouble
ON: When a trouble condition exis
ts on the system, the siren
squawks 2 times every 10 sec
onds (as per the keypad buzzer).
The siren is silenced when the ke
ypad beeps are silenced (any key
pressed on keypad).
OFF: The siren does not acti
vate with a trouble condition.
6 – Not Used
7 – Exit Delay Termination
ON: The exit delay is reduced to
5 seconds once a Delay 1 zone is
restored. Force-Arm Delay 1 type
zones also end the exit delay.
OFF: The exit delay time
r continues to count even after the delay
zone is restored.
All audible options associated wi
th the exit delay function are
silenced until the time programme
d for the exit delay has elapsed.
8 – Fire Bell Continues
ON: For all Fire type alarms, the si
ren sounds until an access code is
entered to silence the alarm or disarm the system regardless of the
time programmed fo
r bell timeout.
OFF: For all Fire
type alarms, the siren sounds for the length of Bell
Timeout or until an access code is entered.
NOTE:
Must be disabled fo
r ULC installations.
[015] System Option 3
1 – [F] Key Enabled
ON: Pressing and holding the [F] key
for 2 seconds triggers a Fire
alarm.
OFF: The [F] key does not sound or report an alarm when pressed.
NOTE:
Use only for residentia
l fire installations.
2 – [P] Key Enabled
ON: When a valid [P] key alarm is
generated, the keypad buzzer
emits a series of 3 beeps to ac
knowledge the alarm and the siren
sounds for the length of bell timeout.
OFF:

When a valid [P] key alarm is
generated, the keypad buzzer and
the siren are silent, but the alarm is still transmitted (if programmed).
NOTE:
Fire, Medical, and Panic key tr
ansmissions follow the parti-
tion 1 alarm/restore call
direction options (Fir
e, Medical, and Panic
key). The Fire, Medical, Panic keys
operate even if keypad blanking
and keypad lockout are active.
3 – Quick Exit
ON: When the system is armed, users may enter the [*][0] command
to temporarily bypass a single Delay
1 or Delay 2 zone to exit the
premises. Only one delay zone may
be activated. Activity on another
delay zone initiates the appropriate
alarm sequence. If the delay zone
is still open two minutes after the
[*][0] command is entered, entry
delay is initiated. If armed in the Stay mode, the automatic bypass on
Stay/Away zones remains.
OFF: When the system is armed, users can not perform a quick exit
using [*][0].
4 – Quick Arming /Function Key
ON: [*][0] arming and Stay/Away func
tion keys may be used to arm
the system without the entry of a valid access code.
OFF: [*][0] arming is not permitted. All arming functions require the
entry of an access code to acti
vate (including Stay/Away keys).
5 – Not Used
6 – Master Code Not User Changeable
ON: The master code (access code
01) may not be changed by the
user and may only be program
med in Installer Programming.
OFF: The master code may be pr
ogrammed by the user using the
[*][5][Master Code] command. The
master code may also be pro-
grammed in Installer Programming.
7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enable
ON: The TLM function is active a
nd the system indicates a trouble
condition when using the [*][2]
View Trouble Conditions command.
OFF: The TLM function is deacti
vated and telephone line troubles
are not indicated by the system.
NOTE:
Must be ON for UL/ULC
listed installations.
8 – Telephone Line Monitor Audible When Armed
ON: When the system is disarmed,
a telephone line monitor trouble
generates a trouble indi
cation as described a
bove. If the system is
armed, a telephone line monitor tr
ouble generates an audible alarm
on the siren for the duration program
med for bell timeout or until an
access code is entered to disarm.
OFF: Telephone line troubles genera
te a trouble indication, the Trou-
ble LED illuminates, and the keypa
d buzzer beeps until a key is
pressed.
[016] System Option 4
1 – AC Trouble Display
ON: If AC power fails, the conditio
n is reported to the monitoring
station and is indicate
d as a trouble condition on the system keypads.
OFF: If AC power fails, the condi
tion is reported, but the Trouble
light on the system keypads is off. The trouble is displayed in [*][2].
NOTE:
Must be ON for UL/ULC
listed installations.
2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes
ON:

When AC power is lost, the Tr
ouble light flashes in the base
“Ready” and “Armed” mode within 30 seconds of power loss. When
AC restores, the Trouble light stop
s flashing within 30 seconds. If
enabled, this option overrid
es the AC display option.
OFF: When AC power is lost, the
Trouble light illumin
ates but does
not flash. Section 5: Programming
39
3 – Keypad Blanking
ON: If no keys are pressed for 30
seconds, all keypa
d lights except
backlighting (if enabled) are shut
off until the next keypress, entry
delay, audible alarm or
keypad buzzer condition.
Keypad function keys sti
ll operate when the keypad is blank, unless
the function key is programmed to
require an access code. Keypad
Blanking While Armed ove
rrides this feature. When a partition is
armed and in alarm, entering a code
to remove blanking silences the
alarm and disarms the system.
OFF: The keypad lights remain ON at all times.
4 – Keypad Blanking Requires Code
ON: A valid access code must be
entered before a blanked keypad
can be used.
OFF: Pressing any key on a blanke
d keypad removes keypad blank-
ing.
5 – Keypad Backlighting
ON: All keypads on the system ha
ve backlighting on at all times.
OFF:

All keypads on the system have backlighting off.
6 – Power Save Mode
ON: If AC power fails, all keypa
d lights including backlighting are
shut OFF. The keypad lights come
back ON after a keypress, entry
delay, audible alarm or keypad buz
zer condition (except door chime).
Keypad lights return to the off stat
e after 30 seconds of inactivity.
OFF: If AC power fails, keypads
do not go into power save mode.
7 – Bypass Display When Armed
ON: The Bypass status light is on
if zones are bypassed when the sys-
tem is armed.
OFF: The Bypass light is on only wh
ile the system is disarmed to
indicate that zones on
the system are bypassed.
When the system is
armed, the Bypass light is off.
The Bypass status light is on if
Stay/Away zones are auto bypassed at
the time of arming regardless of whet
her or not this option is enabled.
This option only enables and di
sables manual bypass display.
8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled
ON: All keypads containing tamper sw
itches generate tamper alarms
and restores.
OFF: The tamper switches on all
keypads do not generate tamper
alarms.
NOTE:
If this option is used, all keypads should be properly
installed and secured
(tamper restored) before enabling the option.
NOTE:
Must be ON for UL/ULC commercial burglary listed instal-
lations.
[017] System Option 5
1 – Chime on Opening
ON: When a zone with the door ch
ime attribute ON is opened, the
system keypads and sirens (if
enabled) sound door chime beeps.
OFF: When a zone with the door
chime attribute ON is opened, the
system keypads and sirens (if
enabled) do not sound door chime
beeps.
2 – Chime on Closing
ON: When a zone with the door ch
ime attribute ON is closed, the
system keypads and sirens (if
enabled) sound door chime beeps.
OFF: When a zone with the door
chime attribute ON is closed, the
system keypads and sirens (if
enabled) do not sound door chime
beeps.
4 – Multi Hit
ON: Alarms from the same zone within the Burglary Verification
Timer duration cause the police code
or burglary verified to be
logged and transmitted. The number of
zone trips required to create a
confirmed alarm depends on the value of the programmable burglary
verification counter.
OFF: Alarms from the same zone within the Burglary Verification
Timer duration do not cause the police
code or burglary verified to be
logged and transmitted.
NOTE:
This feature only applies to z
ones defined as Interior, Inte-
rior Delay, Interior Stay/Away, In
stant Stay/Away, Delay Stay/Away,
or Night Zones (PIR Zones).
5 – Late to Close
ON: Provides an audible
warning if the alarm system has not been
armed by a programmed time of da
y but does not arm the alarm sys-
tem. The alarm system communicates and logs a Late to Close event
at the end of the Auto-arm/Post
pone pre-alert for each partition.
OFF:

The alarm system will neither co
mmunicate nor log a Late to
Close event at the time programmed for Auto-arm for each partition.
NOTE:
If the Auto-arm toggle option is disabled, the Auto-arm Pre-
alert still occurs when a time is pr
ogrammed for that day (if enabled)
and the event is logged and comm
unicated. This option does not
directly affect the functionality of
Auto-arm. If Late to Close is
enabled and Auto-arming is not
, LCD keypads di
splay “System
Arming in Progress” during th
e Late to Close Pre-alert.
6 – Daylight Savings Time
ON: The alarm system adjusts betw
een Daylight and Standard times
according to the times programmed
in System Timers ([005] options
001-002).
NOTE:
Auto-arm and Test Transmissi
ons should not be attempted
between 0200 and 0300 hours, as they will be missed during a day-
light savings clock adjust. Even
ts programmed to occur between
0100 and 0200 will occur twice duri
ng a daylight savings clock
adjust. Daylight Savings Time pr
ogramming should not conflict with
the Auto-arm and Test Tr
ansmissions programming.
OFF: The alarm system makes no automatic time adjustments for
Daylight Saving time.
7 – Not Used
8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/ Disarm Only
ON: Bell Squawks are only heard
when away arming, as well as
when disarming from Away mode. This feature prevents the siren
from activating when arming in stay and night modes.
OFF: Bell Squawks are heard during
all types of arming and disarm-
ing.
NOTE:
This option follows the “Bell Sq
uawk Attribute” features if
they are enabled.
[018] System Option 6
1 – Test Transmission Exception
ON: The alarm system does not send a
test transmission if a transmis-
sion was sent to the receiver within the programmed interval as set in
section [377] > [003] – Periodic Test
Transmission Cycle on page 48.
OFF: Test transmissions
are always sent at the programmed interval.
2 – Real-Time Bypass Reporting
ON: When a non-24-hour zone is
bypassed in [*][1], the system
immediately l
ogs and communicates the bypa
ss status of the zone.
Global Zones: 24-hour and non-24
hour zone bypasses are logged
and communicated in real time.
Non-24 hour zone unbypass events
are generated when the last a
ssigned partition
is disarmed.
OFF: When a non 24-hour zone is b
ypassed in [*][1], the system logs
and communicates the bypass status of
the zone only after the parti-
tion is armed. This option is appl
ied regardless of how zones are
bypassed in [*][1], re
call bypass group, clear
all bypasses, bypass Section 5: Programming
40
open zones, bypass recall as well
as other methods such as bypassing
via ITv2 or DLS.
Global Zones: 24-hour zone bypass
es are logged and communicated
in real time. Non 24-hour zone byp
ass events are logged and commu-
nicated when armed. Non 24-hour
zone unbypass events are logged
and communicated when the la
st partition is disarmed.
3 – Not Used
4 – Not Used
5 – Keypad Buzzer Alarm
ON: The keypad buzzer activates with all bell activity for the
selected partition.
OFF: The keypad buzzer
only activates with al
arms programmed to
do so.
6 – Not Used
7 – Exit Delay Restart
ON: Opening a delay zone door afte
r it has already been opened and
closed during an exit delay restar
ts the exit delay
timer. Further open-
ings and closings do not
restart the timer.
OFF: Delay zone openings
and closings do not
restart the exit delay.
8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps
ON: System keypads beep when an AC trouble event occurs.
OFF: System keypads are si
lent during AC troubles.
[019] System Option 7
1
–Not Used

2 – Latching Troubles
ON: Troubles remain on the system un
til viewed via [*
][2], even if
they are restored. The trouble conditi
on is cleared when the [#] key is
pressed from the [*][2] menu. The Trouble LED turns off unless
other troubles are present. The trouble is not cleared if the [*][2]
menu times out before th
e [#] key is pressed.
OFF:

Troubles are cleared once restored.
3 – Not Used
4 – Not Used
5 – Audible Bus Fault
ON: Corbus fault conditions
activate the siren.
OFF: The siren does not activa
te when Corbus faults occur.
6 – Duress Codes
ON: The duress code attribute ca
n be enabled/disabled from the
[*][5] menu.
OFF: The duress code attribute is
not accessible from the [*][5] menu.
7 – Temperature in Celsius
ON: Temperature is displayed in Celsius on LCD keypads.
OFF: Temperature is displaye
d in Fahrenheit on LCD keypads.
[020] System Option 8
3 – [*][8] Access While Armed
ON: This option ensures [*][8] inst
aller programming is accessible
from a keypad on a disarmed partiti
on while other pa
rtitions on the
system are still armed.
NOTE:
For UL listed installations, this option must be disabled.
OFF: [*][8] installer programming is
not available when any parti-
tion on the system is armed. All par
titions must be disarmed and the
siren must be off before [*][8] is accessible.
[021] System Option 9
1 – Not Used
2 – Not Used
3– Auto-Arming Bypass
ON: All zones open at the end of th
e auto-arming exit delay are auto-
matically force armed.
OFF: Only zones with the Force Arm attribute enabled are automati-
cally force armed.
Force arming not used for UL/ULC
listed installations
(requires man-
ual bypass).
4 – Not Used
5 – Not Used
6 – Not Used
7 – Not Used
8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arming
ON: When the system is armed in Stay mode the exit delay is
sounded by 1 beep every 3 seconds.
OFF: When the system is armed in Stay mode the exit delay is silent.
[022] System Option 10
1 – [F] Key Option
ON: When the [F] key is pressed,
acknowledge beeps are only emit-
ted from the keypad. The siren does not sound.
OFF: [F] key acknowledgment beep
s are emitted from the keypad
and the siren.
2 – Not Used
3 – Not Used
4 – Transmission Counter in Hours
ON: The alarm system sends a test transmission after the pro-
grammed number of hours in the te
st transmission cycle (Section
[377], Option 003).
OFF: The alarm system sends a
test transmission after the pro-
grammed number of days.
5 – Away to Stay Toggle
ON: The alarm system cannot be sw
itched from Away to Stay mode
by pressing the [Stay] function key.
OFF: The alarm system can be switched from Away to Stay mode by
pressing the [Stay] function key.
7 – Trouble Beeps are Silent
ON: When a trouble is de
tected on the system
, trouble beeps are not
sounded at the keypad with the
exception of Fire troubles.
OFF: When a trouble is detected
on the system, trouble beeps are
sounded at the keypad.
NOTE:
This option must be OFF for
UL Residential
Fire applica-
tions.
8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away Mode
ON: Keyswitch arming arms the alarm system in away mode.
OFF: Keyswitch arming arms the alarm system in away mode if an
entry/exit zone is violat
ed during the exit delay.
[023] System Option 11
1 – Ready LED Flashes for Force Arm
ON: If a force arm capable zone is
tripped, partition keypads flash
the ready LED in the disarmed st
ate instead of illuminating it Section 5: Programming
41
steadily. If a non-force arm capable
zone is tripped, the ready LED
turns off.
OFF: If a force arm capa
ble zone is tripped,
the Ready LED is illumi-
nated steadily. If a non-force arm capa
ble zone is tripped, the Ready
LED turns off.
2 – Not Used
4 – Access Code Required for [*][1]
ON: When using the [*][1] Bypass
Zones command, an access code
must be input before
zones are bypassed.
OFF: An access code is not re
quired to bypass zones using [*][1].
5 – Access Code Required for [*][2]
ON: When using the [*][2] View Tr
oubles command, an access code
must be input before syst
em troubles ca
n be viewed.
OFF: An access code
is not required to view troubles using [*][2].
6 – Access Code Required for [*][3]
ON: When using the [*][3] View
Alarms in Memory command, an
access code must be i
nput before the alarm me
mory can be viewed.
OFF: An access code is
not required to view al
arms in memory using
[*][3].
7 – Access Code Required for [*][4]
ON: When using the [*][4] Chimes
command, an access code must
be input before chimes
can be toggled on and off.
OFF: An access code
is not required to toggl
e chimes using [*][4].
8 – [*][6] Accessibility
ON: All user codes provide access to the [*][6] menu.
OFF:

Only the master code provi
des access to the [*][6] menu.
[024] System Option 12
1 – 50Hz AC/60Hz AC
ON: Incoming AC power cycles at 50Hz.
OFF: Incoming AC power cycles at 60Hz.
NOTE:
For UL/ULC listed
systems, use only 60Hz setting.
2 – Crystal Timebase
ON:
In situations where AC power
input is unstable, the alarm con-
troller’s internal crystal is used as the time base.
OFF:
The 50 or 60 Hz AC power input
is used as the time base.
3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming
ON: The system cannot be armed when
an AC or DC trouble is pres-
ent. This includes keypad, keysw
itch, automatic, and DLS arming.
An error tone is generated if the user attempts to arm the system
during an AC/DC trouble.
NOTE:
Displaying AC troubles ([016]
option 2) is strongly recom-
mended if this option is enabled.
OFF: The system can be
armed, regardless of the presence of an AC
or DC trouble and does not chec
k the system battery upon arming.
4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming
ON: Tampers must be restored th
rough Installer Programming before
the system can be ar
med (including no-activi
ty and keyswitch arm-
ing).
When this option is enabled,
manual zone bypass
ing does not bypass
the tamper or fault states (DEOL). This feature also applies to zone
faults.
OFF: Tamper troubles do not
latch and do not prevent arming.
5 – Real-Time Clock
ON: The alarm system sends a real-time clock request to the alternate
communicator at 4:05pm or when sy
stem time is lost. The system
uses the acquired time as system time.
OFF: The alarm system does not send a real-time clock request to the
alternate communicator. Local time setting is used as the system
time.
6 – Not Used
7 – Not Used
8 – DLS Disconnect
ON: All events except Periodic Test
Transmission, Periodic Test with
Trouble, and System Test are consider
ed priority events. If DLS is
active when an event occurs, the alarm system immediately termi-
nates the connection in order to communicate the new events.
OFF: Only the following alarm type events terminate a DLS session :
•
Zone alarms
•
FMP key alarms
•
Duress alarms
•
Zone expander supervisory alarms
•
2-wire smoke alarms
[025] System Option 13
1 – European Dial
ON: Pulse dialing make
/break ratio is 33/67.
OFF: Pulse dialing make/break ratio is 40/60.
2 – Force Dial
ON:

The system dials the central st
ation phone number even if no
dial tone is present. Th
e process is as follows:
1.
Dial programmed phone number.
2.
If no dial tone dete
cted, terminate call.
3.
Search for dial tone for 5 seconds.
4.
If no dial tone detected, hang up for 20 seconds.
5.
Search for dial tone for 5 seconds.
6.
If no dial tone detected, dial anyway.
OFF:

No attempt is made to contact the
central station if
dial tone is
not present.
NOTE:
Force Dial must be enabled for UL installations.
3 – Not Used
4 – Not Used
5 – I.D. Tone
ON: After the telephone nu
mber is dialed, the
alarm system emits a
tone (as specified by I.D. Tone
Frequency option) for 500ms every
two seconds to indicate that a digital equipment call is in progress.
OFF:

I.D. tone is disabled.
6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz
ON: 2100 Hz I.D. tone.
OFF: 1300 Hz I.D. tone.
7 – 1 Hour DLS Window
ON: When DLS access is enabled
([*][6] option 5 ON), Installer Pro-
gramming is accessible through DLS or the [*][8] menu only once
during a 1-hour window.
OFF:

When DLS access is enabled, Installer Programming is accessi-
ble through DLS or the [*][8] menu
an unlimited number of times
during a 6-hour window.
8

–

FTC Audible Bell
ON: If a Failure to Communicate
trouble is generated while the sys-
tem is armed, the siren activates fo
r the length of bell time-out or
until the system is disarmed. Section 5: Programming
42
OFF: If a Failure to Communicate
trouble is generated while the
alarm system is armed, the siren
does not activate but the keypad
buzzer emits trouble beeps
until a key is pressed.
[040] User Authentication
This feature enables the installer or
master user to se
lect one of two
user authentication methods:
01 – User Code or Proximity Tag
The user can access the system by
entering a valid code or by pre-
senting a proximity tag.
02 – User Code and Proximity Tag
The user must enter a valid code
and present a proximity tag when-
ever the system prompts for an ac
cess code. A proximity tag is not
required to enter [*][8] Installer Programming.
[041] Access Code Digits
00 – 4-Digit Access Codes
User access codes are 4 digits long.
01 – 6-Digit Access Codes
User access codes are 6 digits long.
[042] Verified Events
Burglary Verified Counter
This option programs the number of
zone activations required to ver-
ify an alarm. Valid entries are 000 to 255.
NOTE:
Not for UL/ULC listed installations.
Burglary Verification Selection
Use this section to select one of
the following burglary verification
timer modes:
5.3.8 Partition Setup
[151]-[158] Partit
ion Auto-Arm/Disarm
Enter section 151 to 158 for partitio
n 1 to 8 auto-arm/disarm configu-
ration.
[001] – Partition Auto-Arming Times
Use this section to program the time of day a partition is automati-
cally armed. A different auto-a
rming time can be
programmed for
each day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Time is in 24-hour
format (HH:MM) and valid entries are from 00:00 to 23:59.
Conditions that cancel au
to-arming if enabled:
•
Open zones (depending on th
e settings of the zone)
•
AC/DC troubles
•
System troubles
•
Any valid disarming procedure
- proximity tag, access code,
disarm key, etc.
[002] – Partition Auto-Disarm Times
Use this section to program the time
of day a partition is disarmed. A
different auto-disarming time can be programmed for each day of the
week from Sunday to Saturday. Time is in 24-hour format (HH:MM)
and valid entries are from 00:00 to 23:59.
NOTE:
If entry delay is active at auto-disarm time, the system does
not disarm. A valid disa
rming procedure is required by the user who
initiated the entry delay.
[003] – Partition Auto-Disarming Holiday Schedules
Use this section to sele
ct a holiday schedule group.
See “[711]-[714] Holiday Schedule
s” on page 52 for more informa-
tion.
[004] – Partition Auto-Arming Pre-Alert Timer
Use this section to program the dur
ation of the auto-arm pre-alert.
The system arms when the pre-alert timer expires. Valid entries are
from 001 - 255 minutes.
If a valid access code is keyed in
, this timer is postponed for the
length of time programmed in Pa
rtition Auto-Arm
Postpone timer
(see below). The pre-alert timer
can be postponed multiple times.
Keyswitches and proximity
tags can be used to cancel auto-arming.
[005] – Partition Auto-Arm Postpone Timer
Use this section to program the lengt
h of time the auto-arm pre-alert
timer is postponed for. Valid en
tries are between 001 and 255 min-
utes. 000 cancels th
e postpone timer.
When the postpone timer expires, the Auto-arm pre-alert timer
restarts (unless the partition is armed). If left uninterrupted the parti-
tion arms at the end of the pre-alert.
If a code is entered during the pre-al
ert, auto-arm ca
ncel/postpone is
logged and communicated and the postpone timer starts. When the
postpone timer expires, pre-aler
t is sounded again and the cycle
repeats. The Auto-arm may
be postponed multiple times.
Conditions that cancel auto-arming:
• Open zones cancel arming /
Auto Arm Force Arms Open
Zones
• AC/DC Inhibit Arming
• Any valid disarming procedure –
proximity tag, access code,
disarm key
[006] – Partition No Activity Arming Timer
Use this section to program the dur
ation of the No Activity timer. If
this timer expires and no zones ha
ve been activate
d, the partition
arms in Away mode (exit dela
y will not sound). When the timer
expires, keypad buzzers
activate for the time programmed in No
Activity Arming Pre-Alert (see below).
The timer restarts when a delay type zone is restored. The timer does
not restart when the system is di
sarmed. The timer stops if an un-
bypassed zone is tripped, tampered
or restored or with any keypad
activity.
Separate No Activity Arming timers
are provided for each partition.
Valid entries are from 000 – 255 minut
es. 000 disables
this feature.
[007] – Partition No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer
Use this section to program the
duration of the No Activity Arming
pre-alert that sounds when the No
-Activity timer for the partition
expires. If any key is pr
essed or zone is activated or restored, the
Auto-Arm pre-alert is aborted.
Valid entries are 000 - 255 minutes. 000 disables this feature.
[200] Partition Mask
A partition is a limited area of the premises which operates inde-
pendently from the other areas. Pa
rtitions are added or removed from
the system by applying or removing a partition mask.
[001] – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask
Select options 01-08 to enab
le or disable partitions.
Partition 1 is always enabled. Pa
rtitions 2 to 8 are selectable.
Mode
Description
001
Police Code
The burglar
y verification timer oper-
ates in minutes.
002
Cross Zoning
The burglary verification timer oper-
ates in seconds. The first alarm in the
sequence does not log or communi-
cate the alarm or activate the bell. Section 5: Programming
43
The number of available partitions
depends on the model, as shown
below:
[201]-[208] Partiti
on Zone Assignment
Zones can be assigned
to any partition. Gl
obal zones are zones
assigned to more than one partit
ion. A global zone is only armed
when all assigned partitions are ar
med. The zone is disarmed when
any of the assigned partitions is
disarmed. By de
fault, zones 1
through 8 are assigned to partition 1.
To assign zones to partitions, first
select a partition [201]-[208], then
select a zone group [001]-[016] and then a zone (1-8):
All zones assigned to a partition ar
e supervised and operate accord-
ing to the zone type programmed. If
a zone is not assigned to a parti-
tion, it is not supervised and all ac
tivity on the zone is ignored by the
system.
[300] Panel/Receiver Communication Paths
This section is used to select the path of communications between the
alarm system and the central stat
ion. Paths can be established
through either the alarm system’s
on-board Public Switched Tele-
phone Network (PSTN) connection or through the alternate commu-
nicator (cellular or
Ethernet) if equipped.
Paths to four receivers can be pr
ogrammed using sections 001 - 004.
The communications path for each
receiver is defined by selecting
one of the following six options:
[01] Phone Line
Events are communicated through
the alarm system phone line pro-
grammed in section [301]. If Phone Line is selected for receiver 1,
the phone number programmed in section [301] option [001] is used.
If Phone Line is selected for
receiver 2, the phone number pro-
grammed in section [301]
option [002] is used, etc.
[02] Alternate Communicator Auto Routing (dual-path)
Selecting this option enables the alternate communicator to deter-
mine which communications path to
use (Ethernet primary/second-
ary, cellular primary/secondary).
See the altern
ate communicator
manual for details.
[03] Alternate Communicator Receiver 1
Events are communicated
through IP receiver 1.
[04] Alternate Communicator Receiver 2
Events are communicated
through IP receiver 2.
[05] Alternate Communicator Receiver 3
Events are communicated through cellular receiver 1.
[06] Alternate Communicator Receiver 4
Events are communicated through cellular receiver 2.
To use PSTN as the communicati
ons path, program section [300]
options 001 through 004 as [01] PSTN 1.
To use the alternate communicato
r to establish a communications
path, program two of the receiver
s (section [300] options 001, 002,
003 or 004) as [03] and [04] for Ethernet, and two of the receivers as
[05] and [06] for cellular.
[301] Phone Number Programming
Section [301] is used to program
up to 4 telephone numbers used to
communicate with the ce
ntral station over PSTN.
[001] The phone number used to
communicate with receiver 1
[002] The phone number used to
communicate with receiver 2
[003] The phone number used to
communicate with receiver 3
[004] The phone number used to
communicate with receiver 4
All telephone numbers can be a ma
ximum of 32 digi
ts. Hexadecimal
digits may be included to pe
rform the following functions:
• HEX B ([*] [2] [*]) to dial "*"
• HEX C ([*] [3] [*]) - to dial "#"
• HEX D ([*] [4] [*]) - for an additional dial tone search, as required
by PBX telephone systems.
• HEX E ([*] [5] [*]) - to insert a 2-second pause in the telephone
number. This causes a
static delay of 2 sec
onds before any addi-
tional dial tone search in a phone number.
• HEX F ([*] [6] [*]) - represents the end of the Phone Number
(everything after F is ignored)
• Pressing [#] in these sections ex
its and saves the entire phone num-
ber.
The alarm system does not attempt
to communicate using PSTN if no
phone number is programmed.
[304] Call Waiting Cancel String
Use this section to program a string
that, when pressed, disables call
waiting on a phone line. Ca
ll waiting cancel is t
ypically *70 in most
areas. Dialing this string before
a phone number disables call waiting
for the duration of the call.
When this section is programmed
and Call Waiting Ca
ncel Options is
ON (see [382] Communicator Option 3 on page 49), the alarm sys-
tem dials this string before the
phone number. This is only done on
the first dialing attemp
t for each phone number.
This is a 6-digit field. Fi
ll unused digits with Hex F.
5.3.9 Reporting
[307] Zone Reporting
Zone alarms, tampers and faults are transmitted to the central station
using automatic contact ID or SIA
formats. Reporting can be toggled
on or off by zone using toggle options 1-6 in subsections 001-128.
See Appendix A: Event Codes on page 98.
[308] Event Reporting
System events are transmitted to the central station using automatic
contact ID or SIA formats. Repor
ting can be disabled by toggle
options, programmable in th
e following sub-sections.
See Appendix A: Event Codes on page 98 for event code descrip-
tions.
Model
Zones
Partitions
HS2128
128
8
HS2064
64
8
HS2032
32
4
HS2016
16
2
Zone
Group
Zones
Zone
Group
Zones
001
1-8
009
65-72
002
9-16
010
73-80
003
17-24
011
81-88
004
25-32
012
89-96
005
33-40
013
97-104
006
41-48
014
105-112
007
49-56
015
113-120
008
57-64
016
121-128 Section 5: Programming
44
[001] Miscellaneous Alarm 1
The reporting codes in this section are sent to the Alarm & Restore
call direction group.
1 – Duress Alarm
Sent when a duress code is used
to perform any function on the sys-
tem.
2 – Opening After Alarm
Sent during disarming if an alarm occurred during the previous
armed period.
3 – Recent Closing Alarm
Sent if an alarm occurs within 2 minutes of the exit time expiration
(for the first alarm only). Zone
alarm transmission delays do not
effect this reporting code.
4/5 – Zone Expander Supe
rvisory Alarm/ Restore
Sent when the system loses comm
unication with the following mod-
ules:
•
Zone Expander Module
•
Keypad with an on-board I/O configured as a zone
This reporting code is
independent of the gene
ral system supervisory
code sent to the mainte
nance call direction group.
6 – Burglary Verified
When using Cross Zoning, this re
porting code is sent when two
crossed zones go into alarm dur
ing the cross zone timer.
When using Police Code, this repor
ting code is sent when any two
zones go into alarm. In both cases,
only one reporting code is sent
during each armed to armed period.
Arming the system resets the
zone alarm count
for police code.
7 – Burglary Not Verified
When using Cross Zoning, this repo
rting code is sent if the cross
zone timer is initiated by the first cr
oss zone alarm, but
is not verified
by a second alarm before the timer expires.
8 – Alarm Cancel
Sent when a valid access code is
entered during the communications
cancel window. The central st
ation acknowledges
cancellation by
providing a keypad ringback.
NOTE:
[011] Priority Alarms 1
The reporting codes in this section are sent to the Alarm & Restore
call direction group and appl
y to all system keypads.
1/2 – Keypad Fire Alar
m-[F] Key Alarm/Restore
Sent when [F] Key al
arms/restores occur.
3/4 – Keypad Medical Al
arm-[M] Key Alarm/Restore
Sent when [M] Key alarms/resto
res occur. The keypad beeps 10
times when the medical alarm is successfully communicated to the
alarm monitoring station.
5/6 – Keypad Panic Alar
m-[P] Key Alarm/Restore
Sent when [P] Key al
arms/restores occur.
7/8 – Auxiliary Input
Alarm/ Restore
Sent when an alarm condition occurs
/ is restored on PGM 2 (if con-
figured as an input).
[021] Fire
Alarms 1
3/4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Alarm/Restore
When PGM 2 is programmed as a 2-
wire smoke alarm, this reporting
code is sent when an alarm condi
tion is detected and when it is
restored.
[101] Tamper Events
3/4 – Module Tamper/Restore
This reporting code is transmitted when a system module enters a
tamper alarm state and uses the System Tamper Alarm and Tamper
Restore call direction.
5 – Keypad Lockout
Sent when a number of invalid acce
ss codes have been entered at a
system keypad
This reporting code is sent to the system Tamper Alarm & Tamper
Restore call direction group.
7 – Remote Lockout
Sent when a number of invalid
access codes have been entered
through DLS or Integration. This re
porting code is sent to the system
Tamper Alarm & Tamper Rest
ore call direction group.
[201] Open/Close Events 1
1/2 – User Closing/Opening
This reporting code is transmitted
when a user arms/disarms a parti-
tion and uses the Opening and
Closing call direction.
5/6 – Special Closing/Opening
This reporting code is transmitted
when a partition is closed/opened
using a keyswitch zone, downloading,
quick arm ([*][0]), or Stay or
Away function keys without an ac
cess code. The Opening and Clos-
ing call direction group is us
ed for this reporting code.
[202] Open/Close Events 2
1 – Automatic Closing
This reporting code is transmitted when a partition is automatically
armed or schedule armed and uses
the Opening call direction group.
3 – Auto Arm Cancellation/Postpone
This reporting code is transmitted when the automatic arm sequence
is canceled during a pre-alert and
uses the Opening and Closing call
direction group.
[211] Miscellaneous Open/Close Events
1/2 – Late to Close/Open
This reporting code is transmitted
when a partition is not disarmed
before the automatic disarm time, when the late to open option,
([*][6], option 9) is enabled. The
Opening and Closi
ng call direction
group is used for this reporting code.
5 – Exit Fault
This reporting code is transmitted when an exit error occurs and entry
delay expires before the system
is disarmed. The Alarms and
Restores call direction group is
used for this reporting code.
If the delay zone that caused the
exit error has cross zoning enabled,
the exit fault and zone alarm transmits
if a second zone is not tripped.
The local alarm sequence follows cros
s zoning rules. The exit error is
transmitted with the zone alarm that caused the fault, even if that
zone has transmis
sion delay enabled.
[221] Bypass Events
1/2 – Automatic Zone Bypass/Unbypass
This reporting code is transmitted when a zone is automatically
bypassed/unbypassed and uses the Op
ening and Closing call direc-
tion group.
03 – Partial Closing
This reporting code is transmitted
if zones are manually bypassed at
the time of arming or force arme
d by automatic arming. The Opening
and Closing call direction group is
used for this reporting code.
Automatic bypasses caus
ed by stay arming do not cause transmission
of this code. Section 5: Programming
45
[301] Panel Events 1
1/2 – Panel AC Fail Trouble/Restore
This reporting code is transmitted when the alarm system AC supply
fails or has been restored. A progra
mmable delay applies to both the
trouble and the restore. This repor
ting code is sent to the System
Maintenance call direction group.
3/4 – Panel Low Batt
ery Trouble/Restore
These reporting codes are transmitted
when the panel battery voltage
falls below 11.5VD or is restored.
These reporting codes are sent to
the System Maintenance
call direction group.
5/6 – Panel Battery Absent Trouble/Restore
These reporting codes are transmitted
when the panel battery voltage
falls below 11.5VD or is restored.
These reporting codes are sent to
the System Maintenance call dire
ction group and are transmitted
when the panel battery is detected as absent.
[302] Panel Events 2
1/2 – Bell Circuit
Trouble/Restore
This reporting code is transmitted when a bell trouble condition
occurs or is restored on the system
.This reporting code
is sent to the
System Maintenance
call direction group.
3/4 – Telephone Line Trouble and Restore
This reporting code is transmitted when an alarm controller TLM
trouble occurs or is restored. Th
e TLM trouble is communicated over
an unaffected communicat
ion path if available.
This reporting code is sent to the
System Maintenanc
e call direction
group.
5/6 – Auxiliary Power Supply Trouble/Restore
This reporting code is transmitted
when an auxiliary voltage supply
trouble occurs or is restored. This
reporting code is sent to the Sys-
tem Maintenance call
direction group.
NOTE:
When the electronic fuse built in to the auxiliary power sup-
ply is tripped due to a short or
high current draw, the alarm system
must be powered down then
back up to reset the fuse.
[305] Panel Events 5
3/4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Trouble/Restore
This reporting code is transmitted when a trouble condition on PGM
2, configured as 2-wire
smoke, occurs or is
restored. This reporting
code is sent to the System
Maintenance call
direction group.
[311] Maintenance Events 1
1/2 – RF Jam Trouble/Restore
Sent when RF jam troubles occur/ar
e restored. The following events
cause RF jam troubles:
•
Wireless repeater jamming
•RF jam
3/4 – Fire Trouble/Restore
Sent when a low sensitivity, tamper or internal fault condition/restore
is detected on a wire
less smoke
detector.
5 – Cold Start
Sent when power is restored to
the alarm system after total power
failure. The code is se
nt after 2 minutes to allow the alarm controller
to stabilize.
6 – Delinquency
When the Delinquency option is off
(page 45), this code is transmit-
ted if the alarm system has not be
en armed for the number of days
programmed in the Delinquency
Transmission Delay (page 48).
When the Delinquency option is on, th
is code is transmitted when no
zone activity has been detected on
the system for the number of hours
programmed in Delinquency Transmission Delay.
[312] Maintenance Events 2
1/2 – Installer Lead In/ Lead Out
The Installer Lead In and Lead Ou
t reporting codes are sent when the
alarm system enters and exits Installer Programming respectively.
When Installer Programming is automatically exited after PC-Link is
activated, the Installer Lead Out
event is not communicated until
after the DLS session is complete.
3/4 – DLS Lead In/Lead Out
The DLS Lead In reporting code is sent:
•
after DLS communication has been
successfully established, but
before the alarm system calls
back the downloading computer.
This code is only transmitted when call back is enabled
•
on user-initiated call-up.
The DLS Lead Out reporting code is sent when a DLS session is suc-
cessfully ended.
NOTE:
If DLS is terminated by an alarm, the DLS Lead Out report-
ing code is not transmitted.
5/6 – SA Lead In/Lead Out
The SA Lead In reporting code is sent:
•
after SA communication has been
successfully established, but
before the alarm system calls
back the downloading computer.
This code is only transmitted when call back is enabled.
•
on user-initiated call-up.
The SA Lead Out reporting code is sent when an SA session is suc-
cessfully ended. The SA Lead Out re
porting code is still sent if the
session is terminated by an alarm.
7 Event Buffer 75% Full
Sent when the event buffer reaches
a threshold of 75% without being
uploaded.
[313] Maintenance Events 3
1/2 – Firmware Update
Begin/was Successful
Sent when a remote firmware update
is initiated/ is successfully com-
pleted.
3 – Firmware Update Fail
Sent after an unsuccessful
remote firmware update.
[314] Maintenance Events 4
1/2 – Gas Trouble/Restore
3/4 – Heat Trouble/Restore
5/6 – Freeze Trouble/Restore
7/8 – Probe Disconnect
ed Trouble/Restore
[321] Receiver Events
2/4/6/8 – Receiver 1 - 4 FTC Restore
Sent when the panel detects an FTC trouble.
[331] Module Events 1
1/2 – Module AC Trouble/Restore
This reporting code is
transmitted when a m
odule’s AC supply fails
or has been restored. A programmab
le delay applies to both the trou-
ble and the restore. This reporting c
ode is sent to the System Mainte-
nance call di
rection group. Section 5: Programming
46
3/4 – Module Battery
Trouble/Restore
These reporting codes ar
e transmitted when a
module’s battery volt-
age falls below 11.5VDC or is restored. These reporting codes are
sent to the System Mainte
nance call direction group.
5/6 – Module Battery Absent/Restore
These reporting codes ar
e transmitted when a
module’s battery is
detected as absent or
restored. These reporting codes are sent to the
System Maintenance
call direction group.
[332] Module Events 2
1/2 – Module Low Volt
age Trouble/Restore
Sent when module voltage drops be
low acceptable
levels or is
restored.
3/4 – Module Supervisory Trouble/Restore
Sent when communication with a
module is lost or restored.
5/6 – Module Aux Trouble/Restore
Sent when a high current output module or power supply module
experiences an auxiliar
y voltage supply trouble.
[335] Module Events 5
1/2 – Output 1 Fault/Restore
This reporting code is sent when the first output on the high-current
output expander module goes into fault
(open or short) or is restored.
Only the first output on the high-
current expander
module is super-
vised.
[351] Alternate Communicator 1
1/2 – Alt. Comm Communications Fault/Restore
Sent when the system loses or re
stores communications with the
alternate communicator.
3/4 – Not used
5/6 – Not used
7/8 – Alt. Comm Radio/SIM Failure/Restore
Sent when the alternate communica
tor experiences trouble or restore
of the radio/SIM.
[352] Alternate Communicator 2
1/2 – 1/2 – Alt. Comm Network Fault/Restore
Sent when the alternate communicator loses or restores communica-
tion with the network.
3/4 – Alt. Comm Low Signal Trouble/Restore
Sent when the alternate communicator experiences a network low
signal trouble or restore.
5/6 – Alt. Comm Ethernet Trouble /Restore
Sent when the alternate communicat
or detects a network absent con-
dition or DHCP failure or restore.
7/8 – Alt. Comm Lockout Trouble/Restore
Sent when the alternate communicat
or detects a SIM lock trouble or
network lock trouble or when
either condition is restored.
[354] Alternate Communicator 4
Receiver 1 to 4 Tr
ouble and Restore
Sent when the alternate communic
ator detects a trouble or restore
condition on receiver 1-4.
1/2 – Receiver 1 Trouble/Restore
3/4 – Receiver 2 Trouble/Restore
5/6 – Receiver 3 Trouble/Restore
7/8 – Receiver 4 Trouble/Restore
[355] Alternate Communicator 5
Receiver 1 to 4 Supervisi
on Failure and Restore
Sent when the alternate communica
tor detects a supervision trouble
for the Ethernet receiver (1, 2) or the GPRS receiver (3, 4).
1/2 – Receiver 1 Supervision Failure/Restore
3/4 – Receiver 2 Supervision Failure/Restore
5/6 – Receiver 3 Supervision Failure/Restore
7/8 – Receiver 4 Supervision Failure/Restore
[361] Wireless Device Events
1/2 – Wireless Device
AC Failure/Restore
These options are used to enable wireless device AC failure/restore
reporting codes. These reporting c
odes are sent when a wireless
device experiences an
AC failure/restore.
3/4 – Wireless Device Low Battery Trouble/Restore
These options are used to enable wi
reless device low battery trouble/
restore reporting codes. These code
s are sent when a wireless device
experiences a low battery trouble/restore.
5/6 – Wireless Devi
ce Fault/Restore
These options are used to enable wi
reless device fault/restore report-
ing codes. This reporting code is se
nt when a wireless device experi-
ences a supervisory fault.
[401] System Test Events
1/2 – Walk Test Start/End
Sent when installer walk test is initiated and terminated.
These reporting codes are in additi
on to the alarm reporting codes for
the zones that are tripped during the walk test period, if configured in
section [382] Communicator Option 3 on page 49.
3 – Periodic Test Transmission
Sent when the test transmission
programmed in section [401] Sys-
tem Test Events on page 46 occurs.
4 – Periodic Test Tran
smission with Trouble
Sent when any of the following trouble conditions are present during
a periodic test
transmission:
•
Fire Zone Trouble
•
Battery Trouble
•
Fire Zone Alarm (2-Wire Smoke)
•
Aux Trouble
•
Fire Trouble
•
Bell Trouble
•
Fire Tamper/Low Sensitivity (WLS)
•
Module Supervisory
•
Fire Zones Bypassed
•
Ground Fault
•
Fire Supervisory (Wireless)
•
TLM Trouble
•
AC Trouble
•
FTC Trouble
This reporting code is sent in plac
e of the standard Periodic Test
Transmission code.
5 – System Test
Sent when a manual system te
st is performed ([*][6][Master
Code][04]).
5.3.10 System Communications
The programming options in this section are used to configure com-
munications between the alarm system and the central station. Section 5: Programming
47
[309] System Call Direction
Use this programming option to sele
ct the central station receivers
that system events are communicated to. A system event can be sent
to multiple receivers.
[001] Maintenance Events/Restores (all troubles
except tampers)
These options control wh
ich receiver paths are enabled for mainte-
nance events. To assign a maintenance event to a receiver, select
from the following list:
[01] Receiver 1
[02] Receiver 2
[03] Receiver 3
[04] Receiver 4
[002] Test Transmissions
These options control wh
ich receiver paths are enabled for test trans-
mission events. To assign a test transmission event to a receiver,
select from the following list:
[01] Receiver 1
[02] Receiver 2
[03] Receiver 3
[04] Receiver 4
[310] Account Codes
These programming sections are used
to set the system and partition
account codes.
[000] System Account Code
The system account code is used to
identify the alarm system when
communicating system events to the central station. The system
account code can be either 4 or 6
digits long. Program
a 6-digit code
only when using the SIA reporting
format. SIA uses this account
code for all partitions
and system events. All
other reporting formats
use a 4-digit system account code to
report system maintenance (e.g.,
low battery, zone fault) and test tr
ansmission events. To program a 4-
digit code, add FF to
the last two digits.
[001]-[008] Partition Account Codes
Use these sections to program ac
count codes for
each partition.
When using formats other than SIA,
these account codes identify the
alarm system to the central station when communicating partition-
specific events.
NOTE:
The system will not communicate
if the account code is not
programmed. When this condition
occurs, Account Code Not Pro-
grammed is briefly displayed on th
e keypad when exiting Installer
Programming mode.
NOTE:
If no phone numbers are programmed, the error message
does not occur.
[311]-[318] Partiti
on Call Directions
Use this programming option to sele
ct the central station receivers
that partition events are communicate
d to. Call directions can be pro-
grammed for each partition. Each ev
ent can be sent to one of four
receivers.
[001] Alarm/ Restore
These options control wh
ich receiver paths are enabled for Partition
1-8 Alarm and Restore event reporting codes.
To assign an event to a receiver, se
lect one of the
following options:
[01] Receiver 1
[02] Receiver 2
[03] Receiver 3
[04] Receiver 4
[002] Tampers (Including System Tampers)/ Restore
These options control which receiver
paths are enabled for Partition
1-8 Tamper and Restore
event reporting codes.
To assign an event to a receiver, select one of the following options:
[01] Receiver 1
[02] Receiver 2
[03] Receiver 3
[04] Receiver 4
[003] Openings/ Closing
These options control which receiver
paths are enabled for Partition
1-8 Opening and Closing event reporting codes. To assign an event to
a receiver, select one of the following options:
[01] Receiver 1
[02] Receiver 2
[03] Receiver 3
[04] Receiver 4
[350] Communicator Formats
Use this programming option to as
sign a communicator format to
each of the four receivers progr
ammed in section [301]. The avail-
able communicator formats are as follows:
To assign a communications format,
select a receiver (option [001]-
[004]) then enter the 2-digit code
corresponding to the chosen for-
mat. For detailed de
scriptions of each format, see page 98.
[377] Communication Variables
[001] – Swinger Shutdown
Alarms/Restores
This value defines the number of communication attempts made for
alarm/restore events, per zone, be
fore the zone goes into swinger
shutdown. Valid entries are 000 to 014. For CP-01, entries are from
001-006.
Once the programmed number of alarm/restore events have been
communicated, no further alarm/restore events for the zone are com-
municated until sw
inger shutdown is reset. Th
e last restore event is
not communicated until swinger is cleared. For example, if the
swinger shutdown limit
for zone alarms is set
to [003], the cycle is as
follows: alarm/restore, alarm/res
tore, alarm...8 hours or arm/dis-
arm...restore.
The bell output is not activated
for alarms on zones that have
exceeded the swinger shutdown coun
ter limit. Swi
nger shutdown on
global zones log once
to the system area.
NOTE:
Swinger shutdown resets on all
partitions when any partition
on the system is armed or disarm
ed, or every day at midnight. For
CP-01, swinger shutdown is restor
ed after 8 hours of inactivity.
Once reset, the alarm system communicates normally.
NOTE:
The event buffer can follow swinger shutdown if enabled.
Ta m p e r s / R e s t o r e s
This value defines the number of tim
es the same system tamper event
occurs before going into swinger
shutdown. Valid entries are 000 to
014.
Maintenance Troubles/Restores
This value defines the number of ti
mes the same system Maintenance
(trouble) type event occurs before
going into swinger shutdown. Fire
troubles follow the Maintenanc
e Swinger Shutdown variable.
03
DTMF Contact ID
04
SIA FSK Section 5: Programming
48
[002] – Communication Delays
Transmission Delay (seconds)
This value defines the delay before an alarm is transmitted.
The delay is for zones
which have the Transmission Delay attribute
enabled. Valid entries are from 000 to 255 seconds (0-45 seconds for
CP-01). Each partition shares the same
active timer. If the delay is
already active due to an alarm on
a different partition,
any new activ-
ity on another partition does not re
start the communications delay
timer.
Burglary verified events are postp
oned until after the transmission
delay expires. When a valid disarm
ing procedure is used while the
transmission delay is active, a co
mmunications cancel
ed message is
briefly displayed on the keypad
when the delay is canceled.
For UL/ULC listed installations,
the entry delay plus communication
delay cannot exceed 45 seconds.
AC Failure Communication Delay (minutes or hours)
This value determines the delay before an AC failure or AC restore is
reported. The AC failure or restor
e is still displayed immediately.
Valid entries are from 000 to 255 minutes/hours (max. 180 minutes
for UL commercial installations).
Selection of minutes or hours for
the delay is set in section [382]
Communicator Option 3 on page 49.
NOTE:
If AC Failure Communications
Delay is programmed as
000, the AC Failure Trouble reporti
ng code is sent immediately.
NOTE:
For ULC commercial fire moni
toring, the setting shall be
180 minutes.
TLM Trouble Delay
Use this section to program the
number of valid checks (3 second
intervals) required before a telephone
line trouble is generated. Valid
entries are 000-255 for trouble ann
unciation and transmission delays
of 3 to 765 Seconds (12.75 Minutes).
Wireless Zone Low Battery Tr
ansmission Delay (in days)
When a zone reports a low battery
condition, the trouble is indicated
immediately on the keypad, but th
e transmission to the monitoring
station is delayed by the number of
days programmed in
this section.
If the low battery condition is not co
rrected before th
e delay expires,
the low battery condition is tran
smitted. The Low Battery Restore
transmission is not delayed.
Delinquency Tran
smission Delay
The value in this section determines
the period of time before a delin-
quency event is generated.
Delinquency delay is measured in
days if using cl
osing delinquency
or hours if using activity delinquenc
y as programmed in section [311]
option 6. Valid entries are [001]-[255] or [000] to disable.
Communications Cancel Window
After the transmission Delay expires and a zone alarm is transmitted,
the communications ca
ncel window begins.
If an access code is entered duri
ng this window, a re
porting code is
communicated and logged. If the
window expires without an access
code entry or a code is entered
after the window, the communications
canceled event is not
logged or communicated.
NOTE:
The cancel window does not st
art after an [F][M][P] key
alarm.
[003] – Periodic Test Transmission Cycle
This value determines the period between test transmissions. Valid
entries are [000]-[255]. Whether this
interval is in hours or days is
determined by section [022], option 4.
NOTE:
For UL/ULC listed installations,
the test interval is 24 hours.
[004] – Periodic Test Transmission Time of Day
Enter a 4-digit time using the
24-hour clock format (HH:MM).
Valid entries are from 00 to 23 for the hours (HH) and 00 to 59 for the
minutes (MM).
To disable the test tran
smission time of day, enter [9999] in this sec-
tion.
NOTE:
This time should not
be set for the same time as Day Light
Savings time.
[011] – Maximum Dialing Attempts
This section is used to program th
e number of dialing attempts made
to each telephone number when co
mmunicating. Valid entries are
001-005.
For UL/ULC listed installations, this value must be set to 005.
[012] – Delay Between PSTN Attempts
This programmable timer adds a de
lay before the next call is
attempted over PSTN. Valid entries
are 000-255, with a default of 3
seconds (making a total of 8 sec
onds: 3-second delay + standard 5-
second dial tone search).
[013] – Delay Between Force Attempts
This programming option is used to
set the length of time the alarm
system waits between the first dialing attempt and the force dial
attempt.
Valid Entries are 001-255 seconds. Default is 020.
[014] – Post Dial Wait for Handshake
This option is used to program
the length of time the communicator
waits for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the
programmed telephone number. Vali
d entries are 001 to 255 seconds.
NOTE:
Maximum 45 seconds fo
r UL installations.
[015] – T-Link Wait for Ack
This option is used to program
the length of time the communicator
waits for an acknowledge after tran
smitting via IP/GS. Valid entries
are 001 to 255. Default is 60 seconds.
[016] – IP/Cellular Fault Check Timer
This section is used to program
the number of poll commands sent
without valid poll responses before the alarm system generates a
trouble condition. The checks
occur at 3-second intervals.
Valid entries are 003-255 for trouble annunciation and transmission.
The trouble restore is not delayed.
[380] Communicator Option 1
1 – Communications
Enabled/Disabled
ON: (Default) The system communicator is enabled and all events
with reporting codes are reported to
the monitoring station. Refer to
the Telephone Number, Reporting C
ode and Call Direction program-
ming sections.
OFF: The system communicator is disabled and no events are
reported to the monitoring station.
NOTE:
Disabling the communicator
clears all FTC troubles.
2 – Restore On Bell Timeout
ON: Zone restore repor
ting codes are not tran
smitted until the zone
has been restored and the bell timeout
has expired. If the zone is not
restored when the bell cut-off time expires, the restore is transmitted
when the zone physically restores
or when the system is disarmed.
NOTE:
24-hour zones will not restore
until the zone is physically
restored
OFF: Zone restore reporting codes ar
e transmitted when the zone is
physically restored. If zones are stil
l active when the system is dis-
armed, the restore codes are transmitted when the system is dis-
armed. Section 5: Programming
49
3 – Pulse Dialing
ON: The alarm system
dials telephone
numbers using pulse (rotary)
dialing.
OFF: The alarm system dials te
lephone numbers using DTMF (dual
tone multi-frequency)
touch-tone dialing.
4 – Pulse Dial after 5th Attempt
ON: If DTMF dialing is enabled,
the alarm system dials telephone
numbers using DTMF dial
ing for the first 4 attempts. If unsuccessful,
the alarm system switches to pulse
(rotary) dialing for the remaining
attempts.
OFF: If DTMF dialing is enabled,
the alarm system
dials telephone
numbers using DTMF dialing
for all dialing attempts.
5 – Parallel Communications
ON: Parallel communications is enabled. The alarm system attempts
to communicate through all available receivers at the same time.
Once acknowledgment is provided by
any of the receivers, the alarm
system communicates the next event.
If more than one receiver is
configured for PSTN, the backup pr
ocedure described below is fol-
lowed.
OFF: Parallel communica
tions is disabled. If re
ceiver 1 fails, the
alarm system attempts to communicate with the next available
receiver (2-4) in sequence.
NOTE:
See [384] Communicator Backup Options on page 50 for
communicator backup programming.
6 – Alternate Dial
ON: After each failed dialing attempt, the communicator switches to
the next backup receiver in the sequence:
•
Receiver 2 backs up Receiver 1
•
Receiver 3 backs up Receiver 2
•
Receiver 4 backs up Receiver 3
This continues until co
mmunication is successful
or the sequence has
been repeated 5 times (depending
on the number of maximum dialing
attempts). If all 5 attempts fail
, an FTC trouble for the primary phone
number is logged. All backup rece
ivers automatically use the same
call directions and format
as the primary receiver.
OFF: After 5 failed attempts to communicate with the primary
receiver, the communicator switches to the next backup receiver in
the sequence and makes up to 5 more
attempts. This continues until
communication is successful or unt
il all backup receivers fail, at
which point an FTC trouble for
the primary number is logged.
7 – Reduced Dialing Attempts
ON: If a TLM trouble is present, the alarm system immediately
attempts to call the backup rece
iver. This option only applies to
PSTN. Backup communications must
be enabled. See option 5, Par-
allel Communications.
A minimum of two receivers should be enabled for this feature to
operate as intended.
OFF: If a TLM trouble is present, th
e number of dialing attempts pro-
grammed shall be attempted be
fore moving on to the backup
receiver.
8 – Activity Delinquency
ON: Inactivity on a partition fo
r a programmed duration (section
[377] option 002, Delinquency Tran
smission Delay)
transmits a
Delinquency code to the central st
ation. This option is designed to
help monitor the elderly or disabl
ed. The counter is reset if zone
activity is detected or if the sy
stem is armed. The Delinquency Trans-
mission Delay is in hours.
NOTE:
Delinquency code is not tran
smitted while Away armed.
Activity on bypassed zones does
not affect this timer.
OFF: The Delinquency re
porting code is sent when the programmed
number of days for delinquency (s
ection [377]) expi
res without the
partition being Armed. Once the code is sent, the timer is not started
again until the partition has been
armed. Each day programmed in the
counter represents one day plus the
time it takes for the partition to
reach midnight. To disable this
feature, program 000 in section
[377]>[002] option 5.
[381] Communicator Option 2
1 – Keypad Ringback
ON: When the Opening After Alarm
reporting code is successfully
transmitted to a programmed te
lephone number, the keypad emits a
series of 8 beeps to confirm to th
e occupant that the code was sent
and received. Ringback occurs for
each successfully
reported Open-
ing After Alarm code.
OFF: When the Opening After Alar
m reporting code is
successfully
transmitted to a progr
ammed telephone number,
the keypad does not
sound ringback.
2 – Bell Ringback
ON: When the Opening After Alarm
reporting code is successfully
transmitted to a programmed te
lephone number, the siren emits a
series of 8 squawks to confirm to th
e occupant that the code was sent
and received. Ringback occurs for
each successfully
reported Open-
ing After Alarm code.
OFF: When the Opening After Alar
m reporting code is
successfully
transmitted to a programmed te
lephone number, the siren does not
sound ringback.
4 – Closing Confirmati
on Enabled/Disabled
ON: When a Closing reporting code is
successfully transmitted to a
programmed telephone number, the ke
ypad emits a series of 8 beeps
to confirm to the occupant that
the Closing Code was sent and
received.
OFF: No keypad ringback is gene
rated when a Closing reporting
code is successfully transmitted.
8 – Communications Prio
rity Enabled/Disabled
ON: Events follow the priority le
vel indicated in ULC-S559 stan-
dard.
Concurrent event communications
are prioritized in the following
order (highest to
lowest priority):
1.
Fire Alarms
2.
CO Alarm
3.
Fire Supervisories
4.
Fire Trouble
5.
Monitoring (Medical, Panic or Security)
6.
All others such as restorals for
fire alarms, supe
rvisories, trou-
bles and monitoring.
7.
FTC'ed events
OFF: Events are communicated in the order they occur.
NOTE:
Must be ON for ULC commerci
al fire monitoring listed
installations.
[382] Communicator Option 3
1 – Not Used
2 – Walk Test Communications
ON: Zone alarms that occur duri
ng Walk Test are communicated if
programmed to do so.
OFF: Zone alarms during Walk Te
st are not communicated. FMP key
alarms are still communicated.
4 – Call Waiting Cancel
ON: The call waiting ca
ncel string (page 43) is used on the first
attempt to dial each phone number. It
is not used on any further dial-
ing attempts.
OFF: The call waiting cancel
string is not dialed. Section 5: Programming
50
5 – Alternate Communi
cator Enable/Disable
ON: The system communicates using the alternate communicator.
All related programming options
, reporting and supervision are
enabled when programmed via PC-Link2.
OFF: The alternate communicator and all associated programming
functionality are disabled. The auto
time update feat
ure is disabled.
NOTE:
If alternate communicator troubles are present when the
communicator is disabl
ed, the troubles are logged, communicated,
and cleared from [*][2]. When the communicator is re-enabled, the
trouble conditions are again logged,
communicated and indicated in
[*][2].
6 – AC Failure Communication Delay in Hours/Minutes
ON: The AC failure communica
tion delay (section [377]>[002]
option 2) is programmed in hours.
OFF: The AC failure communicati
on delay is programmed in min-
utes.
8 – Not Used
[383] Communicator Option 4
1 – Phone Number
Account Code
ON: The account code co
mmunicated to the central station follows
the phone number the event is progr
ammed to communicate on (pro-
grammed in section [310] Account Codes on page 47):
•
Receiver 1 all events will
follow partition 1 account code
•
Receiver 2 all events will
follow partition 2 account code
•
Receiver 3 all events will
follow partition 3 account code
•
Receiver 4 all events will
follow partition 4 account code
OFF: Events follow the account code
assigned to each partition when
communicating.
NOTE:
This feature only works with CID
2 – 4 or 6-Digit System Account Code
ON: The programmable account code
in section [310][000] is 6 dig-
its long (used for SIA format).
OFF: The programmable
account code in secti
on [310][000] is 4 dig-
its long.
5 – Communicate FTC Events
ON: The alarm system communicates FTC (failure to communicate)
events. The FTC Trouble/Restore
reporting code transmission fol-
lows the call direction th
e events are assigned to.
OFF: FTC events are not comm
unicated. FTC Trouble/Restore
reporting codes are communicated to
the Maintenanc
e call direction
group after the next successful communication.
6 – Not used
[384] Communicator Backup Options
2 – Receiver 2 Backup Option
ON: Receiver 2 backs up
Receiver 1. Receiver 2 is only used if an
FTC event is detected on Receiver 1.
Receiver 2 uses the same form
at programmed for Receiver 1.
OFF: Receiver 2 is independent and will communicate if a number
and format are programmed.
3 – Receiver 3 Backup Option
ON: Receiver 3 backs up
Receiver 2. Receiver 3 is only used if an
FTC event is detected on Receiver 2.
Receiver 3 uses the same form
at programmed for Receiver 2.
OFF: Receiver 3 is independent and will communicate if a number
and format are programmed.
4 – Receiver 4 Backup Option
ON: Receiver 4 backs up Receiver 3.
Receiver 4 is only used if an
FTC event is detected on Receiver 3.
Receiver 4 uses the same form
at programmed for Receiver 3.
OFF: Receiver 4 is independent a
nd will communicate if a number
and format are programmed.
5.3.11 DLS Programming
Downloading allows programming of
the entire alarm system via a
computer. All functions and featur
es, changes and status, such as
trouble conditions and open zones,
can be viewed or programmed by
downloading.
The following downloading options are available:
•
6-hour window on start up: When the alarm system is powered
up, downloading access
is available for 6 hours. This provides
the option of downloading without
having to complete any key-
pad programming.
•
Double call method: The installe
r initiates a downloading win-
dow by calling the alarm system
, hanging up, then calling back
again.
•
User enabled DLS window: The us
er initiates a downloading
window using [*][6][Master code
][05]. This can be a 6-hour
window where the installer init
iates and termin
ates download-
ing as many times as necessary,
or it can be a 1-hour, 1 use win-
dow.
•
User initiated call-up: the user can initiate a downloading ses-
sion using [*][6][Master Code][06].
•
On-site downloading
using PC-Link: The installer connects a
computer directly to the alarm
system to perform on-site down-
loading.
•
Auto event buffer upload: The
Event buffer is automatically
uploaded to the DLS/SA computer
when it reaches 75% full.
Refer to the DLS/SA programming se
ctions described below for con-
figuration options.
[401] DLS/SA Options
1 – Double Call
ON: Calls for downloading
or SA are answered if a successful double
call routine is detected. Have the
downloading computer call the sys-
tem and let the telephone
line ring once or twic
e. After 1 or 2 rings,
hang up. If called back within the duration of the double call timer
(section [405]), the alarm syst
em answers on the first ring.
OFF: Incoming calls are not answer
ed using the double call routine
unless the user enables the DLS window.
NOTE:
This feature controls the
DLS window for PSTN connec-
tions only.
2 – User Enable
s/Disables DLS
ON: The [*][6][Master Code][05] command enables a 6-hour win-
dow where, on power-up, downloading calls are answered if a suc-
cessful double call routine is detected.
OFF: The user cannot enable a downloading window.
3 – DLS CallBack
ON: When a downloading call is an
swered, both the computer and
the alarm system hang up. The alar
m system then calls the download-
ing computer back using the
downloading tele
phone number and
begins the DLS session.
NOTE:
Disable this option if usi
ng more than one downloading
computer.
OFF: After successful
validation, the downloading computer gains
immediate access to the alarm system. Section 5: Programming
51
4 – User Call-Up
ON: A single call attempt can be ma
de to the downloading computer
using [*][6][Master Code][06].
OFF: [*][6][Master Code][06] does
not allow initiation of a down-
loading session.
6 – Panel Call-Up and Baud Rate
ON: When a DLS/SA session is initiated by the user, the initial
header is sent at 300 baud.
OFF: When a DLS/SA session is initiated by the user, the initial
header is sent at 110 baud. The al
arm system will then switch to 300
baud in order to receive the response from the DLS computer.
7 – Alternate Communicator DLS
ON: When this feature is enabled,
the alarm system responds to DLS
requests through the
alternate communica
tor IP or cellular paths at
any time, regardless of whether th
e DLS window is active or not.
However, if a pre-defined number of consecutive incorrect DLS
access codes is detected (See “R
emote Lockout DLS” on page 37)
while trying to establish a connection, alternate communicator DLS
access is locked out until
the next hour roll-over.
OFF: When this feature is disabl
ed, the alarm system only responds
to DLS requests through the altern
ate communicator IP or cellular
paths when the DLS window is active.
The DLS/SA window is active foll
owing a power up or if enabled
using [*][6][maser code][
05] (System Service/DLS).
NOTE:
This option controls DLS over
alternate communicator only.
[402] PSTN DLS Phone Number
Programming
This section is used to program
the telephone number for DLS down-
loading over PSTN. This phone numbe
r is used for User Call Up,
Periodic DLS and DLS Call ba
ck. If no phone number is pro-
grammed, the system attempts to use the alternate communicator IP
path (if configured).
The maximum number length is 32 digits.
[403] DLS Access Code
This 6-digit hexadecimal code allo
ws the alarm system to confirm
the identity of the downloading computer.
If the code does not match the computer, the alarm system does not
allow DLS access.
Once a DLS connection is establishe
d, the operator is allowed three
attempts to enter the correct access code. If these attempts are unsuc-
cessful, the alarm syst
em disconnects and a
new attempt must be
made.
If cellular or IP paths are used
for the DLS connection, a pre-pro-
grammed number of unsuccessful at
tempts causes a 1-hour DLS
lockout. Number of attempts is
programmed in section [012].
[404] DLS/SA Panel ID
This 10-digit hexadecimal code identifies the alarm system to the
downloading computer.
[405] PSTN Double Call Timer
Use this section to program the
amount of time that can elapse
between the first and second call
when using Double Call download-
ing. Valid entries are 001 to 255 (seconds).
[406] PSTN Number of
Rings to Answer On
The value in this section determin
es how many rings are required in
order to establish a DLS connection.
Default value is 000 rings. Valid
entries are [000]-[020].
NOTE:
If Double-Call option and Number of Rings to Answer are
enabled, either one will work depe
nding on how the installer calls the
alarm system.
[407] SA Access Code
This 6-digit hexadecimal code allows the alarm system to confirm
the identity of the downloading computer.
If the code does not match the com
puter, the alarm system does not
allow uploading/downloading.
Programming the access code as FFFFFF disables SA access.
Once an SA connection is
established, multiple
attempts to input the
correct downloading access code
(programmed in [012]) is allowed.
The operator is allowed three attempts to enter the correct access
code. If these attempts are unsucce
ssful, the alarm system discon-
nects and a new atte
mpt must be made.
If cellular or IP paths are used fo
r the SA connection, up to 6 unsuc-
cessful attempts causes a 1-hour
SA lockout (See “Remote Lockout
DLS” on page 37).
[410] Automatic DLS/SA Options
[001] – Auto DLS Options
1 – Periodic DLS
ON: Upload/download commands
programmed in advance (batch
files) are periodically downl
oaded to the DLS computer.
See below to program the times
and days when this occurs.
NOTE:
The computer must be waiting fo
r a call in order for this fea-
ture to work.
OFF: The alarm system does not
periodically call
the downloading
computer.
3 – DLS on Event Buffer %75 Full
ON: The alarm system automatically
calls the downl
oading computer
with DLS when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.
This option is independent of the
actual transmission of the Event
Buffer 75% full event (the event doe
s not need to be
transmitted for
the panel to perform
the automatic upload).
The panel first communicates the Event Buffer 75% full event (if
enabled) using either PSTN or IP
and then performs the automatic
download.
OFF: The alarm system does not au
tomatically call the downloading
computer when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.
5 – SA on Event Buffer %75 Full
ON: The alarm system automatically
calls the downl
oading computer
with SA when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.
This option is independent of the
actual transmission of the Event
Buffer 75% full event (the event doe
s not need to be
transmitted for
the panel to perform
the automatic upload).
The panel first communicates the Event Buffer 75% full event (if
enabled) using either PSTN or IP
and then performs the automatic
download.
OFF: The alarm system does not au
tomatically call the downloading
computer when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.
[002] Periodic DLS Days
This section is used to program
the number of days
between periodic
DLS downloads. Valid entries are from 001 to 255 days. Section 5: Programming
52
[003] Periodic DLS Time
This section is used to progra
m the time of day periodic DLS down-
load takes place. Time is in 24-
hour format and th
e default is 00:00
(midnight).
[007] Delay Call Window
This section is used to define a
user call-up window. Users can only
initiate a downloading session during
this window. When a value is
entered in this section, the setting in Periodic DLS Time (see the
option above) is overridden. When 00:00 is entered in this field, the
alarm system initiates a DLS call at the time programmed in Periodic
DLS Time. Start and end times must
be defined using
24-hour format
(e.g., 13:30).
5.3.12 Schedule Programming
The sections described below are
used for programming scheduled
operating times for PGM
command outputs 1-4.
[601]-[604] Progra
mming Schedule 1-4
These sections are used to defi
ne schedules for
PGM command out-
puts 1-4 operation. When a PGM is
configured for timed output oper-
ation, it activates at the programmed start time and will turn off after
the programmed duration. For example, 5 seconds.
Each schedule contains 4 intervals,
for PGMs 1-4. Within each inter-
val, a start time and end time can
be programmed for each day of the
week. Holiday schedules 1-
4 can also be selected.
[101]-[102] Set Start Time/ End Time
Used to program the time of day
the schedule interval begins and
ends. (HH:MM). Valid entries ar
e 0000-2359 and 9999. The end time
must be equal to or greater than
the start time. 9999 is used when an
interval needs to extend past 24 hour
s. To do this, program the start
time of the first interval then
the end time with 9999. Program the
start time of the second interval as
9999. Select the day of the week
the schedule will end.
NOTE:
If two intervals in a schedule are programmed with the same
start time, the schedule follows the interval with the longest end time.
[103] Days Assignment
Used to program the day of the week
that the schedule interval starts
and ends. Use the scroll keys to se
lect a day then toggle the option
on. Multiple days of the week can be enabled.
[104] Holiday Assignment
Program PGMs to follow holiday sc
hedule group 1-4. Select (Y) to
enable. If all days of the week for an interval are disabled (N), the
schedule activates on the enabled holidays.
[711]-[714] Holiday Schedules
Use this section to pr
ogram holiday schedules
. During holiday sched-
ules, other scheduled events do not
occur. Enter section 711 to 714
for holiday group 1 to 4.
Each of the four available holiday groups can have up to 99 holiday
schedules programmed.
[001]-[099] Holiday Dates 1-99
Program holiday dates in
the following format: MMDDYY
MM valid entries are 01 to 12
DD valid entries are 01 to 31
YY valid entries are 00 to 99
5.3.13 Wireless Programming
[804] Wireless Programming
This programming section is used to
enroll, program and delete wire-
less devices. Note that the HSM2
HOSTx wireless tr
ansceiver or RF
model keypad must be installed in
order to enroll
wireless devices.
[000] – Wireless Device Enrollment
To enroll a wireless de
vice using this method, press and hold the
Enroll button on the device for 2-5
seconds until the LED illuminates
then release the button. The alarm system automatically discovers the
device and the keypad displays a
confirmation message. The device
ID, type and the next available z
one number are displayed. Press [*]
to accept or scroll to
another available zone
number. Batteries must
be installed in the wireless device in order to enroll.
NOTE:
Ensure wireless signa
l strength is adequa
te before mounting
the wireless device. See the instructions provided with the wireless
device for details.
NOTE:
For complete wireless device programming descriptions and
worksheets, see the HSM2Hostx wirele
ss transceiver inst
allation manual.
[850] Cellular Signal Strength
This section is used to view both
the cellular signal strength and the
radio technology in use.
Table 5-3: Cellular Technology
5 bars indicate maximum signal stre
ngth. 0 bars indicate the commu-
nicator is not connect
ed to the network.
[851] Alternate Communicator Programming
See the alternate communicator installation manual for programming
instructions.
[860] Display Keypad Slot Number
The 2-digit slot number of the keypad
being used is displayed in this
read only section.
[861]-[876] Keypad Programming
Use section [861] to [876] to conf
igure keypads 1 to 16. For informa-
tion on keypad programming, refer to
the installation sheet supplied
with the keypad.
[899] Template Programming
Template programming allows qui
ck programming of the minimum
functions required for basic operation.
This section is
used to view
current template programming options
and to define certain system
parameters. Press the (#) key to
accept the displayed value and
advance to the next option. Th
e following options are available:
•
5-digit Template Code: Displays
the current 5-digit template pro-
gramming code (default: 0000). Each
digit in the code selects a
set of pre-defined programming
options, as described below:
• Digit 1 - zone 1-8 definition options
Diaplay
Technology
GP
GPRS
ED
EDGE
HS
HSPA
H+
HSPA
CD
CDMA
EV
EVDO Section 5: Programming
53
• Digit 2 - system EOL options
• Digit 3 - alarm controller communications options
• Digit 4 - reporting code configurations
• Digit 5 - DLS connection options
•
Central Station Telephone Number: The phone number used to
contact the central monitoring
station (32 character limit).
•
Central Station Account Code:
The account code used in pro-
gramming section [310]. This
is a 4 or 6-digit entry.
•
Partition Account Code: Used
to identify pa
rtition-specific
events. All 4 digits must be entere
d in order to complete the entry.
•
This account code is entered in
to programming section [310][001].
•
DLS Access Code: The 6-digit DL
S access code used in pro-
gramming section [403].
•
Partition 1 Entry Delay: The 3-di
git entry delay duration for parti-
tion 1, in seconds, used in pr
ogramming [005][001]-[008] option 1.
•
Partition 1 Exit Delay: The 3-di
git exit delay duration for parti-
tion 1, in seconds, used in programming section [005][001]-
[008] option 3.
•
Installer Code: The 4 or 6-digit in
staller access c
ode used in pro-
gramming section [006][001].
For more information on template
programming, see Appendix C:
Template Programming Tables on page 105.
5.3.14 Systems Information
[900] System Information
[000] – Control Panel Version
This read-only section contains th
e model number, so
ftware version,
hardware revision, of
the alarm controller
.
For example, an entry of
1234 is read as version 12.34.
[001]-[524] – Module Information
This read-only section is used to
view the model number, software
version, and hardware revision info
rmation of the modules enrolled
on the alarm system.
To view information for a specific module, scroll to the correspond-
ing section:
[001]-[016] keypads
[101]-[116] 8-zone expansion module
[201] 8-output expansion module
[460] Alternate Communicator
[461] HSM2Host module
[501]-[504] 1A power supply module
[521]-[524] high-current output modules 1-4
[901] Installer Walk Test Mode Enable/Disable
This mode tests the operation of each detector in the system. Enter
section [901] to initiate a walk test. While in Walk Test mode, the
Ready, Armed, and Trouble LED's on
the keypad flas
h to indicate
that the test is active. When a zone is tripped during the test, a 2-sec-
ond tone sounds on all system keypads
to indicate that the zone is
working correctly.
After 10 minutes without
zone activity, the alarm system emits 5
beeps every 10 seconds from all keypa
ds. After another 5 minutes of
inactivity, Walk Test terminates automatically.
To manually exit walk test mode, enter [901] again.
5.3.15 Module Programming
Use this section to add, remove
and confirm the following modules:
•
Keypads
See Table 1-2 on page 2
•
8-zone expander module
(HSM2108)
•
8-output expander module
(HSM2208)
•
Power supply
(HSM2300)
•
4-output power supply
(HSM2204)
•
Wireless transceiver
(HSM2HOSTx)
Once added, modules are supervised by the system.
[902] Add/Remove Modules
Modules can be enrolled
automatically our manual
ly. In either case,
the serial number of the device is used as an identifier.
Select one of the enrollmen
t options described below.
[000] – Auto Enroll Modules
When this mode is selected, the alarm system automatically enrolls
all modules connect
ed to the Corbus. The total number of modules
currently enrolled are displayed on the keypad.
•
Enter sub-section [000] to begi
n auto enrollment of all new
modules. The auto enroll sc
reen will show the following:
• KP = Number of keypad type modules
• IO = Number of zone and output type modules
• M = Number of other type modules
Devices are assigned to
the next available
slot. The slot assign-
ment can be modified using
subsections [002] and [003].
[001] – Enroll Modules
To enroll modules individually:
1.
Enter programming section [902]-[001].
2.
When prompted, key in the serial number of the module found
on the PCB. An error tone is s
ounded if an invalid serial number
is used.
3.
To cancel enrollment
of a module, press [#].
[002] – Module Slot Assignment (LED, LCD, ICON)
This section is used to change th
e slot number a module is enrolled
in. To change the slot number:
1.
Enter programming section [902]-[002].
2.
Key in the serial number of the module.
3.
When prompted, key in the new
two-digit slot number. The pre-
vious slot assignment is replac
ed with the new one. An error
tone sounds if an invalid slot number is keyed in.
[003] – Edit Module Slot Assignment (LCD Keypad Only)
Like [002], this section is also used
to change the slot number of a
module. With this option, however,
the serial number is not required.
To change the slot number:
1.
Enter programming section [902]-[002].
2.
Use the scroll keys to locate th
e module then press [*] to select.
3.
Key in the new two-digit slot
number. The previous slot assign-
ment is replaced with the new one
. An error tone sounds if an
invalid slot number is keyed in.
Deleting Modules
The following sections are used to
remove modules from the system:
•
[101] – keypads
•
[102] – 8-zone expander modules
•
[103] – 8-output expander modules
•
[106] – HSM2Host
•
[109] – Power supply
•
[110] – 4 High Current Output
1.
After entering section [902], scro
ll to the module type you want
to delete (101-110).
2.
Press [*] to select the module type then scroll to the specific
module you want to delete.
3.
Press [*] to select the module then, when prompted, press [*]
again to delete. Section 5: Programming
54
[903] Confirm Module
The following sections are used to
confirm enrollment of individual
modules, their serial and slot number
s, and to locate them physically:
•
000 – View All Modules
•
101 – keypads
•
102 – 8-zone expander modules
•
103 – 8-output expander modules
•
106 – HSM2Host
•
109 – Power supply
•
110 – 4 High Current Output
To confirm a module:
1.
Enter section [903]>[000] to view
all enrolled modules or scroll
to the module type you want to confirm (001-110).
2.
Press [*] to select the module t
ype then scroll to the specific
module you want to confirm. Pr
ess [*] to enter Confirmation
mode. The module’s serial numb
er and slot number are dis-
played on the keypad and the stat
us LEDs on the device flash.
This continues until c
onfirmation mode for the device is exited
via the [#] key. If communication
with a module is lost at the
time of confirmation, a warning
message is displayed for 1 sec-
ond before exiting the section.
NOTE:
Keypad Blanking (section [016], opt
ion 3) must be disabled
to confirm keypads.
5.3.16 Testing
[904] Wireless Placement Test
This test is used to determine RF signal status for wireless devices
and can be performed at a system
keypad or at the
individual device.
These instructions pertain to testing at the keypad. For instructions
on placement testing at the device
, refer to the installation sheet
included with the wi
reless equipment.
The following test
modes are available:
[001]-[128] Placement Test Zones 1-128
Test wireless device
s individually by zone
(LCD keypads only).
[521]-[528] – Placement Test Repeaters 1-8
Test each enrolled wireless
repeater (LCD keypads only).
[551]-[566] – Placement Test Sirens 1-16
Test each enrolled wireless
siren (LCD keypads only).
[601]-[632] Placement Test Wireless keys 1-32
Test individual wireless
keys. Once in this se
ction, press a button on
the wireless key to begin th
e test (LCD
keypads only).
[701]-[716] – Placement Test Wireless Keypads 1-16
Test each enrolled wireless keypad (LCD keypads only).
Two test results are provided:
•
24-hour: Average status results received during a 24-hour period.
•
Now: Signal status result
s of the current test.
During testing, the Ready and Armed
LED's flash to i
ndicate data is
being received. A flashing Trouble
LED indicates RF
interference.
The following status indi
cators may be displayed:
Table 5-4 Wireless Devi
ce Status Indications
[982] Battery Settings
[000] – Panel Battery Settings
01 – When disabled, the panel batt
ery is charged at 400mA. When
enabled, the battery is charged at 700mA.
[010] – High Current Output Battery
Enables and disables the high-cu
rrent battery charge option for
HSM2204 1-4.
[020] – 1A Power Supply Battery
Enables and disables the high-cu
rrent battery charge option for
HSM2300 1-4.
5.3.17 Defaults
[989] Default Master Code
This section is used to default the
master code to the factory default.
After entering this section, key
in the installer code then 989.
[989][installer code][989] or [*].
[990] Installer Lock
out Enable/Disable
When this option is enabled, an in
staller can not pe
rform a hardware
default; attempts to do so are logged to the event buffer.
An audible indication of
installer lockout is provided when powering
up the alarm system (the phone line
relay clicks 10 tim
es). Software
default changes can still be made
while installer lo
ckout is enabled.
[990][installer code][990] or [*].
[991] Default Keypads
This programming option is used to
return system keypads to factory
default settings.
[999] – Default All Keypads
This section resets all system ke
ypads to factory defaults. After
entering this section, key in th
e installer code then (*) or 991.
[901]- [916] – Default Keypads 1-16
This section resets i
ndividual keypads to fa
ctory defaults. After
entering this section, se
lect the keypad to defau
lt, key in the installer
code then 991 (or press [*]).
[993] Default Alternate Communicator
This section resets the alternate communicator to factory defaults.
Enter [993][installer code][993 or *].
[996] Default Wireless Receiver
This section resets the wireless
receiver (HSM2HOSTx) to factory
defaults. Enter [996][ins
taller code][996 or *].
[999] Default System
This section resets the alarm controller to factory defaults. Enter
[999][installer code][999 or *].
Keypad
Status
Strong
Strong signal strength
Good
Good signal strength
Poor
Poor signal strength
1-Way
The device is operating in
1-way mode only. The alarm
panel cannot configure
or control the device
Not Test
Displayed as the Now re
sult if no test was performed.
None
Always displayed as the
24-hour result when testing
wireless keys. 55
Section 6: Programming Worksheets
This section provides a de
tailed list of all available programm
ing options and a place to record
custom settings
. The index bel
ow
lists all available program
ming sections in numerical order and includes page
references to descrip
tion and worksheet locations
.
Programming Options Index
Section
Page
Section
Page
Label Programming
000 Label Programming ..................................................26/57
000 – Language Selection ............
............
...........
......26/57
001 – 128 – Zone Labels ..
............
............
...........
......26/57
051 – Zone Tamper Labe
l...........
.........
.........
.........
....27/58
052 – Zone Fault Label .
...........
...........
.........
.........
....27/58
064 – CO Alarm Message .
...........
............
...........
......27/58
065 – Fire Alarm Message
...........
............
...........
......27/58
066 – Fail to Arm Event Message
............
...........
......27/58
067 – Alarm When Armed Even
t Message ......
.........27/58
100 – System Label .......
...........
...........
.........
.........
....27/58
101-108 – Partition 1-8 Labels .....
............
...........
......27/58
201- 208 – Partition Command Ou
tput Labels ........27/58
601-604 – Schedule 1- 4 Labels ...
............
...........
......27/58
801 – Keypad Labels .......
...........
.........
.........
.........
....27/59
802 – Zone Expander Labels ........
............
...........
......27/59
803 – Output Expander La
bels ..........
...........
.........
....27/59
806 – HSM2HOSTx Label
...........
............
...........
......27/59
809 – Power Supply Label .........
.........
.........
.........
....27/59
810 – High Current Output Suppl
y Label .................27/59
815 – Alternate Communicator La
bel ............
...........27/59
820 – Siren Label ..........
...........
...........
.........
.........
....27/59
821 – Repeater Label.....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....27/59
999 – Default Labels .....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....27/60
Zone Programming
001 Zone Type .................................................................27/60
002 – Zone Attributes ......................................................29/60
System Times
005 System Times ............................................................30/62
000 – System Area ........
...........
...........
.........
.........
....30/62
001 – 008 System Times - Partiti
on 1-8 .........
...........30/62
901-902 – Daylight Savings Begi
n/End .........
...........30/62
Access Codes
006 Installer Defined Access Codes ................................30/63
PGM Programming
007 – PGM Programming ................................................31/63
000 – Main Bell Partition Assignm
ent ...........
...........31/63
001- 028 – PGM 1-28 Partition ....
............
...........
......31/63
008 – PGM Timer Programming .....................................31/65
009 – PGM Types ............................................................31/66
010 PGM Attributes
000 – Main Bell Mask ....
............
.........
.........
.........
....31/67
001-028 PGM 1-28 Attributes.........
...........
...........
....34/67
011 PGM Configuration Options .....................................37/70
012 System Lockout .......
............
...........
...........
...........
....37/73
System Options
013 System Options 1 ......................................................37/73
1 – NC Loop/EOL .....................................................37/73
2 – DEOL/SEOL .......................................................37/73
3 – Show All Troubles when Ar
med ........
...........
......37/73
4 – Tamper/Faults Do Not show
as open...................37/73
5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6] ..............................37/73
6 – Audible Exit Fault ...............................................37/73
7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger ............................37/73
8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling............................37/73
014 System Options 2 ......................................................38/73
1 – Bell Squawk ........................................................38/73
2 – Bell Duration Auto-Arm .....................................38/73
3 – Bell Squawk on Exit ............................................38/73
4 – Bell Squawk on Entry..........................................38/73
5 – Bell Squawk on Trouble .......
.........
.........
.........
....38/73
7 – Exit Delay Termination .......................................38/73
8 – Fire Bell Continues..............................................38/73
015 System Options 3 ......................................................38/73
1 – [F] Key ................................................................38/73
2 – [P] Key Annunciation...........
.........
.........
.........
....38/73
3 – Quick Exit............................................................38/73
4 – Quick Arming/Function Key ...............................38/73
6 – Master Code Not User Changeable .....................38/73
7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enab
le ........
............
..... 38/73
8 – TLM Audible When Armed................................ 38/73
016 System Options 4 .....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 38/73
1 – AC Trouble Display .
...........
...........
.........
............ 38/73
2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes.....
.........
.........
............ 38/73
3 – Keypad Blanking ................................................ 38/73
4 – Keypad Blanking Requires Code
........................ 38/73
5 – Keypad Back Lighting ........................................ 38/73
6 – Power Save Mode ............................................... 38/73
7 – Bypass Display When Armed ............................. 38/73
8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled ................................... 38/73
017 System Options 5 .....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 39/73
1 – Chime on Opening .............................................. 38/73
2 – Chime on Closing ............................................... 38/73
4 – Multi-Hit ............................................................. 38/73
5 – Late to Close ....................................................... 38/73
6 – Daylight Savings Time........................................ 38/73
8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/
Disarm Only........... 38/73
018 System Options 6 .....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 39/73
1 – Test Transmission Exception .............................. 39/73
2 – Realtime Bypass Reporting ................................ 39/73
5 – Keypad Buzzer On Alarm .................................. 39/73
7 – Exit Delay Restart ............................................... 39/73
8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps .........
.........
.........
............ 39/73
019 System Options 7 .....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 40/73
2 – Latching Troubles ....
...........
...........
.........
............ 39/73
5 – Audible Bus Fault ............................................... 39/73
6 – Duress Codes ...................................................... 39/73
7 – Temperature in Celsius ....................................... 39/73
020 System Options 8 .....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 40/73
3 – [*][8] Access While Armed ................................ 39/73
021 System Options 9 .....
.................
...........
...........
... 40/73
3 – Auto-Arming Bypass .......................................... 40/73
8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arm ....................... 40/73
022 System Options 10 ...
...........
............
...........
...........
... 40/73
1 – [F] Key Option .................................................... 40/73
4 – Test Transmission Counter in
Hours.........
.......... 40/73
5 – Away to Stay Toggle ...........
...........
.........
............ 40/73
7 – Trouble Beeps Are Silent ......
.........
.........
............ 40/73
8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away Mode ......................... 40/73
023 System Options 11....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 40/73
1 – Ready LED Flash for Force Arm........................ 40/73
4 – Access Code Required for [*
][1] ........................ 40/73
5 – Access Code Required for [*
][2] ........................ 40/73
6 – Access Code Required for [*
][3] ........................ 40/73
7 – Access Code Required for [*
][4] ........................ 40/73
8 – [*][6] Accessibility Option ................................. 40/73
024 System Options 12 ...
...........
............
...........
...........
... 41/73
1 – 50Hz AC / 60 Hz AC .......................................... 40/73
2 – Crystal Timebase................................................. 40/73
3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming...................................... 40/73
4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming...................................... 40/73
5 – Real Time Clock Option ..................................... 40/73
8 – DLS Disconnect .................................................. 40/73
025 System Options 13 ...
...........
............
...........
...........
... 40/73
1 – European Dial ..................................................... 40/73
2 – Force Dial............................................................ 40/73
5 – ID Tone ............................................................... 40/73
6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz .........
...........
............
..... 40/73
7 – 1 Hour DLS Window .......................................... 40/73
8 – FTC Audible Bell................................................ 40/73
040 User Authentication..
...........
............
...........
...........
... 42/73
01 – User Code/Prox Tag .......................................... 42/73
02 – User Code and Prox Tag ................................... 42/73
041 Access Code Digits .....
...........
...........
...........
............ 42/73
01 – 4-Digit Access Codes........................................ 42/73
02 – 6-Digit Access Codes........................................ 42/73
042 Event Verification.....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 42/74
01 – Burglary Verified Counter................................. 42/73 56
03 – Burglary Verification Selection .........................42/73
151-158 Partition 1-8 Auto-Arm/Dis
arm .............
...........42/74
001 – Auto-Arming Times ...........
............
...........
......42/74
002 – Auto-Disarm Times ............
............
...........
......42/74
003 – Auto-Disarming Holiday Sc
hedule .................42/74
004 – Auto-Arming Pre-Alert ......
............
...........
......42/74
005 – Auto-Arming Postpone Time
r ..........
...........
....42/74
006 – No Activity Arming Timer ....
...........
...........
....42/74
007 – No Activity Arming Pre-Al
ert Timer .....
.........42/74
200 Partition Mask ...........................................................42/77
001 – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Ma
sk ..............
.........
....42/77
201-208 Partition 1-8 Zone Assi
gnment ..................43/78
300 Panel/Receiver Communications Path ......................43/79
301 Phone Number Programming ....
.........
.........
.........
....43/79
304 Call Waiting Cancel String .......................................43/79
Event Reporting
307 Zone Reporting ........
............
...........
...........
...........
....43/81
308 Event Reporting ........................................................43/81
001 – Miscellaneous Alarm 1.......
............
...........
......44/81
002 – Miscellaneous Alarm 2.......
............
...........
......44/81
011 – Priority Alarms ................................................44/81
021 – Fire Alarms 1 .....
...........
...........
...........
.........
....44/81
101 – Tamper Events .....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....44/81
201 – Open/Close Events 1 .........
........
.........
.........
....44/81
202 – Open/Close Events 2 .........
........
.........
.........
....44/81
211 – Miscellaneous Open/Close
Events ..................44/81
221 – Bypass Events......
...........
...........
.........
.........
....44/81
301 – Panel Events 1 .....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....45/81
302 – Panel Events 2 .....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....45/81
305 – Panel Events 5 .....
...........
...........
.........
.........
....45/81
311 – Maintenance Events 1......................................45/81
312 – Maintenance Events 2 .......
........
.........
.........
....45/81
313 – Maintenance Events 3 .......
........
.........
.........
....45/81
314 – Maintenance Events 4 .......
........
.........
.........
....45/81
321 – Receiver Events ..............
...........
.........
.........
....45/81
331 – Module Events 1...
............
.........
.........
.........
....45/81
332 – Module Events 2...
............
.........
.........
.........
....46/81
335 – Module Events 5...
............
.........
.........
.........
....46/81
351 – Alternate Communi
cator ................
...........
......46/82
352 – Alternate Communicator 2 ....
...........
...........
....46/82
354 – Alternate Communicator 4 ....
...........
...........
....46/82
355 – Alternate Communicator 5 ....
...........
...........
....46/82
361 – Wireless Device Events ......
............
...........
......46/82
401– System Test Events
............
.........
.........
.........
....46/82
Communications
309 System Call Direction ...............................................46/82
001– Maintenance Events
............
............
...........
......47/82
002 – Test Transmission Events ...
............
...........
......47/82
310 Account Codes .........
............
...........
...........
...........
....47/82
311-318 Partition 1-8 Call
Direction ...........
.........
...........47/82
350 Communicator Formats ...........................................47/84
377 Communication Variables.........................................47/84
001 – Swinger Shutdown Counters .
...........
...........
....47/84
002 – Communication Dela
ys .............
.........
.........
....48/84
003 – Periodic Test Transmissi
on Cycle ...................48/84
004 – Periodic Test Transmissi
on Time of Day ........48/84
011 – Maximum Dialing Attempts ...........................48/84
012 – Delay Between PSTN Atte
mpts ...........
...........48/84
013 – Delay Between Force Attemp
ts............
...........48/84
014 – Post Dial Wait for Handsh
ake ........
...........
......48/84
015 – T-Link Wait for Ack ...........
............
...........
......48/84
016 – IP/Cellular Fault Check Ti
mer .............
...........48/84
380 Communicator Option 1 ...........................................48/84
381 Communicator Option 2 ...........................................49/84
382 Communicator Option 3 ...........................................49/84
383 Communicator Option 4 ...........................................50/84
384 Communicator Backup Options...
............
...........
......50/84
DLS Programming
401 DLS/SA Options .......................................................50/85
402 PSTN DLS Phone Number ........
.........
.........
.........
....51/85
403 DLS Access Code .....................................................51/85
404 DLS/SA Panel ID......................................................51/85
405 PSTN Double Call Timer .........................................51/85
406 PSTN Number of Rings to Answer On ....................51/85
407 SA Access Code........................................................51/85
410 Automatic DLS Options ...........................................51/85
001 – Automatic DLS Toggle Opti
ons .............
........ 51/85
002 – Periodic DLS Days ..
...........
...........
............
..... 51/85
003 – Periodic DLS Time ..
...........
...........
............
..... 52/85
007 – Delay Call Window ..........
.........
.........
............ 52/85
Schedule Programming
601 Programming Schedule ..
.................
...........
...........
... 52/85
711-714 Holiday Schedules..
...........
...........
.........
............ 52/88
Wireless Programming
804 Wireless Programming ..
...........
...........
.........
............ 52/89
850 Cellular Signal Strength ...........
...........
.........
............ 52/89
851 Alternate Communicator Progr
amming .........
.......... 52/89
Keypad Programming
860 Keypad Slot Number .....
...........
...........
.........
............ 52/89
861-876 Keypad Programming
...........
...........
............
..... 52/90
000 – Keypad Partition Ma
sk ..................
............
..... 12/90
001-005 – Function Key 1- 5 A
ssignment ................ 52/90
011 – Keypad I/O ..................................................... 52/90
012 – Local PGM Output Timer ...
...........
............
..... 52/90
021 – Keypad Option 1 ...............
.........
.........
............ 52/90
022 – Keypad Option 2 ...............
.........
.........
............ 52/90
023 – Keypad Option 3 ...............
.........
.........
............ 52/90
030 – LCD Message.......
...........
...........
.........
............ 52/90
031 – Download LCD Message Du
ration.........
........ 52/90
041 – Indoor Temperature Zone En
try............
.......... 52/90
042 – Outdoor Temperature Zone
Entry .........
.......... 52/90
101-228 – Door Chime Sound-Zo
ne 1-128 ......
........ 52/90
899 Template Programming ............
...........
.........
............ 52/91
System Information and Testing
900 System Information ..
...........
............
...........
...........
... 53/91
901 Installer Walk Test ....
...........
............
...........
...........
... 53/91
Module Programming
902 Add/Remove Modules..............
...........
.........
............ 53/91
000 – Auto-Enroll All Modules ....
...........
............
..... 53/91
001 – Enroll Modules ....
...........
...........
.........
............ 53/91
002 – Slot Assignment ...
...........
...........
.........
............ 53/91
003 – Edit Module Slot Assignmen
t ...............
.......... 53/91
101-110 – Delete Modules
...............
...........
...........
... 53/91
903 Confirm Modules ........
...........
...........
...........
............ 54/92
Te s t i n g
904 Wireless Placement Test
...........
...........
.........
............ 54/92
Battery Settings
982 Battery Settings ........
...........
............
...........
...........
... 54/92
000– Panel Battery Setti
ngs .............
...........
...........
... 54/92
010 – High Current Output Batt
ery Settings ....
........ 54/92
020 – 1A Power Supply Battery
Settings .........
........ 54/92
Defaults
989 Default Master Code ...
...........
...........
...........
............ 54/92
990 Installer Lockout Enable ..........
...........
.........
............ 54/92
991 Default Keypads .......
...........
............
...........
...........
... 54/92
999 – Default all Keypads...........
.........
.........
............ 54/92
901-916 – Default Keypad 1-16 ...
...........
............
..... 54/92
993 Default Alt Comm .......
...........
...........
...........
............ 54/92
996 Default Wireless Rece
iver ............
...........
............
..... 54/92
999 Default System ...
...........
...........
...........
.........
............ 54/92 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
57
Label Programming
[000] Label Programming
Description on page 26
000 – Language Selection
(2-digit decimal; Default: 01)
01 – English
06 – Dutch
11 – Swedish
16 – Turkish
21 – Russian
26 – Slovakian
02 – Spanish
07 – Polish
12 – Norwegian
18 – Croatian
22 – Bulgarian
27 – Serbian
03 – Portuguese
08 – Czech
13 – Danish
19 – Hungarian
23 – Latvian
28 – Estonian
04 – French
09 – Finish
14 – Hebrew
20
– Romanian
24 – Lithuanian
29 – Slovenian
05 – Italian
10 – German
15 – Greek
25 – Ukrainian
[000]
001 – Zone Labels
(2 x 14 Char
acters) Description on page 26
001:
044:
087:
002:
045:
088:
003:
046:
089:
004:
047:
090:
005:
048:
091:
006:
049:
092:
007:
050:
093:
008:
051:
094:
009:
052:
095:
010:
053:
096:
011:
054:
097:
012:
055:
098:
013:
056:
099:
014:
057:
100:
015:
058:
101:
016:
059:
102:
017:
060:
103:
018:
061:
104:
019:
062:
105:
020:
063:
106:
021:
064:
107:
022:
065:
108:
023:
066:
109:
024:
067:
110:
025:
068:
111:
026:
069:
112:
027:
070:
113:
028:
071:
114:
029:
072:
115:
030:
073:
116:
031:
074:
117:
032:
075:
118:
033:
076:
119:
034:
077:
120:
035:
078:
121:
036:
079:
122:
037:
080:
123:
038:
081:
124:
039:
082:
125:
040:
083:
126:
041:
084:
127:
042:
085:
128:
043:
086: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
58
[000]
051 – Zone Tamper Label
(1 x 14 Characters):
052 – Zone Fault Label
(1 x 14 Characters):
064 – CO Alarm Message
(2 x 14 Characters):
065 – Fire Alarm Message
(2 x 14 Characters):
066 – Fail to Arm Event Message
(2 x 16 Characters):
067 – Alarm When Armed Event Message
(2 x 16 Characters):
100 – System Label
(1 x 14 Characters):
[000]
101 – Partition 1 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
102 – Partition 2 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
103 – Partition 3 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
104 – Partition 4 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
105 – Partition 5 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
106 – Partition 6 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
107 – Partition 7 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
108 – Partition 8 Label
(
1 x 14 Characters):
[000]
201 – Partition 1 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 1 Command Output 1:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
002 – Par
tition 1 Command Output 2:
Descriptions on page 27
003
– Partition 1 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 1 Command Output 4:
202 – Partition 2 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 2 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 2 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 2 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 2 Command Output 4:
203 – Partition 3 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 3 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 3 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 3 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 3 Command Output 4:
204 – Partition 4 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 4 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 4 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 4 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 4 Command Output 4:
205 – Partition 5 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 5 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 5 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 5 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 5 Command Output 4:
206 – Partition 6 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 6 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 6 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 6 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 6 Command Output 4:
207 – Partition 7 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 7 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 7 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 7 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 7 Command Output 4:
208 – Partition 8 Co
mmand Output Labels
001 – Pa
rtition 8 Command Output 1:
002 – Partition 8 Command Output 2:
(2 X 14 ASCII)
003 – Par
tition 8 Command Output 3:
004 – Partition 8 Command Output 4:
[000]
601 – Schedule 1 Label
(1 X 16 ASCII):
Descriptions on page 27
602 – Schedule 2 Label
(1 X 16 ASCII):
603 – Schedule 3 Label
(1 X 16 ASCII):
604 – Schedule 4 Label
(1 X 16 ASCII): Section 6: Programming Worksheets
59
[000]
801 – Keypad Labels
(1 X 14 ASCII)
Description on page 27
001 – Keypad 1 Label:
009 – Keypad 9 Label:
002 – Keypad 2 Label:
010 – Keypad 10 Label:
003 – Keypad 3 Label:
011 – Keypad 11 Label:
004 – Keypad 4 Label:
012 – Keypad 12 Label:
005 – Keypad 5 Label:
013 – Keypad 13 Label:
006 – Keypad 6 Label:
014 – Keypad 14 Label:
007 – Keypad 7 Label:
015 – Keypad 15 Label:
008 – Keypad 8 Label:
016 – Keypad 16 Label:
[000]
802 – Zone Expander Labels
(1
x 14 ASCII):
Description on page 27
001– Zone Expander 1 Label:
009– Zone Expander 9 Label:
002– Zone Expander 2 Label:
010– Zone Expander 10 Label:
003– Zone Expander 3 Label:
011– Zone Expander 11 Label:
004– Zone Expander 4 Label:
012– Zone Expander 12 Label:
005– Zone Expander 5 Label:
013– Zone Expander 13 Label:
006– Zone Expander 6 Label:
014– Zone Expander 14 Label:
007– Zone Expander 7 Label:
015– Zone Expander 15 Label:
008– Zone Expander 8 Label:
[000]
803 – Output Expander Label
(1 X 14 ASCII)
Description on page 27
001– Output Expander 1 Label:
009– Output Expander 9 Label:
002– Output Expander 2 Label:
010– Output Expander 10 Label:
003– Output Expander 3 Label:
011– Output Expander 11 Label:
004– Output Expander 4 Label:
012– Output Expander 12 Label:
005– Output Expander 5 Label:
013– Output Expander 13 Label:
006– Output Expander 6 Label:
014– Output Expander 14 Label:
007– Output Expander 7 Label:
015– Output Expander 15 Label:
008– Output Expander 8 Label:
016– Output Expander 16 Label:
[000]
806 – HSM2HOSTx Label:
(1 X 14
ASCII) Description on page 27
[000]
809 – Power Supply Label
001 – Power Supply 1 Label:
(1 X 14 ASCII)
002 – Power Supply 2 Label:
Description on page 27
003 – Power Supply 3 Label:
004 – Power Supply 4 Label:
[000]
810 – High-Current Output Supply Label
(1 X 14 ASCII):
001 – High-Current Output Supply 1 Label:
002 – High-Current Output Supply 2 Label:
Description on page 27
003 – High-
Current Output Supply 3 Label:
004 – High-Current Output Supply 4 Label:
[000]
815 – Alt. Comm Label:
(1 X 14 ASCII) Description on page 27
[000]
820 – Siren Labels (1 X 14 ASCII):
Description on page 27
001– Siren 1 Label:
009– Siren 9 Label:
002– Siren 2 Label:
010– Siren 10 Label:
003– Siren 3 Label:
011– Siren 11 Label:
004– Siren 4 Label:
012– Siren 12 Label:
005– Siren 5 Label:
013– Siren 13 Label:
006– Siren 6 Label:
014– Siren 14 Label:
007– Siren 7 Label:
015– Siren 15 Label:
008– Siren 8 Label:
016– Siren 16 Label:
[000]
821 – Repeater Label
001– Repeater 1 Label:
(1 X 14 ASCII):
002– Repeater 2 Label:
Description on page 27
003– Repeater 3 Label:
004– Repeater 4 Label:
005– Repeater 5 Label: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
60
Zone Setup
006– Repeater 6 Label:
007– Repeater 7 Label:
008– Repeater 8 Label:
[000]
999 – Default Labels
Description on page 27
[001] Zone Type
Available Zone Types
Default = 000
Description on page 27
* Not UL evaluated
000
–
Null Zone
001
–
Delay 1
002
–
Delay 2
003
–
Instant
004
–
Interior
005
–
Interior Stay/Away
006
–
Delay Stay/Away
007 – Delayed 24-Hour
Fire
008 – Standard 24-Hour
Fire
009
–
Instant Stay/Away
010
–
Interior Delay
011
–
Day Zone
012
–
Night Zone
017
–
24-Hour Burglary
018 – 24-Hour Bell/
Buzzer
023
–
24-Hour Supervi-
sory
024
–
24-Hour Supervi-
sory Buzzer
025
–
Auto Verified Fire
027
–
Fire Supervisory
040
–
24-Hour Gas
041
–
24-Hour CO
042
–
24-Hour Holdup*
043
–
24-Hour Panic
045
–
24-Hour Heat
046
–
24-Hour Medical
047
–
24-Hour Emer-
gency
048
–
24-Hour Sprin-
kler*
049
–
24-Hour Flood
051
–
24-Hour Latching
Tamper
052
–
24-Hour Non-
Alarm
056
–
24-Hour High
Temperature
057
–
24 Hour Low Tem-
perature
060
–
24-Hour Non-
Latching Tamper
066
–
Momentary Key-
switch Arm
067
–
Maintained Key-
switch Arm
068
–
Momentary Key-
switch Disarm
069
–
Maintained Key-
switch Disarm
071
–
Door Bell
[002] Zone Attributes
Available Zone Attributes
See next page for defaults
Description on page 29
1
–
Bell Audible
2
–
Bell Steady
3
–
Door Chime
4
–
Bypass Enabled
5
–
Force Arm
6
–
Swinger Shutdown
7
–
Transmission Delay
8
–
Burglary Verification
9 – Normally Closed
EOL
10
–
Single EOL
11
–
Double EOL
12
–
Fast Loop/Normal Loop Response
Record Zone Settings:
Zone Type
Att.
Zone Type
Att.
Zone Type
Att.
Zone Type
Att.
Zone
Type
Att.
001:
027:
053:
079:
105:
002:
028:
054:
080:
106:
003: 029:
055:
081:
107:
004: 030:
056:
082:
108
005: 031:
057:
083:
109:
006: 032:
058:
084:
110:
007: 033:
059:
085:
111:
008: 034:
060:
086:
112:
009: 035:
061:
087:
113:
010: 036:
062:
088:
114:
011: 037:
063:
089:
115:
012: 038:
064:
090:
116:
013: 039:
065:
091:
117:
014: 040:
066:
092:
118:
015: 041:
067:
093:
119:
016:
042:
068:
094:
120:
017:
043:
069:
095:
121:
018:
044:
070:
096:
122:
019:
045:
071:
097:
123:
020:
046:
072:
098:
124:
021:
047:
073:
099:
125:
022:
048:
074:
100:
126:
023:
049:
075:
101:
127:
024:
050:
076:
102:
128:
025:
051:
077:
103:
026:
052:
078:
104: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
61
Zone Attribute Defaults
(Description on page 29)
Zone Attributes

Zone Type
000 Null Zone
001 Delay 1
 
002 Delay 2
 
003 Instant
 
004 Interior

005 Interior Stay/Away
 
006 Delay Stay/Away
 
007 Delayed 24-Hour Fire
 
008 Standard 24-Hour Fire

009 Instant Stay/Away


010 Interior Delay


011 Day Zone

012 Night Zone

016 Final Door Set
 
017 24-Hour Burglary
 
018 24-Hour Bell/Buzzer
  
023 24-Hour Supervisory

024 24-Hour Supervisory Buzzer

025 Auto Verify Fire

027 Fire Supervisory
040 24-Hour Gas

041 24-Hour CO

042 24-Hour Holdup

043 24-Hour Panic


045 24-Hour Heat

046 24-Hour Medical


047 24-Hour Emergency


048 24-Hour Sprinkler


049 24-Hour Flood

051 24-Hour Latching Tamper


052 24-Hour Non-Alarm

056 24 Hour High Temperature


057 24 Hour Low Temperature



060 24-Hr Non-Latching Tamper


066 Momentary Keyswitch Arm

067 Maintained Keyswitch Arm

068 Momentary Keyswitch Disarm

069 Maintained Keyswitch Disarm

071 Door Bell

2 – Bell Steady
3 – Chime Function
6 – Swinger Shutdown
7 – Transmission Delay
9 – Normally Closed EOL
5 – Force Arm
10 – Single EOL
11 – Double EOL
12 – Fast/Normal Loop Response
1 – Bell Audible
4 – Bypass Enabled Section 6: Programming Worksheets
62
System Times
[005] System Times
000 – System Area
Bell
Cutoff (Default: 004):
(3-Digit Decimal)
Description on page
30
Burglary Verificati
on Timer (Default: 060):
Zone Loop Response
Time (Default: 250):
Automatic Clock Adjust (Default: 060):
001 – Partition 1 Timer
Entry Delay 1 (Default: 030):
Entry Delay 2 (Default: 045):
Exit Delay (Default: 120):
002 – Partition 2 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
003 – Partition 3 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
004 – Partition 4 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
005 – Partition 5 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
006 – Partition 6 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
007 – Partition 7 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
008 – Partition 8 Timer
See partition 1 for
defaults
Entry Delay 1:
Entry Delay 2:
Exit Delay:
901 – Daylight Savings
Begin
Month:
Week:
Day:
Hour:
Increment:
902 – Daylight Savings
End
Month:
Week:
Day:
Hour:
Increment: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
63
Access Codes
PGM Programming
006 Installer-Defined Codes
001 – Installer Code
(Default:555555):
(4/6-Digit Decimal)
002 – Master Code
(Default:123456):
Description on page 30
003 – Ma
intenance Code (Default: AAAA00):
[007] PGM Programming
000 – Main Bell Partition Assignment
(001-164)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
001 – PGM Partition
Assignment
PGM Partition
PGM Partition
PGM
Partition
PGM Partition
001: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
014: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
027: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
040: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
Default: Partition 1
on. All others off
002: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
015: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
028: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
041: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
003: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
016: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
029: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
042: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
004: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
017: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
030: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
043: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
005: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
018: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
031: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
044: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
Description on page
31
006: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
019: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
032: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
045: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
007: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
020: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
033: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
046: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
008: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
021: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
034: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
047: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
009: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
022: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
035: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
048: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
010: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
023: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
036: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
049: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
011: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
024: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
037: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
050: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
012: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
025: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
038: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
051: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
013: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
026: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
039: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
052: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N Section 6: Programming Worksheets
64
001 – PGM Partition
PGM Partition
PGM
Partition
PGM Partition
PGM Partition
053: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
081: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
109: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
137: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
Default: Partition 1
on. All others off
054: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
082: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
110: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
138: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
055: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
083: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
111: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
139: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
056: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
084: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
112: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
140: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
057: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
085: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
113: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
141: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
Description on page
31
058: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
086: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
114: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
142: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
059: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
087: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
115: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
143: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
060: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
088: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
116: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
144: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
061: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
089: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
117: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
145: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
062: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
090: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
118: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
146: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
063: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
091: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
119: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
147: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
064: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
092: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
120: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
148: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
065: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
093: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
121: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
149: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
066: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
094: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
122: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
150: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
067: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
095: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
123: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
151: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
068: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
096: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
124: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
152: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
069: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
097: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
125: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
153: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
070: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
098: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
126: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
154: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
071: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
099: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
127: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
155: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
072: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
100: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
128: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
156: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
073: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
101: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
129: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
157: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
074: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
102: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
130: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
158: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
075: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
103: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
131: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
159: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
076: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
104: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
132: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
160: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
077: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
105: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
133: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
161: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
078: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
106: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
134: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
162: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
079: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
107: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
135: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
163: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
080: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
108: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
136: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N
164: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
YN N N N N N N Section 6: Programming Worksheets
65
[008] PGM Timer
Programming
000 – PGM Timers Minutes or Seconds:

Minutes

Seconds
(3-Digit Decimal)
Valid Range: 001-255
Default: 005
001 – PGM 1:
042 – PGM 42:
083 – PGM 83:
124 – PGM 124:
002 – PGM 2:
043 – PGM 43:
084 – PGM 84:
125 – PGM 125:
003 – PGM 3:
044 – PGM 44:
085 – PGM 85:
126 – PGM 126:
004 – PGM 4:
045 – PGM 45:
086 – PGM 86:
127 – PGM 127:
Description on page 31
005 – PGM 5:
0
46 – PGM 46:
087 – PGM 87:
128 – PGM 128:
006 – PGM 6:
047 – PGM 47:
088 – PGM 88:
129 – PGM 129:
007 – PGM 7:
048 – PGM 48:
089 – PGM 89:
130 – PGM 130:
008 – PGM 8:
049 – PGM 49:
090 – PGM 90:
131 – PGM 131:
009 – PGM 9:
050 – PGM 50:
091 – PGM 91:
132 – PGM 132:
010 – PGM 10:
051 – PGM 51:
092 – PGM 92:
133 – PGM 133:
011 – PGM 11:
052 – PGM 52:
093 – PGM 93:
134 – PGM 134:
012 – PGM 12:
053 – PGM 53:
094 – PGM 94:
135 – PGM 135:
013 – PGM 13:
054 – PGM 54:
095 – PGM 95:
136 – PGM 136:
014 – PGM 14:
055 – PGM 55:
096 – PGM 96:
137 – PGM 137:
015 – PGM 15:
056 – PGM 56:
097 – PGM 97:
138 – PGM 138:
016 – PGM 16:
057 – PGM 57:
098 – PGM 98:
139 – PGM 139:
017 – PGM 17:
058 – PGM 58:
099 – PGM 99:
140 – PGM 140:
018 – PGM 18:
059 – PGM 59:
100 – PGM 100:
141 – PGM 141:
019 – PGM 19:
060 – PGM 60:
101 – PGM 101:
142 – PGM 142:
020 – PGM 20:
061 – PGM 61:
102 – PGM 102:
143 – PGM 143:
021 – PGM 21:
062 – PGM 62:
103 – PGM 103:
144 – PGM 144:
022 – PGM 22:
063 – PGM 63:
104 – PGM 104:
145 – PGM 145:
023 – PGM 23:
064 – PGM 64:
105 – PGM 105:
146 – PGM 146:
024 – PGM 24:
065 – PGM 65:
106 – PGM 106:
147 – PGM 147:
025 – PGM 25:
066 – PGM 66:
107 – PGM 107:
148 – PGM 148:
026 – PGM 26:
067 – PGM 67:
108 – PGM 108:
149 – PGM 149:
027 – PGM 27:
068 – PGM 68:
109 – PGM 109:
150 – PGM 150:
028 – PGM 28:
069 – PGM 69:
110 – PGM 110:
151 – PGM 151:
029 – PGM 29:
070 – PGM 70:
111 – PGM 111:
152 – PGM 152:
030 – PGM 30:
071 – PGM 71:
112 – PGM 112:
153 – PGM 153:
031 – PGM 31:
072 – PGM 72:
113 – PGM 113:
154 – PGM 154:
032 – PGM 32:
073 – PGM 73:
114 – PGM 114:
155 – PGM 155:
033 – PGM 33:
074 – PGM 74:
115 – PGM 115:
156 – PGM 156:
034 – PGM 34:
075 – PGM 75:
116 – PGM 116:
157 – PGM 157:
035 – PGM 35:
076 – PGM 76:
117 – PGM 117:
158 – PGM 158:
036 – PGM 36:
077 – PGM 77:
118 – PGM 118:
159 – PGM 159:
037 – PGM 37:
078 – PGM 78:
119 – PGM 119:
160 – PGM 160:
038 – PGM 38:
079 – PGM 79:
120 – PGM 120:
161 – PGM 161:
039 – PGM 39
080 – PGM 80:
121 – PGM 121:
162 – PGM 162:
040 – PGM 40:
081 – PGM 81:
122 – PGM 122:
163 – PGM 163:
041 – PGM 41:
082 – PGM 82:
123 – PGM 123:
164 – PGM 164: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
66
[009] PGM Types
(3-Digit Decimal)
Description on page 31
100 – Null PGM
101 – Burg and Fire Bell Fol-
lower
102 – Delayed Fire/ Burg
103 – Sensor Reset[*][7][2]
104 – 2-Wire Smoke
109 – Courtesy Pulse
111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow
114 – Ready To Arm
115 – System Armed Status
116 – Away Armed Status
117 – Stay Armed Status
120 – Away Armed/no Bypass
Status
121 – Command Output 1
122 – Command Output 2
123 – Command Output 3
124 – Command Output 4
129 – Partition Status Alarm
Memory
132 – Holdup Output
134 – 24Hr Silent
135 – 24Hr Audible Input
146 – TLM and Alarm
147 – Kissoff
148 – Ground Start
149 – Alt. Communicator
155 – System Trouble
156 – Latched System Event
157 – System Tamper
161 – DC Trouble
165 – Prox Used
175 – Bell Status and Pro-
gramming Access
Output
176 – Remote Operation
184 – Open After Alarm
200 – Zone Follower
201 – Follower-Zones 1-8
202 – Follower-Zones 9-16
203 – Follower-Zones 17-24
204 – Follower-Zones 25-32
205 – Follower-Zones 33-40
206 – Follower-Zones 41-48
207 – Follower-Zones 49-56
208 – Follower-Zones 57-64
209 – Follower-Zones 65-72
210 – Follower-Zones 73-80
211 – Follower-Zones 81-88
212 – Follower-Zones 89-96
213 – Follower-Zones 97-104
214 – Follower-Zones 105-112
215 – Follower-Zones 113-120
216 – Follower-Zones 120-128
(3-Digit Decimal)
Valid Range: 001-255
Default: 005
001 – PGM 1:
042 – PGM 42:
083 – PGM 83:
124 – PGM 124:
002 – PGM 2:
043 – PGM 43:
084 – PGM 84:
125 – PGM 125:
003 – PGM 3:
044 – PGM 44:
085 – PGM 85:
126 – PGM 126:
004 – PGM 4:
045 – PGM 45:
086 – PGM 86:
127 – PGM 127:
Description on page 31
005 – PGM 5:
046 – PGM 46:
087 – PGM 87:
128 – PGM 128:
006 – PGM 6:
047 – PGM 47:
088 – PGM 88:
129 – PGM 129:
007 – PGM 7:
048 – PGM 48:
089 – PGM 89:
130 – PGM 130:
008 – PGM 8:
049 – PGM 49:
090 – PGM 90:
131 – PGM 131:
009 – PGM 9:
050 – PGM 50:
091 – PGM 91:
132 – PGM 132:
010 – PGM 10:
051 – PGM 51:
092 – PGM 92:
133 – PGM 133:
011 – PGM 11:
052 – PGM 52:
093 – PGM 93:
134 – PGM 134:
012 – PGM 12:
053 – PGM 53:
094 – PGM 94:
135 – PGM 135:
013 – PGM 13:
054 – PGM 54:
095 – PGM 95:
136 – PGM 136:
014 – PGM 14:
055 – PGM 55:
096 – PGM 96:
137 – PGM 137:
015 – PGM 15:
056 – PGM 56:
097 – PGM 97:
138 – PGM 138:
016 – PGM 16:
057 – PGM 57:
098 – PGM 98:
139 – PGM 139:
017 – PGM 17:
058 – PGM 58:
099 – PGM 99:
140 – PGM 140:
018 – PGM 18:
059 – PGM 59:
100 – PGM 100:
141 – PGM 141:
019 – PGM 19:
060 – PGM 60:
101 – PGM 101:
142 – PGM 142:
020 – PGM 20:
061 – PGM 61:
102 – PGM 102:
143 – PGM 143:
021 – PGM 21:
062 – PGM 62:
103 – PGM 103:
144 – PGM 144:
022 – PGM 22:
063 – PGM 63:
104 – PGM 104:
145 – PGM 145:
023 – PGM 23:
064 – PGM 64:
105 – PGM 105:
146 – PGM 146:
024 – PGM 24:
065 – PGM 65:
106 – PGM 106:
147 – PGM 147:
025 – PGM 25:
066 – PGM 66:
107 – PGM 107:
148 – PGM 148:
026 – PGM 26:
067 – PGM 67:
108 – PGM 108:
149 – PGM 149:
027 – PGM 27:
068 – PGM 68:
109 – PGM 109:
150 – PGM 150:
028 – PGM 28:
069 – PGM 69:
110 – PGM 110:
151 – PGM 151:
029 – PGM 29:
070 – PGM 70:
111 – PGM 111:
152 – PGM 152:
030 – PGM 30:
071 – PGM 71:
112 – PGM 112:
153 – PGM 153:
031 – PGM 31:
072 – PGM 72:
113 – PGM 113:
154 – PGM 154:
032 – PGM 32:
073 – PGM 73:
114 – PGM 114:
155 – PGM 155:
033 – PGM 33:
074 – PGM 74:
115 – PGM 115:
156 – PGM 156:
034 – PGM 34:
075 – PGM 75:
116 – PGM 116:
157 – PGM 157:
035 – PGM 35:
076 – PGM 76:
117 – PGM 117:
158 – PGM 158:
036 – PGM 36:
077 – PGM 77:
118 – PGM 118:
159 – PGM 159:
037 – PGM 37:
078 – PGM 78:
119 – PGM 119:
160 – PGM 160:
038 – PGM 38:
079 – PGM 79:
120 – PGM 120:
161 – PGM 161:
039 – PGM 39
080 – PGM 80:
121 – PGM 121:
162 – PGM 162:
040 – PGM 40:
081 – PGM 81:
122 – PGM 122:
163 – PGM 163:
041 – PGM 41:
082 – PGM 82:
123 – PGM 123:
164 – PGM 164: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
67
[010] PGM Attributes

Partition 1 Mask
000 – Main Bell Mask

01 – Fire Alarm

03 – Burglary Alarm

06 – Bell Squawks
Description on page 33

02 – CO Alarm

04 – Flood Alarm
001-164 PGM Attributes
100 – Null PGM
PGM 1-164:
101 – Fire and Burglary

01 – True Output
102 – Delay Fire and Burg

01 – True Output
103 – Sensor Reset
[*][7][2]

03 – Code Required
109 – Courtesy Pulse

01 – True Output
111
–
Keypad Buzzer
Follow

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Entry Delay

10 – Exit Delay

11 – Door Chime

12 – Keypad Buzzer Zone

13 – Audible Exit Zone

14 – Auto-Arm Pre-Alert
114 – Ready To Arm

01 – True Output
115 – Armed Status

01 – True Output
116 – Armed Away Mode

01 – True Output
117 – Armed Stay Mode

01 – True Output
121
–
Command Output 1

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

03 – Code Required

Schedule 00
122
–
Command Output 2

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

03 – Code Required

Schedule 00
123
–
Command Output 3

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

03 – Code Required

Schedule 00
124
–
Command Output 4

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

03 – Code Required

Schedule 00
129 – Partition Status
Alarm Memory

01 – True Output
132 – Holdup Output

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output
146 – TLM And Alarm

01 – True Output
147 – Kissoff Output

01 – True Output
148 – Ground Start

01 – True Output
149 – Alternate
Communicator

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

04 – Fire Alarm

05 – Panic Alarm

06 – Burglary Alarm

07 – Open/Close

08 – Zone Auto Bypass

09 – Medical Alarm

10 – Burglary Verified

11 – Open After Alarm

12 – Emergency Alarm

13 – Duress Alarm

14 – Holdup Verified
155
–
System Trouble

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

04 – Service Required

05 – Loss of Clock

06 – AC Fail

07 – DC Fail

08 – TLM Trouble

09 – FT

11 – Zone Fault

12 – Zone Tamper

13 – Zone Low Battery

10 – Ethernet
156
–
Latched System
Event

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

04 – Fire Alarm

05 – Panic Alarm

06 – Burglary Alarm

07 – Medical Alarm

08 – Supervisory

09 – Priority Event

10 – Holdup

11 – Duress Alarm

12 – Emergency Alarm

13 – Fire Supervisory

14 – Fire Trouble

15 – CO Alarm
157 – System Tamper

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Module Tamper

10 – Zone Tampers
161 – DC Trouble

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Battery Low

10 – Battery Absent
165 – Prox Used

01 – True Output
175 – Bell Prog Access

01 – True Output
176 – Remote Operation

01 – True Output Section 6: Programming Worksheets
68
[010]
184 – Open After Alarm

01 – True Output

PGM Timer
201 PGM 1 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 1-008

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
202 PGM 2 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 9-16

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
203 PGM 3 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 17-24

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
204 PGM 4 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 25-32

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
205 PGM 5 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 33-40

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
206 PGM 6 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 41-48

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
207 PGM 7 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 49-56

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
208 PGM 8 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 57-64

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
209 PGM 9 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 65-72

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
210 PGM 10 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 73-80

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
211 PGM 11 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 81-88

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
212 PGM 12 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 89-96

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
213 PGM 13 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 97-104

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
214 PGM 14 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 105-112

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
215 PGM 15 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 113-120

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8
216 PGM 16 Zone Fol-
lower
Zones 121-128

01 – True Output

02 – Timed Output

09 – Zone Terminal 1

10 – Zone Terminal 2

11 – Zone Terminal 3

12 – Zone Terminal 4

13 – Zone Terminal 5

14 – Zone Terminal 6

15 – Zone Terminal 7

16 – Zone Terminal 8 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
69
[010] PGM Attribute Assignment:
(3-Digit Decimal)
Valid Range: 001-255
Default: 005
001 – PGM 1:
042 – PGM 42:
083 – PGM 83:
124 – PGM 124:
002 – PGM 2:
043 – PGM 43:
084 – PGM 84:
125 – PGM 125:
003 – PGM 3:
044 – PGM 44:
085 – PGM 85:
126 – PGM 126:
004 – PGM 4:
045 – PGM 45:
086 – PGM 86:
127 – PGM 127:
Description on page 33
005 – PGM 5:
0
46 – PGM 46:
087 – PGM 87:
128 – PGM 128:
006 – PGM 6:
047 – PGM 47:
088 – PGM 88:
129 – PGM 129:
007 – PGM 7:
048 – PGM 48:
089 – PGM 89:
130 – PGM 130:
008 – PGM 8:
049 – PGM 49:
090 – PGM 90:
131 – PGM 131:
009 – PGM 9:
050 – PGM 50:
091 – PGM 91:
132 – PGM 132:
010 – PGM 10:
051 – PGM 51:
092 – PGM 92:
133 – PGM 133:
011 – PGM 11:
052 – PGM 52:
093 – PGM 93:
134 – PGM 134:
012 – PGM 12:
053 – PGM 53:
094 – PGM 94:
135 – PGM 135:
013 – PGM 13:
054 – PGM 54:
095 – PGM 95:
136 – PGM 136:
014 – PGM 14:
055 – PGM 55:
096 – PGM 96:
137 – PGM 137:
015 – PGM 15:
056 – PGM 56:
097 – PGM 97:
138 – PGM 138:
016 – PGM 16:
057 – PGM 57:
098 – PGM 98:
139 – PGM 139:
017 – PGM 17:
058 – PGM 58:
099 – PGM 99:
140 – PGM 140:
018 – PGM 18:
059 – PGM 59:
100 – PGM 100:
141 – PGM 141:
019 – PGM 19:
060 – PGM 60:
101 – PGM 101:
142 – PGM 142:
020 – PGM 20:
061 – PGM 61:
102 – PGM 102:
143 – PGM 143:
021 – PGM 21:
062 – PGM 62:
103 – PGM 103:
144 – PGM 144:
022 – PGM 22:
063 – PGM 63:
104 – PGM 104:
145 – PGM 145:
023 – PGM 23:
064 – PGM 64:
105 – PGM 105:
146 – PGM 146:
024 – PGM 24:
065 – PGM 65:
106 – PGM 106:
147 – PGM 147:
025 – PGM 25:
066 – PGM 66:
107 – PGM 107:
148 – PGM 148:
026 – PGM 26:
067 – PGM 67:
108 – PGM 108:
149 – PGM 149:
027 – PGM 27:
068 – PGM 68:
109 – PGM 109:
150 – PGM 150:
028 – PGM 28:
069 – PGM 69:
110 – PGM 110:
151 – PGM 151:
029 – PGM 29:
070 – PGM 70:
111 – PGM 111:
152 – PGM 152:
030 – PGM 30:
071 – PGM 71:
112 – PGM 112:
153 – PGM 153:
031 – PGM 31:
072 – PGM 72:
113 – PGM 113:
154 – PGM 154:
032 – PGM 32:
073 – PGM 73:
114 – PGM 114:
155 – PGM 155:
033 – PGM 33:
074 – PGM 74:
115 – PGM 115:
156 – PGM 156:
034 – PGM 34:
075 – PGM 75:
116 – PGM 116:
157 – PGM 157:
035 – PGM 35:
076 – PGM 76:
117 – PGM 117:
158 – PGM 158:
036 – PGM 36:
077 – PGM 77:
118 – PGM 118:
159 – PGM 159:
037 – PGM 37:
078 – PGM 78:
119 – PGM 119:
160 – PGM 160:
038 – PGM 38:
079 – PGM 79:
120 – PGM 120:
161 – PGM 161:
039 – PGM 39
080 – PGM 80:
121 – PGM 121:
162 – PGM 162:
040 – PGM 40:
081 – PGM 81:
122 – PGM 122:
163 – PGM 163:
041 – PGM 41:
082 – PGM 82:
123 – PGM 123:
164 – PGM 164: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
70
[011] PGM Config. Options
(4-Digit Decimal) Valid Range: 000-028
Description on page 37
PGM
Zone Follower by Zone
(000-128; Default 000)
Prox. Used
(000-095; Default 000)
Command Output
(000-004; Default 000)
Alarm Panel
001
PGM 1
002
PGM 2
003
PGM 3
004
PGM 4
HSM2204 #1 005
PGM 5
006
PGM 6
007
PGM 7
008
PGM 8
HSM2204 #2 009
PGM 9
010
PGM 10
011
PGM 11
012
PGM 12
HSM2204 #3 013
PGM 13
014
PGM 14
015
PGM 15
016
PGM 16
HSM2204 #4 017
PGM 17
018
PGM 18
019
PGM 19
020
PGM 20
HSM2208 #1 037
PGM 37
038
PGM 38
039
PGM 39
040
PGM 40
041
PGM 41
042
PGM 42
043
PGM 43
044
PGM 44
HSM2208 #2 045
PGM 45
046
PGM 46
047
PGM 47
048
PGM 48
049
PGM 49
050
PGM 50
051
PGM 51
052
PGM 52 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
71
PGM
Zone Follower by Zone
(001-128; Default 000)
Prox. Used
(000-095; Default 000)
Command Output
(001-004; Default 000)
HSM2208 #3 053
PGM 53
054
PGM 54
055
PGM 55
056
PGM 56
057
PGM 57
058
PGM 58
059
PGM 59
060
PGM 60
HSM2208 #4 061
PGM 61
062
PGM 62
063
PGM 63
064
PGM 64
065
PGM 65
066
PGM 66
067
PGM 67
068
PGM 68
HSM2208 #5 069
PGM 69
070
PGM 70
071
PGM 71
072
PGM 72
073
PGM 73
074
PGM 74
075
PGM 75
076
PGM 76
HSM2208 #6 077
PGM 77
078
PGM 78
079
PGM 79
080
PGM 80
081
PGM 81
082
PGM 82
083
PGM 83
084
PGM 84
HSM2208 #7 085
PGM 85
086
PGM 86
087
PGM 87
088
PGM 88
089
PGM 89
090
PGM 90
091
PGM 91
092
PGM 92
HSM2208 #8 093
PGM 93
094
PGM 94
095
PGM 95
096
PGM 96
097
PGM 97
098
PGM 98
099
PGM 99
100
PGM 100
HSM2208 #9 101
PGM 101
102
PGM 102
103
PGM 103
104
PGM 104
105
PGM 105
106
PGM 106
107
PGM 107
108
PGM 108 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
72
PGM
Zone Follower by Zone
(001-128; Default 000)
Prox. Used
(000-095; Default 000)
Command Output
(001-004; Default 000)
HSM2208
#10
109
PGM 109
110
PGM 110
111
PGM 111
112
PGM 112
113
PGM 113
114
PGM 114
115
PGM 115
116
PGM 116
HSM2208
#11
117
PGM 117
118
PGM 118
119
PGM 119
120
PGM 120
121
PGM 121
122
PGM 122
123
PGM 123
124
PGM 124
HSM2208
#12
125
PGM 125
126
PGM 126
127
PGM 127
128
PGM 128
129
PGM 129
130
PGM 130
131
PGM 131
132
PGM 132
HSM2208
#13
133
PGM 133
134
PGM 134
135
PGM 135
136
PGM 136
137
PGM 137
138
PGM 138
139
PGM 139
140
PGM 140
HSM2208
#14
141
PGM 141
142
PGM 142
143
PGM 143
144
PGM 144
145
PGM 145
146
PGM 146
147
PGM 147
148
PGM 148
HSM2208
#15
149
PGM 149
150
PGM 150
151
PGM 151
152
PGM 152
153
PGM 153
154
PGM 154
155
PGM 155
156
PGM 156
HSM2208
#16
157
PGM 157
158
PGM 158
159
PGM 159
160
PGM 160
161
PGM 161
162
PGM 162
163
PGM 163
164
PGM 164 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
73
System Lockout
System Options
[012] System Lockout
(3-Digit Decimal)
Keypad Lockout:
(Range: 000-255; Default 000)
Keypad Lockout Duration: (Range: 001-255; Default 000)
Description on page 37
Remote Lockout:
(Range: 003-255; Default 006)
Remote Lockout Duration: (Range: 001-255; Default 060)
[013] System Options 1
Description on page 37

1 – NC Loop/EOL

2 – DEOL/SEOL

3 – Show All Troubles When Armed

4 – Tamper/Faults Do
Not Show As Open

5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6]

6 – Audible Exit Fault

7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger

8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling
[014] System Options 2
Description on pg 38

1 – Bell Squawk

2 – Bell Duration Auto-Arm

3 – Bell Squawk on Exit

4 – Bell Squawk on Entry

5 – Bell Squawk on Trouble

6 – Not Used

7 – Exit Delay Termination

8 – Fire Bell Continues
[015] System Options 3
Description on page 38

1 – [F] Key

2 – [P] Key Annunciation

3 – Quick Exit

4 – Quick Arming/Function Key

5 – Not Used

6 – Master Code Not User Changeable

7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enable

8 – TLM Audible When Armed
[016] System Options 4
Description on pg 38

1 – AC Trouble Display

2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes

3 – Keypad Blanking

4 – Keypad Blanking Requires
Code

5 – Keypad Backlighting

6 – Power Save Mode

7 – Bypass Display When Armed

8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled
[017] System Options 5
Description on page 39

1 – Chime on Opening

2 – Chime on Closing

3 – Not Used

4 – Multi-Hit

5 – Late to Close

6 – Daylight Savings Time

7 – Not Used

8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/Disarm
[018] System Options 6
Description on pg 39

1 – Test Transmission Exception

2 – Real-Time Bypass Reporting

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – Keypad Buzzer Alarm

6 – Not Used

7 – Exit Delay Restart

8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps
[019] System Options 7
Description on page 40

1 – Not Used

2 – Latching Troubles

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – Audible Bus Fault

6 – Duress Code

7 – Temperature in Celsius

8 – Not Used
[020] System Options 8
Description on pg 40

1 – Not Used

2 – Not Used

3 – [*][8] Access While Armed

4 – Not Used

5 – Not Used

6 – Not Used

7 – Not Used

8 – Not Used
[021] System Options 9
Description on page 40

1 – Not Used

2 – Not Used

3 – Auto-Arming Bypass

4 – Not Used

5 – Not Used

6 – Not Used

7 – Not Used

8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arm
[022] System Options 10
Description on pg 40

1 – [F] Key Option

2 – Not Used

3 – Not Used

4 – Transmission Counter in
Hours

5 – Away to Stay Toggle

6 – Not Used

7 – Trouble Beeps Are Silent

8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away
Mode
[023] System Options 11
Description on page 40

1 – Ready LED Flash for Force Arm

2 – Not Used

3 – Not Used

4 – Access Code Required for [*][1]

5 – Access Code Required for [*][2]

6 – Access Code Required for [*][3]

7 – Access Code Required for [*][4]

8 – [*][6] Acce
ssibility Option
[024] System Options 12
Description on pg 41

1– 50Hz AC / 60 Hz AC

2 – Crystal Timebase

3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming

4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming

5 – Real Time Clock Option

6 – Not Used

7 – Not Used

8 – DLS Disconnect
[025] System Options 13
Description on page 41

1 – European Dial

2 – Force Dial

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – ID Tone

6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz

7 – 1 Hour DLS Window

8 – FTC Audible Bell
[040] User Authentication
Description on page 42

1 – User Code or Prox. Tag

2 – User Code and Prox. Tag Section 6: Programming Worksheets
74
[041] Access Code Digits
Description on page 42

00 – 4-Digit Access Codes

01 – 6-Digit Access Codes
[042] Event Verification
Description on page 42
01 – Burglary Verified Counter (Default:
002):
03 – Burglary Verification Selection:
001 – Police Code (Default)
002 – Cross Zoning
[151] Partition 1 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 1 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Description on page 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 1 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 1 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 1 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 1 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 1 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 1 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[152] Partition 2 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 2 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 2 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 2 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 2 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 2 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 2 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 2 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[153] Partition 3 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 3 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on page 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
75
002 – Partition 3 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 3 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 3 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 3 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 3 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 3 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[154] Partition 4 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 4 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 4 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
003 – Partition 4 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 4 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 4 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 4 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 4 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[155] Partition 5 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 5 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 5 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 5 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 5 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 5 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000): Section 6: Programming Worksheets
76
006 – Partition 5 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 5 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[156] Partition 6 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 6 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 6 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 6 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 6 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 6 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 6 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 6 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[157] Partition 7 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 7 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
002 – Partition 7 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 7 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 7 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 7 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 7 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 7 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[158] Partition 8 Auto-Arm/
Disarm
001 – Partition 8 Au
to-Arming Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Descriptions on 42
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
77
002 – Partition 8 Auto-Disarm Times:
(4-digit HH:MM)
Default: 9999
24-Hour:
Sunday:
Thursday:
Monday:
Friday:
Tuesday:
Saturday:
Wednesday:
003 – Partition 8 Auto
-Disarming Holiday
Schedule:
Holiday 1:

On

Off
Holiday 2:

On

Off
Holiday 3:

On

Off
Holiday 4:

On

Off
(3-digit decimal)
004 – Partition 8 Au
to-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):
(000-255 minutes)
005 – Partition 8 Auto-Arming Po
stpone Timer (Default: 000):
006 – Partition 8 No Activity
Arming Timer (Default: 000):
007 – Partition 8 No Ac
tivity Arming Pre-Aler
t Timer (Default: 001):
[200] Partition Mask
001 – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask

– Partition 1

– Partition 2
Descriptions on 42

– Partition 3

– Partition 4

– Partition 5

– Partition 6

– Partition 7

– Partition 8
[201]-[208] Partition Zone Assignment
(Description on page 43)
[201] Partition 1 Zone Assignment
[202] Partition 2 Zone Assignme
nt
[203] Partition 3 Zone Assignment
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
001 – 01-08

001 – 01-08

001 – 01-08

002 – 09-16

002 – 09-16

002 – 09-16

003 – 17-24

003 – 17-24

003 – 17-24

004 – 25-32

004 – 25-32

004 – 25-32

005 – 33-40

005 – 33-40

005 – 33-40

006 – 41-48

006 – 41-48

006 – 41-48

007 – 49-56

007 – 49-56

007 – 49-56

008 – 57-64

008 – 57-64

008 – 57-64

009 – 65-72

009 – 65-72

009 – 65-72

010 – 73-80

010 – 73-80

010 – 73-80

011 – 81-88

011 – 81-88

011 – 81-88

012 – 89-96

012 – 89-96

012 – 89-96

013 – 97-104

013 – 97-104

013 – 97-104

014 – 105-112

014 – 105-112

014 – 105-112

015 – 113-120

015 – 113-120

015 – 113-120

016 – 121-128

016 – 121-128

016 – 121-128
 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
78
[204] Partition 4 Zone Assignment
[205] Partition 5 Zone Assignment
[206] Partition 6 Zone Assignment
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
001 – 01-08

001 – 01-08

001 – 01-08

002 – 09-16

002 – 09-16

002 – 09-16

003 – 17-24

003 – 17-24

003 – 17-24

004 – 25-32

004 – 25-32

004 – 25-32

005 – 33-40

005 – 33-40

005 – 33-40

006 – 41-48

006 – 41-48

006 – 41-48

007 – 49-56

007 – 49-56

007 – 49-56

008 – 57-64

008 – 57-64

008 – 57-64

009 – 65-72

009 – 65-72

009 – 65-72

010 – 73-80

010 – 73-80

010 – 73-80

011 – 81-88

011 – 81-88

011 – 81-88

012 – 89-96

012 – 89-96

012 – 89-96

013 – 97-104

013 – 97-104

013 – 97-104

014 – 105-112

014 – 105-112

014 – 105-112

015 – 113-120

015 – 113-120

015 – 113-120

016 – 121-128

016 – 121-128

016 – 121-128

[207] Partition 7 Zone Assignment
[208] Partition 8 Zone Assignment
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
001 – 01-08

001 – 01-08

002 – 09-16

002 – 09-16

003 – 17-24

003 – 17-24

004 – 25-32

004 – 25-32

005 – 33-40

005 – 33-40

006 – 41-48

006 – 41-48

007 – 49-56

007 – 49-56

008 – 57-64

008 – 57-64

009 – 65-72

009 – 65-72

010 – 73-80

010 – 73-80

011 – 81-88

011 – 81-88

012 – 89-96

012 – 89-96

013 – 97-104

013 – 97-104

014 – 105-112

014 – 105-112

015 – 113-120

015 – 113-120

016 – 121-128

016 – 121-128
 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
79
[300] Panel/Receiver Communications Path
Description on page 43
001 – Receiver 1:

PSTN-Phone Line

Alt Comm Auto Routing

Alt Comm Rec 1

Alt Comm Rec 2

Alt Comm Rec 3

Alt Comm Rec 4
002 – Receiver 2:

PSTN-Phone Line

Alt Comm Auto Routing

Alt Comm Rec 1

Alt Comm Rec 2

Alt Comm Rec 3

Alt Comm Rec 4
003 – Receiver 3:

PSTN-Phone Line

Alt Comm Auto Routing

Alt Comm Rec 1

Alt Comm Rec 2

Alt Comm Rec 3

Alt Comm Rec 4
004 – Receiver 4:

PSTN-Phone Line

Alt Comm Auto Routing

Alt Comm Rec 1

Alt Comm Rec 2

Alt Comm Rec 3

Alt Comm Rec 4
[301] Phone Number Programming
(Default: DFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF)
(32-Digit HEX)
001 – Phone Number 1 Programming:
Description on page 43
002 – Phone Number 2 Programming:
003 – Phone Number 3 Programming:
004 – Phone Number 4 Programming:
[304] Call Waiting Cancel String
(Description on page 43)
Call Waiting Cancel String (6-digit Hex; Default: DB70EF): Section 6: Programming Worksheets
80
[307] Zone Reporting
Description on page 43 (001-128 = zones 1-128)

1 – Alarm

2 – Alarm Restore

3 – Tamper

4 – Tamper Restore

5 – Fault

6 – Fault Restore
001
















1 2345678
002
















1 2345678
003
















12345678
004
















12345678
005
















1 2345678
006
















1 2345678
007
















1 2345678
008
















12345678
009
















12345678
010
















1 2345678
011
















1 2345678
012
















1 2345678
013
















12345678
014
















12345678
015
















1 2345678
016
















1 2345678
017
















1 2345678
018
















12345678
019
















12345678
020
















1 2345678
021
















1 2345678
022
















1 2345678
023
















12345678
024
















12345678
025
















1 2345678
026
















1 2345678
027
















1 2345678
028
















12345678
029
















12345678
030
















1 2345678
031
















1 2345678
032
















1 2345678
033
















12345678
034
















12345678
035
















1 2345678
036
















1 2345678
037
















1 2345678
038
















12345678
039
















12345678
040
















1 2345678
041
















1 2345678
042
















1 2345678
043
















12345678
044
















12345678
045
















1 2345678
046
















1 2345678
047
















1 2345678
048
















12345678
049
















12345678
050
















1 2345678
051
















1 2345678
052
















1 2345678
053
















12345678
054
















12345678
055
















1 2345678
056
















1 2345678
057
















1 2345678
058
















12345678
059
















12345678
060
















1 2345678
061
















1 2345678
062
















1 2345678
063
















12345678
064
















12345678
065
















1 2345678
066
















1 2345678
067
















1 2345678
068
















12345678
069
















12345678
070
















1 2345678
071
















1 2345678
072
















1 2345678
073
















12345678
074
















12345678
075
















1 2345678
076
















1 2345678
077
















1 2345678
078
















12345678
079
















12345678
080
















1 2345678
081
















1 2345678
082
















1 2345678
083
















12345678
084
















12345678
085
















1 2345678
086
















1 2345678
087
















1 2345678
088
















12345678
089
















12345678
090
















1 2345678
091
















1 2345678
092
















1 2345678
093
















12345678
094
















12345678
095
















1 2345678
096
















1 2345678
097
















1 2345678
098
















12345678
099
















12345678
100
















1 2345678
101
















1 2345678
102
















1 2345678
103
















12345678
104
















12345678
105
















1 2345678
106
















1 2345678
107
















1 2345678
108
















12345678
109
















12345678
110
















1 2345678
111
















1 2345678
112
















1 2345678
113
















12345678
114
















12345678
115
















1 2345678
116
















1 2345678
117
















1 2345678
118
















12345678
119
















12345678
120
















1 2345678
121
















1 2345678
122
















1 2345678
123
















12345678
124
















12345678
125
















1 2345678
126
















1 2345678
127
















1 2345678
128
















12345678 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
81
[308] Event Reporting
Description on page 43
001 – Miscellaneous
Alarm 1

1 – Duress Alarm

2 – Opening After Alarm

3 – Recent Closing Alarm

4 – Zone Expander Supervisory Alarm

5 – Zone Expander Supervisory Alarm Restore

6 – Burglary Verified

7 – Burglary Not Verified Alarm

8 – Alarm Cancel
002 – Miscellaneous
Alarm 2

1 – Holdup Verified Alarm
011 – Priority Alarms 1

1 – Keypad Fire Alarm-F Key

2 – Keypad Fire Restore

3 – Keypad Medical Alarm-M Key

4 – Keypad Medical Restore

5 – Keypad Panic Alarm-P Key Alarm

6 – Keypad Panic Restore

7 – Auxiliary Input Alarm

8 – Auxiliary Input Alarm Restore
021 – Fire Alarms 1

3 – PGM 2 2-Wire Alarm

4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Alarm Restore
101 – Tamper Events

3 – Module Tamper

4 – Module Tamper Restore

5 – Keypad Lockout

7 – Remote Lockout
201 – Open/Close
Events 1

1 – User Closing

2 – User Opening

5 – Special Closing

6 – Special Opening
202 – Open/Close Events 2

1 – Automatic Closing

3 – Auto Arm Cancellation/Postpone
211 – Miscellaneous
Open/Close Events

1 – Late to Close

2 – Late to Open

5 – Exit Fault
221 – Bypass Events

1 – Automatic Zone Bypass

2 – Automatic Zone Unbypass

3 – Partial Closing
301 – Panel Events 1

1 – Panel AC Fail Trouble

2 – Panel AC Fail Restore

3 – Panel Low Battery Trouble

4 – Panel Low Battery Trouble
Restore

5 – Panel Battery Absent Trouble

6 – Panel Battery Absent Trouble
Restore
302 – Panel Events 2

1 – Bell Circuit Trouble

2 – Bell Circuit Trouble Restore

3 – Telephone Line Trouble

4 – Telephone Line Trouble Restore

5 – Auxiliary Trouble

6 – Auxiliary Trouble Restore
305 – Panel Events 5

3 – PGM 2 2-Wire Trouble

4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Trouble Restore
311 – Maintenance Events 1

1 – RF Jam Trouble

2 – RF Jam Trouble Restore

3 – Fire Trouble

4 – Fire Trouble Restore

5 – Cold Start

6 – Delinquency
312 – Maintenance
Events 2

1 – Installer Lead IN

2 – Installer Lead OUT

3 – DLS Lead IN

4 – DLS Lead OUT

5 – SA Lead IN

6 – SA Lead OUT

7 – Event Buffer 75% Full
313 – Maintenance Events 3

1 – Firmware Update Begin

2 – Firmware Update Successful

3 – Firmware Update Fail
314 – Maintenance
Events 4

1 – Gas Trouble

2 – Gas Trouble Restore

3 – Heat Trouble

4 – Heat Trouble Restore

5 – Freeze Trouble

6 – Freeze Trouble Restore

7 – Probe Disconnected Trouble

8 – Probe Disconnected Restore
321 – Receiver Events

2 – Receiver 1 FTC Restore

4 – Receiver 2 FTC Restore

6 – Receiver 3 FTC Restore

8 – Receiver 4 FTC Restore
331 – Module
Events 1

1 – Module AC Trouble

2 – Module AC Trouble Restore

3 – Module Battery Trouble

4 – Module Battery Trouble Restore

5 – Module Battery Absent

6 – Module Battery Absent Restore
332 – Module Events 2

1 – Module Low Voltage Trouble

2 – Module Low Voltage Restore

3 – Module Supervisory

4 – Module Supervisory Restore

5 – Module Aux Trouble

6 – Module Aux Trouble Restore
335 – Module
Events 5

1 – Output 1 Fault

2 – Output 1 Fault Restore Section 6: Programming Worksheets
82
Communications
351 – Alternate
Communicator 1

1 – Alt. Comm. Module Comm Fault

2 – Alt. Comm. Module Comm Fault Restore

7 – Alt. Comm. Radio/SIM Failure

8 – Alt. Comm. Radio/SIM Failure Restore
352 – Alternate
Communicator 2

1 – Alt. Comm. Network Fault

2 – Alt. Comm. Network Fault
Restore

3 – Alt. Comm. Low Signal Trouble

4 – Alt. Comm. Low Signal Trouble
Restore

5 – Alt. Comm. Ethernet Trouble

6 – Alt. Comm. Ethernet Trouble
Restore

7 – Alt. Comm. Lockout Trouble

8 – Alt. Comm. Lockout Trouble
Restore
354 – Alternate
Communicator 4

1 – Alt. Comm Receiver 1 Trouble

2 – Alt. Comm Receiver 1 Restore

3 – Alt. Comm Receiver 2 Trouble

4 – Alt. Comm Receiver 2 Restore

5 – Alt. Comm Receiver 3 Trouble

6 – Alt. Comm Receiver 3 Restore

7 – Alt. Comm Receiver 4 Trouble

8 – Alt. Comm Receiver 4 Restore
355 – Alternate
Communicator 5

1 – Alt. Comm Receiver 1
Supervision Failure

2 – Alt. Comm Receiver 1
Supervision Restore

3 – Alt. Comm Receiver 2
Supervision Failure

4 – Alt. Comm Receiver 2
Supervision Restore

5 – Alt. Comm Receiver 3
Supervision Failure

6 – Alt. Comm Receiver 3
Supervision Restore

7 – Alt. Comm Receiver 4
Supervision Failure

8 – Alt. Comm Receiver 4 Supervi-
sion Restore
361 – Wireless Device
Events

1 – Device AC Fail

2 – Device AC Restore

3 – Device Low Battery

4 – Device Low Battery Restore

5 – Device Fault

6 – Device Fault Restore
401 – System Test
Events

1 – Walk Test Start

2 – Walk Test End

3 – Periodic Test Transmission

4 – Periodic Test Transmission with
Trouble

5 – System Test
[309] System Call Direction
001 – Maintenance Events:

Receiver #1

Receiver #2
Description on page 47

Receiver #3

Receiver #4
002 – Test Transmission Events:

Receiver #1

Receiver #2

Receiver #3

Receiver #4
[310] Account Codes
000 – System Account Code
(6-digit Hex; Default: FFFFFF):
(4-Digit HEX;
Default FFFF)
001 – Partition 1 Account Code:
002 – Partition 2 Account Code:
Description on page 47
003
– Partition 3 Account Code:
004 – Partition 4 Account Code:
005 – Partition 5 Account Code:
006 – Partition 6 Account Code:
007 – Partition 7 Account Code:
008 – Partition 8 Account Code:
[311] Partition 1 Call Directions
001 – Partition 1 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3
Description on page 47

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 1 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 1 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
83
[312] Partition 2 Call Directions
001 – Partition 2 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 2 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 2 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[313] Partition 3 Call Directions
001 – Partition 3 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 3 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 3 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[314] Partition 4 Call Directions
001 – Partition 4 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 4 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 4 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[315] Partition 5 Call Directions
001 – Partition 5 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 5 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 5 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[316] Partition 6 Call Directions
001 – Partition 6 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 6 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 6 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[317] Partition 7 Call Directions
001 – Partition 7 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 7 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 7 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
[318] Partition 8 Call Directions
001 – Partition 8 Alarm/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
002 – Partition 8 Tamper/ Restore:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4
003 – Partition 8 Op
ening/ Closing:

Receiver #1

Receiver #3

Receiver #2

Receiver #4 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
84
[350] Communicator Formats
Description on page 47
(2-Digit decimal)
001 – Receiver 1:
003 – Receiver 3:
Range: 03= Contact ID,
002 – Receiver 2:
004 – Receiver 4:
04= SIA (Default)
[377] Communication Variables
(3-digit decimal)
Range: 000-255 attempts
unless otherwise noted
Description on page 47
001 – Swinger Shutdown Attempts:
Default: 003
Alarms and Restore (000-014):
Tampers and Restore:
Maintenance and Restore:
002 – Communication Delays:
Zone Delay (Default: 000):
AC Failure Communication Delay
(Default:030 minutes/Hours):
TLM Trouble Delay (Default:010 seconds x 3):
Wireless Zone Low Bat. Transm
ission Delay (Default: 007 days):
Delinquency Transmission De
lay (Default: 030 days/hours):
Communications Cancel Windo
w (Default: 000 minutes):
003 – Periodic Test Transmission
Cycle (Default: 030 hours/days):
004 – Periodic Test Transmission Time of Day (Default: 9999):
011 – Maximum Dialing Attempts: (Default: 005):
012 – Delay Between PSTN Attempts: (Default: 003 seconds):
013 – Delay Between Force Atte
mpts: (Default: 020 seconds):
014 – Post Dial Wait for Handshake: (Ran
ge: 001-255; Default: 040 Seconds; UL=45):
015 – IP/GS Wait for Ack: (Range
: 001-255; Defa
ult: 060 seconds):
016 – IP/Cellular Fault Check Timer:
(Range: 003-255;
Default: 010):
[380] Communicator Option 1
1 –

Communications Enabled
2 –

Restore on Bell Time-out
Description on page 48
3 –

Pulse Dialing
4 –

Pulse Dial after 5th Attempt
5 –

Parallel Communications
6 –

Alternate Dial
7 –

Reduced Dialing Attempts
8 –

Activity Delinquency
[381] Communicator Option 2
1 –

Keypad Ringback
Description on page 49
2 –

Bell Ringback
4 –

Closing Confirmation
8 –

Communications
Priority Options
[382] Communicator Option 3
1 –

Test Transmission Receiver
2 –

Walk Test Communication
Description on page 49
4 –

Call Waiting Cancel
5 –

Alternate Communicator Enable/Disable
6 –

AC Failure Communication Delay in Hours
[383] Communicator Option 4
1 –

Phone Number Account Code
2 –

6-Digit Account Code
Description on page 50
5 –

Communicate FTC Events
[384] Communicator Backup Options
2 –

Backup Options
- Receiver 2
Description on page 50
3 –

Backup Options - Receiver 3
4 –

Backup Options - Receiver 4 Section 6: Programming Worksheets
85
DLS Programming
Schedule Programming
[401] DLS/SA Options
1 –

Double Call
4 –

User Call up
Description on page 50
2 –

User Enables DLS
6 –

Panel Call up and Baud Rate
3 –

DLS Callback
7 –

Alt. Comm. DLS
[402]
PSTN DLS Phone Number Programming (31-digit phone number):
Description on page 50
[403]
DLS Access Code (6-digit hex;
000000-FFFFFF; De
fault: 212800):
Description on page 51
[404]
DLS/SA Panel ID (10-digit hex; 00
00000000-FFFFFFFFFF; Defa
ult 2128000000):
Description on page 51
[405]
PSTN Double Call Timer (3-decimal; 000-255; Default: 060):
Description on page 51
[406]
PSTN Number of Rings to Answer On (3-decimal; 000-255; Default 000):
Description on page 51
[407]
SA Access Code (6-digit hex;
000000-FFFFFF; Default: FFFFFF):
Description on page 51
[410] Automatic DLS Options
001 – Auto DLS Options
1 –

Periodic DLS
Description on page 51
3 –

DLS / Event Buffer 75% Full
5 –

SA on Event Buffer 75% Full
002 – Periodic DLS Days (3-digit d
ecimal; 000-255; Default: 000 days):
003 – Periodic DLS Time (4-digit deci
mal; HH:MM; 0000-2359;
Default: 0000):
007 – Delay Call Window
1 –

Delay Call Window Start
(4-digit decimal; 0000-2359; HH:MM
Default: 0000)
2 –

Delay Call Window End
[601] Programming Schedule 1
Interval 1
101 – Start Time:
102 – End Time:
103 – Days Assignment:
104 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 2
201 – Start Time:
202 – End Time:
203 – Days Assignment:
204 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday Section 6: Programming Worksheets
86
Interval 3
301 – Start Time:
302 – End Time:
303 – Days Assignment:
304 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 4
401 – Start Time:
402 – End Time:
403 – Days Assignment:
404 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
[602] Programming Schedule 2
Interval 1
101 – Start Time:
102 – End Time:
103 – Days Assignment:
104 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 2
201 – Start Time:
202 – End Time:
203 – Days Assignment:
204 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 3
301 – Start Time:
302 – End Time:
303 – Days Assignment:
304 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 4
401 – Start Time:
402 – End Time:
403 – Days Assignment:
404 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday Section 6: Programming Worksheets
87
[603] Programming Schedule 3
Interval 1
101 – Start Time:
102 – End Time:
103 – Days Assignment:
104 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 2
201 – Start Time:
202 – End Time:
203 – Days Assignment:
204 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 3
301 – Start Time:
302 – End Time:
303 – Days Assignment:
304 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 4
401 – Start Time:
402 – End Time:
403 – Days Assignment:
404 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
[604] Programming Schedule 4
Interval 1
101 – Start Time:
102 – End Time:
103 – Days Assignment:
104 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday Section 6: Programming Worksheets
88
Interval 2
201 – Start Time:
202 – End Time:
203 – Days Assignment:
204 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 3
301 – Start Time:
302 – End Time:
303 – Days Assignment:
304 – Holiday Assignment:
Description on page 52
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
Interval 4
401 – Start Time:
402 – End Time:
403 – Days Assignment:
404 – Holiday Assignment:
(8- digit decimal)
01 –

Sunday
09 –

Holiday 1
HH:MM to HH:MM
02 –

Monday
10 –

Holiday 2
Default: 0000
03 –

Tuesday
11 –

Holiday 3
04 –

Wednesday
12 –

Holiday 4
05 –

Thursday
06 –

Friday
07 –

Saturday
[711] Holiday Group 1
(6-Digit Decimal)
001 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 1:
MMDDYY
002 – Holiday Group 1 Date 2:
Default: 000000
003 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 3:
004 – Holiday Group 1 Date 4:
005 – Holiday Group 1 Date 5:
Description on page 52
006 – Holiday Group 1 Date 6:
007 – Holiday Group 1 Date 7:
008 – Holiday Group 1 Date 8:
009-099 – Holiday Group 1 Date 9-99:
[712] Holiday Group 2
(6-Digit Decimal)
001 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 1:
MMDDYY
002 – Holiday Group 1 Date 2:
Default: 000000
003 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 3:
004 – Holiday Group 1 Date 4:
005 – Holiday Group 1 Date 5:
Description on page 52
006 – Holiday Group 1 Date 6:
007 – Holiday Group 1 Date 7:
008 – Holiday Group 1 Date 8:
009-099 – Holiday Group 1 Date 9-99: Section 6: Programming Worksheets
89
Wireless Programming
[713] Holiday Group 3
(6-Digit Decimal)
001 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 1:
MMDDYY
002 – Holiday Group 1 Date 2:
Default: 000000
003 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 3:
004 – Holiday Group 1 Date 4:
Description on page 52
005 – Holiday Group 1 Date 5:
006 – Holiday Group 1 Date 6:
007 – Holiday Group 1 Date 7:
008 – Holiday Group 1 Date 8:
009-099 – Holiday Group 1 Date 9-99:
[714] Holiday Group 4
(6-Digit Decimal)
001 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 1:
MMDDYY
002 – Holiday Group 1 Date 2:
Default: 000000
003 – Ho
liday Group 1 Date 3:
004 – Holiday Group 1 Date 4:
005 – Holiday Group 1 Date 5:
Description on page 52
006 – Holiday Group 1 Date 6:
007 – Holiday Group 1 Date 7:
008 – Holiday Group 1 Date 8:
009-099 – Holiday Group 1 Date 9-99:
[804] Wireless Programming
See the HSM2HOSTx installation manual and wireless
device installation sheets
for detailed information.
000 – WLS Device Enrollment
Zones: (Selection) Zone #:
(Selection) Zone Definition:
(2-digit decimal) Partition Assignment:
(14 x 2) Zone Label:
This section is an overview
of wireless device
programming. See the
associated device
installation sheets and the
HSM2HOST/RFK keypad
installation instructions for
detailed worksheets
WLS Keys (Selection) WLS Key #:
(2-digit decimal) Partition Assignment:
(Selection) Select User:
(14 x 1) WLS Key Label:
Sirens (Selection) Siren #:
(2-digit decimal) Partition Assignment:
(14 x 1) Siren Label:
Keypads (2-digit decimal) Keypad #:
(2-digit decimal) Partition Assignment:
(14 x 1) Keypad Label:
Repeaters (Selection) Repeater #:
(14 x 1) Repeater Label:
001- 128 Configure Wireless Zones 1 to 128
551-556 Configure Wireless Sirens 1-16
601-632 Configure Wireless Keys 1-32
701-716 Configure Wireless Keypads
801-810 Wireless Options
841 Visual Verification Programming
901-905 Delete Wireless Devices
921-925 Replace Wireless Devices
990 Show All Devices
999 Reset Devices to Factory Default
[850] Cellular Signal Strength
(Description on page 52)
[851] Alternate Communicator Programming
Refer to the installation instru
ctions provided with the alte
rnate communicator for details.
[860] Display Keypad Slot Number (
Description on page 52) Section 6: Programming Worksheets
90
[861]-[876] Keypad Programming
Refer to the installation instructions
provided with the keypad for details.
000 – Keypad Partition Mask
00 – Global
01 –

Partition 1
05 –

Partition 5
02 –

Partition 2
06 –

Partition 6
03 –

Partition 3
07 –

Partition 7
04 –

Partition 4
08 –

Partition 8
001 – Function Key 1 (Default: 03):
002 – Function Key 2 (Default: 04):
003 – Function Key 3 (Default: 06):
004 – Function Key 4 (Default: 22):
005 – Function Key 5 (Default: 16):
Function Key Programming Options:
00 - Null Key
02 - Instant Stay Arm
03 – Stay Arm
04 - Away Arm
05 - [*][9]No Entry Arm
06 - Chime On/Off
07 - System Test
09 - Night Arm
12 - Global Stay Arm
13 - Global Away Arm
14 - Global Disarming
16 - Quick Exit
17 - Arm Interior
21 - Command Output 1
22 - Command Output 2
23 - Command Output 3
24 - Command Output 4
29 - Bypass Group Recall
31 - Local PGM Active
32 - Bypass Mode
33 - Bypass Recall
34 - User Programming
35 - User Functions
37 - Time/Date Programming
39 - Trouble Display
40 - Alarm Memory
51 - [M] Key Alarm
52 - [P] Key Alarm
61 - Partition Select 1
62 - Partition Select 2
63 - Partition Select 3
64 - Partition Select 4
65 - Partition Select 5
66 - Partition Select 6
67 - Partition Select 7
68 - Partition Select 8
011 – Keypad I/O (Zone number or outpu
t number; 3-digit decimal; Default: 000):
012 – Local PGM Output Timer
Pulse Time Minutes (Default: 00 minutes)
Pulse Time Seconds (Default: 05 seconds)
021 – Keypad Option 1
1 –

[F] Key Enabled
2-digit decimal
2 –

[M] Key Enabled
3 –

[P] Key Enabled
4 –

Display Code or X’s
022 – Keypad Option 2
1 –

Local Clock Display
2 –

Local Clock 24-Hour
3 –

Auto Alarm Scroll
5 –

Power LED
6 –

Power LED AC Present
7 –

Alarms Displayed While Armed
8 –

Auto Scroll Open Zones
023 – Keypad Option 3
1 –

Armed LED Power Save
2 –

Keypad Status Shows Arm Mode
3 –

5th Terminal is PGM Output/Zone Input
7 –

Local Display of Temperature
8 –

Low Temperature Warning
030 – LCD Message:
031 – Downloaded LCD Message Duration (3
-digit decimal; 000-
255; Default: 000):
041 – Indoor Temperature Zone Entry (3
-digit decimal; 000-
128; Default: 000):
042 – Outdoor Temperature
Zone Entry (3-digit decima
l; 000-128; Default: 000):
101-228 – Door Chime Sound:
00 –

Disabled
01 –

6 Beeps
02 –

Bing Bong
03 –

Ding Dong
04 –

Alarm Tone
05 –

Zone Name Section 6: Programming Worksheets
91
System Information and Testing
Module Programming
Door Chime Zone Assignment:
1 ____ 13 ____ 25 ____ 37 ____ 49
2 ____ 14 ____ 26 ____ 38 ____ 50
3 ____ 15 ____ 27 ____ 39 ____ 51
4 ____ 16 ____ 28 ____ 40 ____ 52
5 ____ 17 ____ 29 ____ 41 ____ 53
6 ____ 18 ____ 30 ____ 42 ____ 54
7 ____ 19 ____ 31 ____ 43 ____ 55
8 ____ 20 ____ 32 ____ 44 ____ 56
9 ____ 21 ____ 33 ____ 45 ____ 57
10 ___ 22 ____ 34 ____ 46 ____ 58
11 ___ 23 ____ 35 ____ 47 ____ 59
12 ___ 24 ____ 36 ____ 48 ____ 60
____ 61 ____ 73 ____ 85
____ 62 ____ 74 ____ 86
____ 63 ____ 75 ____ 87
____ 64 ____ 76 ____ 88
____ 65 ____ 77 ____ 89
____ 66 ____ 78 ____ 90
____ 67 ____ 79 ____ 91
____ 68 ____ 80 ____ 92
____ 69 ____ 81 ____ 93
____ 70 ____ 82 ____ 94
____ 71 ____ 83 ____ 95
____ 72 ____ 84 ____ 96
____ 97 ____ 109 ____ 121 ____
____ 98 ____ 110 ____ 122 ____
____ 99 ____ 111 ____ 123 ____
____ 100 ____ 112 ____ 124 ____
____ 101 ____ 113 ____ 125 ____
____ 102 ____ 114 ____ 126 ____
____ 103 ____ 115 ____ 127 ____
____ 104 ____ 116 ____ 128 ____
____ 105 ____ 117 ____
____ 106 ____ 118 ____
____ 107 ____ 119 ____
____ 108 ____ 120 ____
[899] Template Programming
5 Digit Template Code:
Central Station Phone Number:
Description on page 52
Central Station Account Code:
Partition Account Code:
DLS Access Code:
Partition 1 Entry Delay 1:
Partition 1 Exit Delay:
Installer Code:
[900] System Information
000 – Control Panel Version
001- 016 – View Keypad 1-16 Version
Description on page 53
101-116 – HSM2108 8 Zone Module 1-16 Version
201-216 – HSM2208 8 Output Module 1 Version
460 – Alternate Communicator
461 – HSM2Host Module
501 – HSM2300 Power Supply 1A Module 1
502 – HSM2300 Power Supply 1A Module 2
503 – HSM2300 Power Supply 1A Module 3
504 – HSM2300 Power Supply 1A Module 4
521 – HSM2204 High-Current O/P Module 1
522 – HSM2204 High-Current O/P Module 2
523 – HSM2204 High-Current O/P Module 3
524 – HSM2204 High-Current O/P Module 4
[901] Installer Walk Test Mode Enable/Disable
Description on page 53
[902] Add/Remove Modules
Description on page 53
000 – Auto Enroll Modules
001 – Enroll Modules
002 – Slot Assignment
003 – Edit Module Slot Assignment
101 – Delete Keypads
102 – Delete HSM2108 8 Zone Module
103 – Delete HSM2208 8 Output
Module or High Current O/P
106 – Delete HSM2Host
109 – Delete HSM2300 Power Supply 1A
110 – Delete HSM2204 4 High Current Output Section 6: Programming Worksheets
92
Testing
Battery Settings
Defaults

[903] Confirm Modules
000 – View All Modules
Description on page 54
001 – View Keypads*
002 – View HSM2108 8 Zone Module*
*LED and ICON keypads
003 – View HSM2208 8 Output Module O/P*
006 – View HSM2Host*
009 – View HSM2300 Power Supply 1A*
010 – View HSM2204 4 High Current Output*
Description on page 54
101 – Confirm Keypads
102 – ConfirmHSM2108 8 Zone Module
103 – Confirm HSM2208 8 Output Module or High Current O/P
106 – Confirm HSM2Host
109 – Confirm HSM2300 Power Supply 1A
110 – Confirm HSM2204 4 High Current Output
[904] Wireless Placement Test
Description on page 54
001-128 – Placement Test - Zone 1-128
521-528 – Placement Test Repeaters 1-28
551-566 – Placement Test Sirens 1-16
601-632 – Placement Test Wireless Keys 1-32
701-716 – Placement Test Wireless Keypads 1-16
[982] Battery Settings
000 – Panel Battery Settings
01 –

Panel High Charge Current
Description on page 54
010 – HSM2204 High Current Output
Battery
01 –

HSM2204 1 High Charge Current
02 –

HSM2204 2 High Charge Current
03 –

HSM2204 3 High Charge Current
04 –

HSM2204 4 High Charge Current
020 – HSM2300 1A Power Supply
Battery
01 –

HSM2300 1 High Charge Current
02 –

HSM2300 2 High Charge Current
03 –

HSM2300 3 High Charge Current
04 –

HSM2300 4 High Charge Current
[989] Default Master Code
[990] Installer Lockout Enable/Disable
[991] Default Keypads
999 – Default All Keypads
901-916 – Default Keypad 1-16
[993] Default Alt Comm
[996] Default HSM2HOST Wireless Receiver
[999] Default System
(Descriptions on page 54) 93
Section 7: Troubleshooting
7.1 Testing
•
Power up system
•
Program options as required (See
“Programming Descriptions” on page 26).
•
Trip, then restore zones
•
Verify correct reporti
ng codes are sent to the central station
7.2 Troubleshooting
LCD programmable
-message keypad:
•
Press [*][2] followed by
access code if required to
view a trouble condition
•
The trouble light flashes and the LC
D displays the first trouble condition
•
Use the arrow keys to scroll through al
l trouble conditions present on the system
NOTE:
When additional information is av
ailable for a specific trouble c
ondition, a [*] is disp
layed. Press the [*] key to view the ad
ditional information.
LED and ICON keypads:
•
Press [*][2] to view a trouble condition
•
The trouble light flashes
•
Refer to the trouble summary list below to dete
rmine the trouble condition(s) present on the system
[*][2] Trouble Summary
The list below describes the troubl
e indications displayed on keypads.
Trouble
Detailed Trouble
01 – Service Required
01 – Bell circuit
02 – RF jam detected
03 – Aux supply trouble
04 – Time and date
05 – Output 1 fault
02 – Module Low Battery 01 – Panel low battery
02 – Panel no battery
04 – HSM2204 1-4 low battery
05 – HSM2204 1-4 no battery
07 – HSM2300 1-4 low battery
08 – HSM2300 1-4 no battery
03 – Bus Voltage
01 – HSM2HOSTx voltage
02 – Keypad 1-16 voltage
04 – HS2108 1-15 voltage
05 – HSM2300 1-4 voltage
06 – HSM2204 1-4 voltage
11 – HSM2208 1-4 voltage
04 – AC Troubles
01 – Zone 1-128 AC
03 – Siren 1-16 AC
04 – Repeater 1-8 AC
05 – HSM2300 1-4 AC
06 – HSM2204 1-4 AC
07 – Alarm Controller AC
05 – Device Faults
01 – Zone 1-128
02 – Keypad 1-16
03 – Siren 1-16
04 – Repeater 1-8
06 – Device Low Battery 01 – Zone 1-128
02 – Keypad 1-16
03 – Siren 1-16
04 – Repeater 1-8
05 – User 1-32
07 – Device Tampers
01 – Zone 1-128
02 – Keypad 1-16
03 – Siren 1-16
04 – Repeater 1-8
08 – RF Delinquency
01 – Zone 1-128
02 – Keypad 1-16
03 – Siren 1-16
04 – Repeater 1-8
09 – Module Supervisory 01 – HSM2HOSTx
02 – Keypad 1-16
04 – HS2108 1-15
05 – HSM2300 1-4
06 – HSM2204
08 – HSM2208 1-4
10 – Module Tamper
01 – HSM2HOSTx
02 – Keypad 1-16
04 – HS2108 1-15
05 – HSM2300 1-4
06 – HSM2204
08 – HSM2208 1-4
11 – Communications
01 – TLM
02 – Phone number 01-04
03 – Alt. comm SIM lock
04 – Alt. comm cellular
05 – Alt. comm Ethernet
06 – Receiver 1-4 absent
07 – Receiver 1-4 supervision
09 – Alt. comm fault
12 – Not Networked
01 – Zone 1-128
02 – Keypad 1-16
03 – Siren 1-16
04 – Repeater 1-8
05 – User 1-32 Section 7: Troubleshooting
94
Trouble [1] Service Required
Press [01] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Bell Circuit
Bell+, Bell-...open circuit.
• Disconnect Bell-/+ leads
and measure resistance:
• Open circuit indicates break in
wiring or defective siren/bell.
• Jumper Bell+/- with 1K re
sistor (Brown, Black, Red):
[02] RF Jam Detected
Wireless receiver - ex
cessive noise detected.
• Check event buffer to determine specific trouble.
• If buffer logs RF jam,
check for RF interference.
• Disable RF Jam: secti
on [804] sub-section [801].
[03] Aux Supply
An auxiliary power supply trouble is present.
• Check for a short between Aux+
and Aux- or other system ground.
• Ensure the aux current draw has not
exceeded the doc
umented limits.
[04] Time and Date
The alarm controller inte
rnal clock is not set.
To program the time and date:
• Enter [

][6][Master Code] then press [01].
• Enter the time and date (24-hour cl
ock) using the following format: HH:MM
MM/DD/YY
e.g., For 6:00 pm, June 29, 2010:
Enter: [18] [00] [06] [29] [10]
[05] Output 1 Fault
HSM2204 output#1 open circuit.
• If output #1 is unused: ensure terminals O1, AUX are jumpered with 1K resis-
tor (brown, black, red).
• If output #1 is used: disc
onnect wire leads from O1
, AUX terminals, measure
resistance of leads:
• Open circuit indicates a break in wiring.
Trouble [2] Module Battery
Press [02] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Panel Low Battery
The panel detects that the batt
ery is below the low battery
threshold (less than 11.5VDC).
NOTE: This trouble condition will
not clear until the battery
voltage is 12.5VDC min., under load.
• NOTE: If battery is new allow 1 hour to charge.
• Verify voltage measured across AC te
rminals is 16-18 VAC. Replace trans-
former if required.
• Disconnect batte
ry wire leads:
• Verify battery charging voltage meas
ured across battery leads = 13.70 -
13.80 VDC.
• Connect battery, re
move AC power.
• Verify measured voltage across
Aux terminals is 12.5VDC min.
[02] Panel No Battery
The panel detects that no battery
is present or that the battery
is shorted.
• Verify battery is connected.
• Refer to troubleshooting st
eps for panel low battery.
[04] 4 High Current output 1-4 Low Battery (HSM2204)
HSM2204 battery less than 11.5VDC.
NOTE: This trouble condition will
not clear until the battery
voltage is 12.5VDC min., under load.
• Charge battery. It may be low due
to a long period without AC.
• Replace battery if it is no longer
able to hold a charge due to age.
[05] 4 High Current output 1-4 No Battery (HSM2204)
Enter 05 to view which HSM2204
does not have a battery con-
nected.
• Verify battery is connected.
• Refer to troubleshooting st
eps for panel low battery.
[7] Power Supply 1-4 Low Battery (HSM2300)
Enter 07 to view which HSM230
0 has a battery voltage less
than 11.5V.
• Charge battery. It may be low due
to a long period without AC.
• Replace battery if it is no longer
able to hold a charge due to age.
[8] Power Supply 1-4 No Battery (HSM2300)
Enter 08 to view which HSM2300
does not have a battery con-
nected.
• Verify battery is connected.
• Refer to troubleshooting st
eps for panel low battery. Section 7: Troubleshooting
95
Trouble [3] Bus Voltage Trouble
Press [03] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] HSM2HOST Bus Low Voltage
The 2-way wireless integration
module has detected a voltage
less than 6.3V on its aux input.
• Ensure voltage at module is hi
gher than the documented limits.
• Ensure wire run is not too long.
• Check voltage of panel battery.
• Trouble should clear when AC is re-a
pplied and the battery has had time to
charge.
• Disconnect AC and allow th
e panel to run on battery power. Ensure voltage at
module is higher than
the documented limits.
[02] Keypad 1-16 Bus Low Voltage
Enter 02 to view hardwired keypa
ds with a bus voltage of less
than 6.9V for ICON/LCD models that include a wireless trans-
ceiver, 7.7V for the ICON/LC
D/LED models that do not.
[04] HSM2108 Bus Low Voltage
Enter 04 to view zone
expanders with a bus voltage of less
than 5.9V.
[05] HSM2300 Bus Low Voltage
Enter 05 to view power supplies
with a bus voltage of less
than 6.9V.
[06] HSM2204 Bus Low Voltage
Enter 06 to view high current
output modules that have
detected a bus voltage of less than 6.9V.
[11] HSM2208 Bus Low Voltage
The low current output module ha
s detected a voltage less
than 5.9V on its aux input.
Trouble [4] AC Failure
Press [04] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zone 1-128 AC
[05] HSM2300 AC 1-4
[06] HSM2204 1-4 AC
[07] Alarm Controller
An AC trouble has been detect
ed on a device or module.
• Verify voltage measured across AC
terminals is 16-18VAC. Replace trans-
former if required.
Trouble [05] Device Faults
Press [05] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zone 1-128 faults
Wireless zones:
Enter [01] to view zones in fau
lt. This trouble is generated by a
zone wireless supervisory trouble.
• Ensure fire zones have a 5.6K resi
stor (green, blue
, red) connected.
• Remove wire leads from Z and COM terminals and measure resistance of the
wire leads:
• Check for a short on DEOL zones
or an open condition on SEOL fire
zones.
• Connect a 5.6K resistor across the Z an
d COM terminals. Verify the trouble
condition clears.
• Placement test a wireless device and re
-locate it if bad re
sults are received.
Hardwired zones:
Enter [01] to view zones in fault.
“Fire Zone” is displayed in the
[*][2] menu if an open circuit is
present on PGM2 being used as
a 2-wire smoke detector input.
This trouble is generated by a
short on hardwired zones when
DEOL is used.
• Ensure a 2.2K EOL resistor is
connected (red, red, red).
• Remove wire leads from PGM2 and AUX+
terminals and me
asure resistance
of the wire leads:
• An open circuit indicates a break in
the wiring or no resistor connected.
• Connect a 2.2K resistor across PGM2 a
nd AUX+ terminals. Verify that trou-
ble clears.
[02] Keypad 1-16 faults
Enter [02] to view keypads in fa
ult. This trouble is caused by a
wireless supervisory fault
if the keypad is wireless.
• Placement test the wireless ke
ypad and re-locate if needed.
[03] Siren 1-16 faults
This trouble is caused by a wi
reless supervisory fault on a
wireless siren.
• See [02] Keypad 1-16 faults above.
[04] Repeater 1-8 faults
This trouble is caused by a wireless supervisory fault on a
wireless repeater, or by the
repeater shutting down due to a
loss of AC/DC power.
• See [02] Keypad 1-16 faults above.
Additional trouble conditions:
• Fire (2-W Smoke, PGX916, PGX926, PGX936)
• Gas (PGX923)
• Heat (PGX946)
• Freeze (PGX905)
• CO (PGX913)
• Probe Disconnected (PGX905, PGX985) Section 7: Troubleshooting
96
Trouble [6] Device Low Battery
Press [06] to toggle through specif
ic devices with low battery trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zones 1-128
[02] Keypad 1-16
[03] Siren 1-16
[04] Repeater 1-8
[05] User 1-32
One or more wireless de
vices has a low battery.
NOTE: The event is not logged to the event buffer until the
wireless device low batt
ery delay time expires.
Programming section
[377]
, Opt
002.
• Verify zone operation.
• Verify that tamper and low batter
y condition is cleared and reported.
• View which device is in low battery through the [*][2] menu.
Trouble [7] Device Tamper
Press [07] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zone 1-128 tampers
[02] Keypad 1-16 tampers
[03] Siren 1-16 tampers
[04] Repeater 1-8 tampers
h
An open circuit is present on
one or more zones with DEOL
resistors enabled.
• Check that the tamper switch is securely attached to the wall.
• Remove the wire leads from I/O and COM and measure the resistance of the
wire leads.
• Connect a 5.6K resistor (Green, Blue,
Red) across the I/O
and COM terminals.
• Verify the trouble condition clears.
A tamper condition is present on one or more wire
less devices. • Ensure de
vice cover is secure.
• Ensure device is correctly m
ounted for wall tamper operation.
• Trip, then restore the tamper. If tamp
er condition persists, replace wireless
device.
Trouble [8] RF Delinquency
Press [08] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zone 1-128 faults
[02] Keypad 1-16 faults
[03] Siren 1-16 faults
[04] Repeater 1-8 faults
HSM2HOST has not received

a supervisory signal from a
wireless device for 20 minutes.
• Open/close the device, press a ke
y on the keypad or tamper/restore.
• Ensure the device is physically present.
• Check for device faults
(e.g., low battery).
• Check the current signal strengt
h and during the last 24 hours.
• Replace the battery.
• Replace the device.
Trouble [9] Module Supervisory
Press [09] to determine specif
ic zones with a tamper trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] HSM2HOST
[02] Keypad 1-16
[04] HSM2108 1-15
[05] HSM2300 1-4
[06] HSM2204
[08] HSM2208 1-4
No supervisory response from enrolled module.
• Modules are immediately enrolled and superv
ised. If a module is removed, or if
the keypad slot is changed, m
odule supervision must be reset.
• View the event buffer to identify
the specific module(s) in trouble.
• To reset module supervision:
• Enter programming section [902].
• Select auto or manual enrollment.
• Enter programming section [903] to id
entify modules connected to the Cor-
bus.
Trouble [10] Module Tamper
Press [10] to determ
ine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] HSM2HOST
[02] Keypad 1-16
[04] HSM2108 1-15
[05] HSM2300 1-4
[06] HSM2204
[08] HSM2208 1-4
A tamper condition is present on one or more modules.
• Ensure the TAM terminal on
HSM2108, HSM2300, HSM2204 and
HSM2208 modules is shorted to ground
if tamper support is not used.
• Ensure module cover is secure.
• Ensure module is correctly mounted for wall tamper operation.
• Trip, then restore the tamper. If tamper
condition persists,
replace the module. Section 7: Troubleshooting
97
IMPORTANT!
Ensure you have the following information av
ailable before contac
ting Customer Support:
•
Alarm controller type and
version, (e.g.,
HSM2064 1.0):
Note: Version number can be accessed by ente
ring [*][Installer Code][900] on any LCD keypad.
This information is also located o
n a
sticker on the printed circuit board.
•
List of modules connected
to control panel, (e.g.,
HSM2108, HSM2HOSTx etc.).
Trouble [11] Communications
Press [11] to determine specific trouble
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Phone Line Trouble
Phone line voltage
at TIP, RING on main panel less than
3VDC.
• Measure the voltage across
TIP and RING on the panel:
• No phone off-hook – 50VDC (approx).
• Any phone off-hook

– 5VDC (approx).
• Wire incoming line directly to TIP and RING.
• If trouble clears, check wiring or the RJ-31 phone jack.
[02] Phone Number 1-4
The system failed to communicate
with a receiver using one of
the enabled phone numbers. Enter [02] to view phone numbers
with failure to communicate troubles.
• Ensure adequate line voltage at the panel Tip and Ring (On hook ~41VDC, Off
hook ~7VDC).
• Ensure panel phone number is programmed correctly when using . If using IP
or cellular, ensure alternate communicator has the correct IP addresses and
programming.
[03] Alternate Comm SIM Lock
SIM lock is enabled and the uni
t does not have the correct SIM
PIN.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[04] Alternate Comm Cellular
The alternate communicator has detected a radio or SIM fail-
ure, a cellular network trouble,
or insufficient signal strength.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[05] Alternate Comm Ethernet
The alternate communicator has de
tected a network absent con-
dition.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[06] Receiver 1-4 Absent
Alternate communicator supervision loss or failure to initialize
a receiver.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[07] Receiver 1-4 Supervision
The alarm system loses communica
tion with an Ethernet or cel-
lular receiver on the system.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[08] Alt. Comm Configuration
The SIM is active but the unit has not received programming
from Connect 24.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[09] Alternate Comm Fault
The alternate communi
cator has not responded to any poll
commands. Alt Comm Fault is displayed in [*][2] and the
event buffer.
• See the communicator installation manual for details.
[10] Alternate Comm FTC Fault
• Refer to the communicator installation manual for more details.
Trouble [12] Not Networked
Press [12] to toggle through troubles
Trouble
Troubleshooting
[01] Zones 1-128
[02] keypad 1-16
[03] Siren 1-16
[04] Repeater 1-8
[05] User 1-16
A device is out of sync with
the wireless network or was not
synchronized with the ne
twork after enrollment.
• Ensure the device is physically present.
• Check the current signal streng
th and during the last 24 hours.
• Replace the battery or press the tamper switch.
• Enroll the device again. 98
Appendix A: Event Codes
The following tables contain Contact ID a
nd Automatic SIA format repor
ting codes. See Programming Se
ctions [308] for event repo
rting codes.
Contact ID
Each of the digits indicate specific inform
ation about the signal. For exam
ple, if zone 1 is an entry/exit point, the event cod
e contains [34]. The
central station would
receive the following:
*BURG - ENTRY/EXIT - 1 where the “1” i
ndicates which zone went into alarm.
See Table A-1 "Contact ID Event
Codes" for code definitions.
SIA Format - Level 2 (Hard Coded)
The SIA communication format used in this
product follows the level 2 sp
ecifications of the SIA Di
gital Communication Standard
- October
1997. This format sends the account code
along with its data transmission. The transm
ission appears simila
r to the following at
the receiver:
N ri1
BA 01
N
= New Event
ri1
= Partition /Area Identifier
BA
= Burglary Alarm
01
= Zone 1
A system event uses the Area Identifier ri00.
Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes
Section #
Definition
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes**
Zone Events
[307]
Zone alarms
A/R
See tabl
es on page 103 for details
[307]
Zone restores
A/R
[307]
Zone tamper/restore
MA
/R
383-ZZZ
TA-ZZZ/ TR-ZZZZ
[307]
Zone fault/restore
MA/R
38A-ZZZ
UT-ZZZZ/UJ-ZZZZ
Tamper Events
[308]-[101] Keypad 1 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-601
TA-0601/TR-0601
[308]-[101] Keypad 2 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-602
TA-0602/TR-0602
[308]-[101] Keypad 3 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-603
TA-0603/TR-0603
[308]-[101] Keypad 4 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-604
TA-0604/TR-0604
[308]-[101] Keypad 5 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-605
TA-0605/TR-0605
[308]-[101] Keypad 6 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-606
TA-0606/TR-0606
[308]-[101] Keypad 7 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-607
TA-0607/TR-0607
[308]-[101] Keypad 8 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-608
TA-0608/TR-0608
[308]-[101] Keypad 9 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-609
TA-0609/TR-0609
[308]-[101] Keypad 10 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-610
TA-0610/TR-0610
[308]-[101] Keypad 11 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-611
TA-0611/TR-0611
[308]-[101] Keypad 12 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-612
TA-0612/TR-0612
[308]-[101] Keypad 13 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-613
TA-0613/TR-0613
[308]-[101] Keypad 14 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-614
TA-0614/TR-0614
[308]-[101] Keypad 15 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-615
TA-0615/TR-0615
[308]-[101] Keypad 16 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-616
TA-0616/TR-0616
[308]-[101] Siren 1 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-801
TA-0801/TR-0801
[308]-[101] Siren 2 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-802
TA-0802/TR-0802
[308]-[101] Siren 3 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-803
TA-0803/TR-0803
[308]-[101] Siren 4 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-804
TA-0804/TR-0804
[308]-[101] Siren 5 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-805
TA-0805/TR-0805
[308]-[101] Siren 6 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-806
TA-0806/TR-0806
[308]-[101] Siren 7 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-807
TA-0807/TR-0807
[308]-[101] Siren 8 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-808
TA-0808/TR-0808
[308]-[101] Siren 9 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-809
TA-0809/TR-0809
[308]-[101] Siren 10 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-810
TA-0810/TR-0810
[308]-[101] Siren 11 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-811
TA-0811/TR-0811
[308]-[101] Siren 12 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-812
TA-0812/TR-0812
[308]-[101] Siren 13 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-813
TA-0813/TR-0813 99
[308]-[101] Siren 14 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-814
TA-0814/TR-0814
[308]-[101] Siren 15 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-815
TA-0815/TR-0815
[308]-[101] Siren 16 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-816
TA-0816/TR-0816
[308]-[101] Repeater 1 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-901
TA-0901/TR-0901
[308]-[101] Repeater 2 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-902
TA-0902/TR-0902
[308]-[101] Repeater 3 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-903
TA-0903/TR-0903
[308]-[101] Repeater 4 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-904
TA-0904/TR-0904
[308]-[101] Repeater 5 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-905
TA-0905/TR-0905
[308]-[101] Repeater 6 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-906
TA-0906/TR-0906
[308]-[101] Repeater 7 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-907
TA-0907/TR-0907
[308]-[101] Repeater 8 tamper/restore alarm
T/R
(3)83-908
TA-0908/TR-0908
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #1
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-101
ES-0101/EJ-0101
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #2
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-102
ES-0102/EJ-0102
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #3
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-103
ES-0103/EJ-0103
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #4
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-104
ES-0104/EJ-0104
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #5
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-105
ES-0105/EJ-0105
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #6
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-106
ES-0106/EJ-0106
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #7
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-107
ES-0107/EJ-0107
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #8
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-108
ES-0108/EJ-0108
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #9
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-109
ES-0109/EJ-0109
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #10 ta
mper/restored
T/R
(3)41-110
ES-0110/EJ-0110
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #11
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-111
ES-0111/EJ-0111
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #12
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-112
ES-0112/EJ-012
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #13 ta
mper/restored
T/R
(3)41-113
ES-0113/EJ-0113
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #14 ta
mper/restored
T/R
(3)41-114
ES-0114/EJ-0114
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #15 ta
mper/restored
T/R
(3)41-115
ES-0115/EJ-0115
[308]-[101] HSM2108: 8-Zone Expander module #16 ta
mper/restored
T/R
(3)41-116
ES-0116/EJ-0116
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #1 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-201
ES-0201/EJ-0201
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #2 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-202
ES-0202/EJ-0202
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #3 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-203
ES-0203/EJ-0203
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #4 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-204
ES-0204/EJ-0204
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #5 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-205
ES-0205/EJ-0205
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #5 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-206
ES-0206/EJ-0206
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #7 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-207
ES-0207/EJ-0207
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #8 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-208
ES-0208/EJ-0208
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #9 tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-209
ES-0209/EJ-0209
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #10 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-210
ES-0210/EJ-0210
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output Expander module #11
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-211
ES-0211/EJ-0211
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #12 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-212
ES-0212/EJ-0212
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #13 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-213
ES-0213/EJ-0213
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #14 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-214
ES-0214/EJ-0214
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #15 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-215
ES-0215/EJ-0215
[308]-[101] HSM2208: 8-Output E
xpander module #16 tamper/resto
red
T/R
(3)41-216
ES-0216/EJ-0216
[308]-[101] HSM2204: Power Supply-1A
(4 high-current outputs) #1 tamper
/restored
T/R
(3)41-601
ES-0601/EJ-0601
[308]-[101] HSM2204: Power Supply-1A
(4 high-current outputs) #2 tamper
/restored
T/R
(3)41-602
ES-0602/EJ-0602
[308]-[101] HSM2204: Power Supply-1A
(4 high-current outputs) #3 tamper
/restored
T/R
(3)41-603
ES-0603/EJ-0603
[308]-[101] HSM2204: Power Supply-1A
(4 high-current outputs) #4 tamper
/restored
T/R
(3)41-604
ES-0604/EJ-0604
[308]-[101] HSM2300: Power Supply module #1
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-620
ES-0620/EJ-0620
[308]-[101] HSM2300: Power Supply module #2
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-621
ES-0621/EJ-0621
[308]-[101] HSM2300: Power Supply module #3
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-622
ES-0622/EJ-0622
[308]-[101] HSM2300: Power Supply module #4
tamper/restored
T/R
(3)41-623
ES-0623/EJ-0623
[308]-[101] Keypad Lockout - Incorrect ac
cess code entry
T/R
(4)61-000
JA-0000
Section #
Definition
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** 100
Opening Events
[308]-[201] User Openings - Disarmed by user
O/C
(4)A1-UUU
OP-UUUU
[308]-[202] Automatic Arming Canceled
O/C
(4)55-000
CI-0000
[308]-[201] Special Opening - System disarmed
using: keyswitch, ma
intenance code, DLS
software, wireless key
O/C
(4)AA-000
OP-0000
[308]-[211] Late to Open - System not disarmed be
fore late to open time expired
O/C
E(4)53-000
CT-0000
[308]-[202] Automatic (Schedule) Opening
O/C
(4)A3-000
OA-0000
Closing Events
[308]-[201] User Closings -
System armed by user
O/C
E(4)A1-UUU
CL-UUUU
[308]-[221] Partial Closing - 1 or more z
ones bypassed when armed
O/C
(4)56-000
CG-0000
[308]-[201] Special Closing - System armed via:
quick arm, keyswitch,
function key, mainte-
nance code, DLS soft
ware, wireless key
O/C
(4)AA-000
CL-0000
[308]-[211] Late to Close - Auto-arm
prealert sounded
O/C
(4)A3-000
CA-0000
[308]-[211] Exit Fault
O/C
(3)74-ZZZ
EA-ZZZZ
System Trouble Events
[308]-[301] Battery trouble/restore - Ma
in panel
MA/R
(3)A2-000
YT-0000/YR-0000
[308]-[301] Battery absent trouble/restore -
Main panel
MA/R
(3)11-000
YM-0000/YR-0000
[308]-[301] Battery charging trouble/restore
- Main panel
MA/R
(3)AA-000
YP-0000/YQ-0000
[308]-[301] Panel AC trouble/restore - Ma
in panel
MA/R
(3)A1-000
AT-0000/AR-0000
[308]-[302] Bell Circuit trouble/re
store
MA/R
(3)21-000
YA-0999/YH-0999
[308]-[302] TLM (telephone
line) fail/restore
MA/R
(3) 51-000
LT-0001/LR-0001
[308]-[302] Auxiliary Power trouble/restore
MA/R
(3) 12-000
YP-0000/YQ-0000
[308]-[305] PGM 2, 2-Wire Smoke troubl
e/restore
MA/R
(3)73-992
FT-0992/FJ-0992
Module Troubles
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Voltage
trouble/restore - System
MA/R
(3)AA-000
EM-0000/EN-0000
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Volta
ge trouble/restore - Keypads
MA/R
(3)AA-001-032
EM-0001-0032
EN-0001-0032
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Volta
ge trouble/restore - HSM2108
MA/R
(3)AA-101-162
EM-0101-0162
EN-0101-0162
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Volta
ge trouble/restore - HSM2208
MA/R
(3)AA-201-262
EM-0201-0262
EN-0201-0262
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Voltage
trouble/restore - HSM2HOST
MA/R
(3)AA-551
EM-0551
EN-0551
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Volta
ge trouble/restore - HSM2204
MA/R
(3)AA-601-604
EM-0601-0601
EN-0601-0604
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Low Volta
ge trouble/restore - HSM2300
MA/R
(3)AA-621-624
EM-0621-0624
EN-0621-0624
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory
trouble/restore - System
MA/R
(3)A-000
ET-0000/ER-0000
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - Keypads
MA/R
(3)A-001-032
ET-0001-0032
ER-0001-0032
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - HSM2108
MA/R
(3)A-101-162
ET-0101-0162
ER-0101-0162
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - HSM2208
MA/R
(3)A-201-262
ET-0201-0262
ER-0201-0262
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - HSM2HOST
MA/R
(3)A-551
ET-0551
ER-0551
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - HSM2204
MA/R
(3)A-601-604
ET-0601-0601
ER-0601-0604
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervisory tr
ouble/restore - HSM2300
MA/R
(3)A-621-624
ET-0621-0624
ER-0621-0624
[308]-[332] Hardwired Module Supervis
ory trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)3A-MMM
ET-MMMM/ER-
MMMM
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 1 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-601
YI-0601/YJ-0601
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 2 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-602
YI-0602/YJ-0602
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 3 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-603
YI-0603/YJ-0603
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 4 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-604
YI-0604/YJ-0604
Section #
Definition
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** 101
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 1 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-621
YI-0621/YJ-0621
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 2 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-622
YI-0622/YJ-0622
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 3 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-623
YI-0623/YJ-0623
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 4 trouble/
restore
MA/R
(3)12-624
YI-0624/YJ-0624
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 1 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-601
YT-0601/YR-0601
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 2 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-602
YT-0602/YR-0602
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 3 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-603
YT-0603/YR-0603
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 4 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-604
YT-0604/YR-0604
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 1 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-621
YT-0621/YR-0621
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 2 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-622
YT-0622/YR-0622
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 3 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-623
YT-0623/YR-0623
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 4 Low Battery
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A2-624
YT-0624/YR-0624
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 1 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-601
YM-0601/YR-0601
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 2 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-602
YM-0602/YR-0602
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 3 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-603
YM-0603/YR-0603
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 4 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-604
YM-0604/YR-0604
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 1 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-621
YM-0621/YJ-0621
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 2 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-622
YM-0622/YJ-0622
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 3 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-623
YM-0623/YJ-0623
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 4 Battery absent
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)11-624
YM-0624/YJ-0624
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 1 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-601
YP-0601/YQ-0601
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 2 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-601
YP-0602/YQ-0602
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 3 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-601
YP-0603/YQ-0603
[308]-[332] HSM2204 Aux Supply 4 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-601
YP-0604/YQ-0604
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 1 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-621
YP-0621/YQ-0621
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 2 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-621
YP-0622/YQ-0622
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 3 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-621
YP-0623/YQ-0623
[308]-[332] HSM2300 Aux Supply 4 Charger
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-621
YP-0624/YQ-0624
Alternate Communicator
[308]-[351] Alternate Communicator faul
t/restore
MA/R
(3)3A-000
ET-0000/ER-0000
[308]-[351] Alternate Communicator Radio/Sim
failure/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-001
YX-0001/YZ-0001
[308]-[351] Alternate Communicator cellular tr
ouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-001
YX-0001/YZ-0001
[308]-[352] Alternate Communicator Ethernet
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-001
YX-0001/YZ-0001
[308]-[354] Alternate Communicator Receiver 1
absent/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-001
YS-0001/YZ-0001
[308]-[354] Alternate Communicator Receiver 2
absent/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-002
YS-0002/YZ-0002
[308]-[354] Alternate Communicator Receiver 3
absent/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-003
YS-0003/YZ-0003
[308]-[354] Alternate Communicator Receiver 4
absent/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-004
YS-0004/YZ-0004
[308]-[355] Alternate Communicator Receiver 1 Supe
rvisory trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-001
YS-0001/YK-0001
[308]-[355] Alternate Communicator Receiver 2 Supe
rvisory trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-001
YS-0001/YK-0001
[308]-[355] Alternate Communicator Receiver 3 Supe
rvisory trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-001
YS-0001/YK-0001
[308]-[355] Alternate Communicator Receiver 4 Supe
rvisory trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)5A-001
YS-0001/YK-0001
[308]-[353] Alternate Communicator SMS Config
trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-001
YX-0001/YZ-0001
[308]-[351] Remote Programming Begin/End
MA/R
(6)27-001
LB-0000/LS-0000
[308]-[351] General Alternate Communicator tr
ouble/restore
MA/R
(3)AA-001
YX-0001/YR-0001
Wireless Events
[308]-[361] Wireless Zone Low Batter
y trouble/restore. ZZZ= Wirele
ss zones 001-128.
MA/R
(3) 84-ZZZ
XT-ZZZZ/XR-ZZZZ
[308]-[361] Wireless Device Low Battery troubl
e/restore. ZZZ= 601-6
16: wireless keypads,
701-764: wireless keys, 801-864:
wireless Sirens, 901-908:
wireless repeaters
MA/R
(3) 84-ZZZ
XT-ZZZZ/XR-ZZZZ
[308]-[361] Wireless Zone AC trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)A1-ZZZ
AT-ZZZZ/AR-ZZZZ
[308]-[361] Wireless Device Fault/restore
MA/R
(3)8A-ZZZ
UT-ZZZZ/UJ-
ZZZZ
[308]-[361] Wireless Temperature Probe trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)8A-ZZZ
KT-ZZZZ/KJ-
ZZZZ
[308]-[361] Repeater 1 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-901
AT-0901/AR-0901
[308]-[361] Repeater 2 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-902
AT-0902/AR-0902
[308]-[361] Repeater 3 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-903
AT-0903/AR-0903
[308]-[361] Repeater 4 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-904
AT-0904/AR-0904
Section #
Definition
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** 102
[308]-[361] Repeater 5 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-905
AT-0905/AR-0905
[308]-[361] Repeater 6 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-906
AT-0906/AR-0906
[308]-[361] Repeater 7 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-907
AT-0907/AR-0907
[308]-[361] Repeater 8 AC fail/rest
ore
MA/R
(3)A1-908
AT-0908/AR-0908
Miscellaneous Alarms
[308]-[001] Duress Alarm - Code ente
red at keypad
A/R
(1)21-000
HA-0000
[308]-[001] Opening After Alarm - Disarmed
with alarm in memory
A/R
(4)58-000
OR-0000
[308]-[001] Recent Closing - Alarm occurs within
two minutes of system arming
A/R
(4)59-UUU
CR-UUUU
[308]-[001] Burglary Verified - a second cross zone alar
m occurs within the cross zoning time A/R
(1)39-000
BV-0000
[308]-[001] Burglary Not Verified - a second cros
s zone alarm does not oc
cur within the cross
zoning time
A/R
(3)78-000
BG-0000
[308]-[001] HSM2108 Zone Expander Supervisor
y Alarm/restore
A/R
(1)43-000
UA-0000/UH-0000
[308]-[011] Alarm Canceled before expiry of
alarm cancellation timer
A/R
(4)A6-UUU
BC-UUUU
[308]-[011] PGM2 (Silent 24 Hour Input) -Aux Input Alarm/restore
A/R
(1)4A-992
UA-9992/UH-9992
[308]-[011] PGM2 (Audible 24 Hour Input) -Aux Input Alarm/restore
A/R
(1)4A-992
UA-0992/UH-0992
Priority Alarm and Restoral Events
[F] Key alarm/restore
A/R
(1)1A-000
FA-0000/FH-0000
[M] Key alarm/restore
A/R
(1)AA-000
MA-0000/MH-0000
[P] Key alarm/restore
A/R
(1)2A-000
PA-0000/PH-0000
Miscellaneous Closing
[308]-[221] Zone Bypass at time of arming
O/C
(5)7A-ZZZ
UB-ZZZZ
Testing
[308]-[401] Walk Test Begin/End
T
(6)A7-UUU
TS-UUUU/TE-UUUU
[308]-[401] Periodic Test
T
(6)A2-000
RP-0000/RY-0000
[308]-[401] System Test -
[*][6] bell/communications test
T
(6)A1-000
RX-0000
Maintenance
[308]-[311] General System trouble/restor
e - An RF jam trouble occurred/was
restored
MA/R
(3) AA-000
YX-0000/YZ/0000
[308]-[311] Fire trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)73-000
FT-0000/FJ-000
[308]-[314] Gas trouble/restore
MA/R
(3)8A-ZZZ
GT-ZZZ/GJ-ZZZ
[308]-[314] Heat trouble/restor
e
MA/R
E38A-ZZZ
KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ
[308]-[311] Cold Start - System has restarte
d after total power loss
MA/R
(3) A5-000
RR-0000
[308]-[312] Event Buffer 75% Full
MA/R
(6)22-000
JL-0000
[308]-[312] DLS Lead In - Download session start
MA/R
(4)11-000
RB-0000
[308]-[312] DLS Lead Out - Download
session stop
MA/R
(4)12-000
RS-0000
[308]-[312] SA Lead In - Download session start
MA/R
(4)11-000
RB-0000
[308]-[312] SA Lead Out - Download session stop
MA/R
(4)12-000
RS-0000
[308]-[312] Installer Lead In - Installer Progra
mming has been entered
MA/R
(6)27-000
LB-0000
[308]-[312] Installer Lead out - Installer Pr
ogramming has been exited
MA/R
(6)28-000
LS-0000
[308]-[313] Panel firmware upda
te begin/ successful
MA/R
(9)01-900
LB-0900/LS-0900
[308]-[313] Panel firmware upda
te fail
MA/R
(9)02-900
LU-0900
[308]-[401] Periodic test with trouble
T
(6)A2-RRR
RP-0000
*
**
A/R = alarms/restores; T/R = tampers/restores; O/C = openings/clos
ings; MA/R = maintenance alarms/restores; T = test transmis-
sions
UUU = user number (user 001-095);
ZZZ/ZZZZ = zone number (001-128).
Section #
Definition
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** 103
Contact ID SIA Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes
(as per SIA DCS: ‘Contact ID’ 01-1999):
The table below defines the meaning of al
l contact ID alarm/restore event codes.
Table A-1 Contact ID Event Codes
Zone Definition
SIA Auto Rep
Codes
Contact ID Auto
Rep Codes
Delay 1
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Delay 2
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Instant
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Interior
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Interior Stay/Away
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Delay Stay/Away
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Instant Stay/Away
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Interior Delay
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Day Zone
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Night Zone
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
24-Hr. Burglary
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Delayed 24-Hr. Fire (Wireless)
FA-ZZZZ/FH-ZZZZ (1) 1A
Standard 24-Hr. Fire (Wireless)
FA-ZZZZ/FH-ZZZZ (1) 1A
24-Hr. Sprinkler
SA-ZZZZ/SH-ZZZZ (1) 13
24-Hr. Low Temperature
ZA-ZZZZ/ZH-ZZZZ (1) 59
24-Hr High Temperature
KA-ZZZZ/KH-ZZZZ (1) 58
24-Hr. Latching Tamper
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
24-Hr. Non Alarm
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
24-Hr. Non-latching Tamper
TA-ZZZZ/TR-ZZZZ (3) 83
Momentary Keyswitch Arm
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Maintained Keyswitch Arm
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Momentary Keyswitch Disarm
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
Maintained Keyswitch Disarm
BA-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
24-Hr. Supervisory
US-ZZZZ/UR-ZZZZ (1) 5A
24-Hr. Supervisory Buzzer
UA-ZZZZ/UH-ZZZZ (1) 5A
24-Hr. Auto Verified Fire (Wireless) FA-ZZZZ/FH-ZZZZ (1) 1A
Fire Supervisory
FS-ZZZZ/FV-ZZZZ (2) AA
24-Hr. Gas
GA-ZZZZ/GH-ZZZZ (1) 51
24-Hr. CO Alarm
GA-ZZZZ/GH-ZZZZ (1) 62
24-Hr. Holdup
HA-ZZZZ/HH-ZZZZ (1) 22
24-Hr. Panic
PA-ZZZZ/PH-ZZZZ (1) 2A
24-Hr. Flood
WA-ZZZZ/WH-ZZZZ
(1) 54
24-Hr Heat
KA-ZZZZ/KH-ZZZZ (1) 58
24-Hr. Medical
MA-ZZZZ/MH-ZZZZ (1) AA
24-Hr. Emergency
QA-ZZZZ/QH-ZZZZ (1) A1
Doorbell Zone/Restore
BH-ZZZZ/BH-ZZZZ (1) 3A
ZZZ/ZZZZ = zones 001-128 104
Appendix B: Word Library
Item # Text
Item # Text
Item # Text
Item # Text
Item # Text
Item # Text
001 Aborted
042 Control
083 Garage
124 Motion
165 Shop
206 E
002 AC
043 Date
084 Gas
125 No
166 Side
207 F
003 Access
044 Daughter’s
085 Glass
126 North
167 Siren
208 G
004 Active
045 Degrees
086 Goodbye
127 Not
168 Sliding
209 H
005 Activity
046 Delay
087 Gym
128 Now
169 Smoke
210 I
006 Alarm
047 Den
088 Hallway
129 Number
170 Son’s
211 J
007 All
048 Desk
089 Heat
130 Off
171 Sound
212 K
008 AM
049 Detector
090 Hello
131 Office
172 South
213 L
009 Area
050 Dining
091 Help
132 OK 173 Special
214 M
010 Arm
051 Disarmed
092 High
133 On
174 Stairs
215 N
011 Armed
052 Door
093 Home
134 Open
175 Stay
216 O
012 Arming
053 Down
094 House
135 Opening
176 Sun
217 P
013 Attic
054 Download
095 In
136 Panic
177 Supervisory
218 Q
014 Auxiliary
055 Downstairs
096 Install
137 Partition
178 System
219 R
015 Away
056 Drawer
097 Interior
138 Patio
179 Tamper
220 S
016 Baby
057 Driveway
098 Intrusion
139 Pet
180 Temperature
221 T
017 Back
058 Duct
099 Invalid
140 Phone
181 Test
222 U
018 Bar
059 Duress
100 Is
141 Please
182 Time
223 V
019 Basement
060 East
101 Key
142 PM
183 To
224 W
020 Bathroom
061 Energy Saver
102 Kids
143 Police
184 Touchpad
225 X
021 Battery
062 Enter
103 Kitchen
144 Pool
185 Trouble
226 Y
022 Bedroom
063 Entry
104 Latchkey
145 Porch
186 Unbypass
227 Z
023 Bonus
064 Error
105 Laundry
146 Power
187 Unit
228 (Space)
024 Bottom
065 Exercise
106 Left
147 Press
188 Up
229 ’ (Apostrophe)
025 Breezeway
066 Exit
107 Level
148 Program
189 West
230 - (Dash)
026 Building
067 Exterior
108 Library
149 Progress
190 Window
231 _ (Underscore)
027 Bus
068 Factory
109 Light
150 Quiet
191 Zone
232 *
028 Bypass
069 Failure
110 Lights
151 Rear
192 0
233 #
029 Bypassed
070 Family
111 Living
152 Receiver
193 1
234 :
030 Enclosure
071 Father’s
112 Load
153 Report
194 2
235 /
031 Cancelled
072 Feature
113 Loading
154 RF
195 3
236 ? 105
Appendix C: Template Programming Tables
The following tables show the programming opt
ions for template programming digits 1-5.
•
Digit 1 – Zones 1-8 Definition Options
A “0” in the digit 1 location indicates that the default set
tings for the first 8 zones ar
e in place unless overridden.
•
Digit 2 – System EOL Configuration Options
•
Digit 3
–
Reporting Code Communication Options
Option
Zn1
Zn2
Zn3
Zn4
Zn5
Zn6
Zn7
Zn8
Zone Definitions (Options 1- 6)
1
001
003
003
003
004
004
004
004
001 Delay 1
2
001
003
003
005
005
005
005
008
003 Instant
3
001
003
003
005
005
005
005
007
004 Interior
4
001
001
003
003
003
003
003
003
005 Interior Stay/Away
5
001
003
003
006
005
005
005
005
006 Delayed Stay/Away
6
001
003
003
006
005
005
005
008
007 Delayed 24Hr. Fire (Wireless)
Refer to "[001] Zone Type" on page 27 for
details.
008 Standard 24Hr. Fire (Wireless)
Option
Zn1
[13] bit 1
[13] bit 2
1
NC Loops
ON
OFF
2
SEOL
OFF
OFF
3
DEOL
OFF
ON
Entry
Te mpla te
Programming
1
Disabled
[380] Comm Toggles 1 - Bi
t 1 Communications Enabled - Off
2
Receiver 1 and 2 SIA with Backup
[380] Comm
Toggles 1 - Bit 1 Communications Enabled - On
[350] Communicator Formats - [001] Receiver 1 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [002] Receiver 2 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [003] Receiver 3 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [004] Receiver 4 - 04 SIA
[381] Comm Toggles 2 - Bit 2 Bell Ringback - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - On
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[300] Comm Path - [001] Receiver 1 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [002] Receiver 2 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [003] Receiver 3 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [004] Receiver 4 - 01 PSTN
3
Receiver 1 SIA, Receiver 2 CID with
backup
[380] Comm Toggles 1 - Bit
1 Communications Enabled - On
[350] Communicator Formats - [001] Receiver 1 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [002] Receiver 2 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [003] Receiver 3 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [004] Receiver 4 - 04 SIA
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - On
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[300] Comm Path - [001] Receiver 1 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [002] Receiver 2 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [003] Receiver 3 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [004] Receiver 4 - 01 PSTN 106
•
Digit 4 – Reporting Code Configuration Options
4
Receiver 1 SIA
[380] Comm Toggles 1 - Bit 1 Communications Enabled - On
[350] Communicator Formats - [001] Receiver 1 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [002] Receiver 2 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [003] Receiver 3 - 04 SIA
[350] Communicator Formats - [004] Receiver 4 - 04 SIA
[381] Comm Toggles 2 - Bit 2 Bell Ringback - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[300] Comm Path - [001]
Receiver 1 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [002]
Receiver 2 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [003]
Receiver 3 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [004]
Receiver 4 - 01 PSTN
5
Receiver 1 CID
[380] Comm Toggles 1 - Bit 1 Communications Enabled - On
[350] Communicator Formats - [001] Receiver 1 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [002] Receiver 2 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [003] Receiver 3 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [004] Receiver 4 - 03 CID
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[300] Comm Path - [001]
Receiver 1 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [002]
Receiver 2 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [003]
Receiver 3 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [004]
Receiver 4 - 01 PSTN
6
Receiver 1 and 2 CIA with backup
[380] Comm
Toggles 1 - Bit 1 Communications Enabled - On
[350] Communicator Formats - [001] Receiver 1 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [002] Receiver 2 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [003] Receiver 3 - 03 CID
[350] Communicator Formats - [004] Receiver 4 - 03 CID
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - On
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[384] Comm Backup - Bit 2 Receiver 2 Backup - Off
[300] Comm Path - [001]
Receiver 1 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [002]
Receiver 2 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [003]
Receiver 3 - 01 PSTN
[300] Comm Path - [004]
Receiver 4 - 01 PSTN
Option
Common Group
Selected Troubles
Openings/ Closings
DLS/Installer Lead In/Out
1

2


3

4
 
5


6

7
 
8


indicates included, blank
indicates defa
ult setting,

indicates disabled 107
•
Common Group
–
Enables/Disables all Reporting Codes
•
Selected Troubles
- Enables the following Troubles
Common Group
Common Group Programming
Set all reporting codes to automatic
[308] Event Reporting - All Events On
Alarm/restore call directions enabled
[311][001]
Partition 1 Alarm/Restore - Bit 1 Receiver 1 - On
[311][001] Partition 1 Alarm/Restore - Bit 2 Receiver 2 - Off
[311][001] Partition 1 Alarm/Restore - Bit 3 Receiver 3 - Off
[311][001] Partition 1 Alarm/Restore - Bit 4 Receiver 4 - Off
Tamper/restore call directions disabled
[311][002] Pa
rtition 1 Tamper/Restore - Bit 1 Receiver 1 - Off
[311][002] Partition 1 Tamper/Restore - Bit 2 Receiver 2 - Off
[311][002] Partition 1 Tamper/Restore - Bit 3 Receiver 3 - Off
[311][002] Partition 1 Tamper/Restore - Bit 4 Receiver 4 - Off
Opening/closing call dire
ctions disabled
[311][003]
Partition 1 Open/Close -
Bit 1 Receiver 1 - Off
[311][003] Partition 1 Open/Close
- Bit 2 Receiver 2 - Off
[311][003] Partition 1 Open/Close
- Bit 3 Receiver 3 - Off
[311][003] Partition 1 Open/Close
- Bit 4 Receiver 4 - Off
Maintenance call directions enabled
[309][
001] Maintenance - Bit 1 Receiver 1 - On
[309][001] Maintenance - Bit 2 Receiver 2 - Off
[309][001] Maintenance - Bit 3 Receiver 3 - Off
[309][001] Maintenance - Bit 4 Receiver 4 - Off
Test transmission call
directions disabled [309][002] Test Tr
ansmission - Bit 1
Receiver 1 - Off
[309][002] Test Transmission
- Bit 2 Receiver 2 - Off
[309][002] Test Transmission
- Bit 3 Receiver 3 - Off
[309][002] Test Transmission
- Bit 4 Receiver 4 - Off
Selected Troubles Group
Selected Troubles Programming
Battery
[308][301] - Bit 3 Panel Low Battery - On
[308][301] - Bit 4 Panel Low Battery Restore - On
[308][301] - Bit 5 Panel Battery Absent - On
[308][301] - Bit 6 Panel Battery Absent Restore - On
[308][331] - Bit 3 Module Low Battery - On
[308][331] - Bit 4 Module Low Battery Restore - On
[308][331] - Bit 5 Module Battery Absent - On
[308][331] - Bit 6 Module Battery Absent Restore - On
AC Failure
[308][301] - Bit 1 Panel AC Trouble - Off
[308][301] - Bit 2 Panel AC Trouble Restore - Off
[308][331] - Bit 1 Module AC Trouble - Off
[308][331] - Bit 2 Module AC Trouble Restore - Off\
Bell Circuit Trouble
[308][302] - Bit 1 Panel Bell Trouble - On
[308][302] - Bit 2 Panel Bell Trouble Restore - On
Fire, Alarm
[308][311] - Bit 3 Fire Trouble - On
[308][311] - Bit 4 Fire Trouble Restore - On
[308][305] - Bit 3 2W Smoke Trouble - On
[308][305] - Bit 4 2W Smoke Trouble Restore - On
Aux Power Supply Trouble
[308][302]
- Bit 5 Panel AUX Trouble - On
[308][302] - Bit 6 Panel AUX Trouble Restore - On
[308][332] - Bit 5 Module AUX Trouble - On
[308][332] - Bit 6 Module AUX Trouble Restore - On
TLM Trouble
[308][302] - Bit 3 Panel TLM Trouble - Off
[308][302] - Bit 4 Panel TLM Trouble Restore - On
General System Tamper
[308][101] - Bit 3 Module Tamper Trouble - Off
[308][101] - Bit 4 Module Tamper Restore - Off
General System Supervisory
[308][332] -
Bit 3 Module Supervisory Trouble - On
[308][332] - Bit 4 Module Supervisory Restore - On 108
•
Openings & Closings
- Sets Residential Dial Reporting
Codes for all openi
ngs and closings
•
Zone Alarm Restore Group -
Disables all zone alar
m restore reporting codes
•
Installer Lead-in/Lead-out
and DLS Lead-in/Lead-out
•
Digit 5 DLS Connection Options
After entering a valid 5-digit te
mplate programming code, the syst
em prompts for the following
data in the sequence listed:
1.
Central Station Telephone Number
Program the required central
station phone number. Press [#] to complete your entry.
This phone number is entered in
to programming section [301][001].
2.
Central Station Account Code (6-digit code)
Program the system account code. All 6 digits must
be entered in order to complete your entry.
This account code is entered in
to programming section [310][000].
3.
DLS Access Code (6-digit code)
Openings/Closings Group
Openings/Closings Programming
Enable All User Open/Close Reports
[308][201] - Bit 1 User Closing - On
[308][201] - Bit 2 User Opening - On
[308][201] - Bit 3 Partition Closing - Off
[308][201] - Bit 4 Partition Opening - Off
[308][201] - Bit 5 Special Closing - On
[308][201] - Bit 6 Special Opening - On
[308][202] - Bit 1 Automatic Closing - On
[308][202] - Bit 3 Automatic Cancel - On
Zone Alarm Restore Group
DLS/Installer Lead In/Out Programming
Restore zone alarm repor
ting codes
[307][001] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][002] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][003] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][004] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][005] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][006] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][007] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][008] - Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
[307][009] - [128] Bit 2 Alarm Restore - Off
DLS/Installer Lead In/Out Group
DLS/Installer Lead In/Out Programming
DLS/Installer Disabled
[308][312] -
Bit 1 Installer Lead In - Off
[308][312] - Bit 2 Installer Lead Out - Off
[308][312] - Bit 3 DLS Lead In - Off
[308][312] - Bit 4 DLS Lead Out - Off
[308][312] - Bit 5 SA Lead In - Off
[308][312] - Bit 6 SA Lead Out - Off
Option
Programming Section
DLS Connection/Call Back Setting
1
[401] Option 1 OFF
Option 3 OFF
Option 4 OFF
[406] 000
Double Call Disabled
Call Back Disabled
User Initiated Call Up Disabled
Number of Rings to Answer On Disabled
2
[401] Option 1 ON
Option 3 OFF
Option 4 OFF
[406] 008
Double Call Enabled
Call Back Disabled
User Initiated Call Up Disabled
Number of Rings to Answer On is 8
3
[401] Option 1 ON
Option 3 ON
Option 4 OFF
[406] 008
Double Call Enabled
Call Back Enabled
User Initiated Call Up Disabled
Number of Rings to Answer On is 8
4
[401] Option 1 ON
Option 3 OFF
Option 4 ON
[406] 008
Double Call Enabled
Call Back Disabled
User Initiated Call Up Enabled
Number of Rings to Answer On is 8 109
Program the required DLS ac
cess code. All 6 digits mu
st be entered in order to complete your entry.
This access code is entered
into programming section [453].
4.
Entry Delay 1 and Exit Delay
Enter the 3-digit entry delay 1 (in seconds
) followed by the desired 3-
digit exit delay (in seconds).
These entries affect all
partitions.
All 3 digits must be entered in orde
r to complete each section entry.
These values are entered in pr
ogramming sections [005][001]-[008]
entry 1 and 3 respectively.
5.
Installer's Code
Enter the 4 or 6-digit installer access code
(dependent on section [041]).
All digits must be entered in order to complete the
section entry.
This code is entered into programming section [006][001].
After the installer code has been programmed the sy
stem returns to the base installer programming menu.
All template programming information defaults
after performing a hardware or software
panel default. The 5-digit template progr
amming
code is defaulted to 01111.
NOTE:
Pressing the pound key (#) advances through te
mplate programming, accepti
ng what is displayed in th
ese locations, potentially o
verwrit-
ing desired programming. Depending on the op
tion programmed, restoring the defaults us
ing template programming may not be possi
ble. 110
Appendix D: Regulatory Approvals
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expre
ssly approved by Digital Security Controls
could void your authority to use this equipment.
This equipment has
been tested and found to co
mply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protectio
n against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed a
nd used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful
interference to radio co
mmunications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference w
ill not occur in a particular installa-
tion. If this equipm
ent does cause harmful interfere
nce to radio or television
reception, which can be deter-mined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct th
e interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
• Re-orient the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
The user may find the following booklet
prepared by the FCC useful: "How to
Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems". This booklet
is available from the U.S. Governme
nt Printing Office, Washington D.C.
20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
This equipment complies with
Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of this
equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, the FCC registra-
tion number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If
requested, this number must be provided to the Telephone Company.
HS2128 Product IdentifierUS: F53AL01BHS2128
REN:0.1B
USOC Jack:RJ-31X
Telephone Connection Requirements
A plug and jack used to connect this
equipment to the pr
emises wiring and
telephone network must comply with th
e applicable FCC Part 68 rules and
requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular
plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compat-
ible modular jack that is also comp
liant. See installation instructions for
details.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number
of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on
a telephone line may result in the
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that
may be connected to a line, as deter-
mined by the total RENs, contact the lo
cal Telephone Company. For products
approved after July 23, 2
001, the REN for this produc
t is part of the product
identifier that has the format.
US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a
decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3)
. For earlier products, the REN is sep-
arately shown on the label.
Incidence of Harm
If this equipment HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HAS2128 causes harm to the
telephone network, the te
lephone company will notif
y you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is
not practical, the Telephone Company will
notify the customer as soon as pos-
sible. Also, you will be advised of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC
if you believe it is necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Equipment or Facilities
The Telephone Company may make change
s in its facilities, equipment, oper-
ations or procedures that could affect
the operation of the
equipment. If this
happens the Telephone Company will provi
de advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications to
maintain uninterrupted service.
Equipment Maintenance Facility
If trouble is experienced with this equipment HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/
HAS21284 for repair or warr
anty information, please
contact the facility indi-
cated below. If the equipment is causi
ng harm to the tele
phone network, the
Telephone Company may request that yo
u disconnect the equipment until the
problem is solved. This eq
uipment is of a type that
is not intended to be
repaired by the end user.
DSC c/o APL Logistics, 757 Douglas
Hill Rd., Lithia Springs, GA 30122
Additional Information
Connection to party line service is subject
to state tariffs. Contact the state
public utility commission,
public service commission
or corporation commis-
sion for information.
Alarm dialling equipment must be able
to seize the telephone line and place a
call in an emergency situation. It must be
able to do this even if other equip-
ment (telephone, answering system, co
mputer modem, etc.) already has the
telephone line in use. To do so, alar
m dialling equipment
must be connected
to a properly installed RJ-
31X jack that is electrically in series with and ahead
of all other equipment attached to the
same telephone line.
Proper installation
is depicted in the figure below. If
you have any questions concerning these
instructions, you should
consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer about installing the RJ-31X
jack and alarm dialling equipment for
you.
INDUSTRY CANADA STATEMENT
NOTICE:
This Equipment, HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HAS2128,
meets the applicable Industry Canada
Terminal Equipment Technical Specifi-
cations. This is confirmed by the regi
stration number. The abbreviation, IC,
before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based
on a Declaration of Conformity indica
ting that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met. It does not im
ply that Industry Canada approved the
equipment
NOTICE:
The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) for this terminal equip-
ment is 0.1. The REN assigned to each
terminal equipment provides an indi-
cation of the maximum number of term
inals allowed to be connected to a
telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any com-
bination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all devices does not exceed five.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maxima
l de terminaux qui peuvent être rac-
cordés à une interface télé
phonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut con-
sister en une combinaiso
n quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que
la somme d’indices d’équivalence de
la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs
n’excède pas 5.
Certification Number:
IC: 160A-HS2128
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe
B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada. 111
4.0.1 UL/ULC Installations
This product has been tested and found in compliance with the following stan-
dards:
UL1610 Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL1023 Household Burglar-Alarm System Units
UL985 Household Fire Warning System Units
UL1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System Units
UL1637 Home Health Care Signaling Equipment
ULC-S304-06Signal Receiving Centre & Premise Burglar Alarm Control Units
ULC-S559-04Equipment for Fire Signal Receiving Centers and Systems
ULC-S545-02 Residential Fire Warning System Control Units
ORD-C1023-1974 Household Burglar-Alarm System Units
This product has also been tested and found in compliance with the ANSI/SIA CP-
01-2010 Control Panel Standard – Features for False Alarm Reduction.
This product is UL/ULC listed under the following categories:
AMCX/AMCXCCentral Stations Alarm Units
APAWPolice-station-connected Alarm Units
DAYRCCentral Station Fire Alarm System Units
UTOU/UTOUC Control Units and Accessories, Household System Type
NBSX/NBSXC Household Burglar Alarm System Units
AMTB Control Panels, SIA False Alarm Reduction
The product is labeled with the UL and ULC listing marks along with the SIA CP-
01 compliance statement (Also Classified in accordance with SIA-CP-01 Standard)
as proof of compliance with the above mentioned standards. For further informa-
tion on this product’s listings please also refer to the official listing guides pub-
lished at the UL web site (www.ul.com) under Online Directions Section.
UL/ULC Residential Fire and Burglary Installations:
For ULC Installations refer to the Standard for the Installation of Residential Fire
Warning Systems, CAN/ULC-S540.
•
All burglary-type zones shall be configured with SEOL or DEOL configura-
tion
(refer to section [002], bit 10 or 11 shall be ON)
•
Use at least one PG9926 or PG9916 Smoke Detector for Fire Installations
(section [001], fire zone shall be programmed as type 025)
•
The entry delay shall not exceed 45 seconds (refer to section [005])
•
The exit delay shall not exceed 60 seconds (refer to section [005])
•
The minimum Bell Time-out is 4 minutes (refer to section [005])
Note:

For ULC Residential Fire Installation
s the minimum Bell Time-out is 5
minutes
For UL Home Health Care Installations the minimum Bell Time-out is 5 min.
For UL Commercial Burglary Installati
ons minimum Bell Time-out is 15 min.
•
Temporal Three Fire Signal shall be enabled (section [013], opt.8 ON)
•
Arm/Disarm Bell Squawk shall be enabled when using wireless key PG4939,
PG4929, PG4949 (section [014], option 1 shall be ON)
•
A code shall be required for bypassing (section [023], option 4 shall be ON)
•
Trouble beeps shall be enabled (section [022], option 7 shall be ON)
•
AC trouble indication LED shall be enabled (Keypad Programming, section
[022], options 5 and 6 shall be ON)
•
DACT Communicator shall be enabled for Supervising Station Monitoring
(section [380], option 1 shall be ON)
Note:

The DACT communicator for this product has no line security.
•
Telephone Line Monitoring (TLM) shall be enabled (section [015], option 7
shall be ON)
Note:

This product is programmed to perform 5 (min.) to 10 (max.) attempts
for communication of an event to the supervising station. If unsuccessful, a
Fail To Communicate (FTC) trouble is generated.

•
Test transmission cycle shall be set for monthly transmission (refer to section
[351])
Note:

For ULC Residential/Commercial installations set for daily test trans-
mission
•
Wireless Supervision window shall be set to 4 hours for Fire Installations
(Wireless Programming, section [804]>[802] shall be programmed with the
value 16)
•
Wireless Supervision window shall be set to 4 hours for Burglary Installa-
tions only (Wireless Programming, section [804]>[802] shall be programmed
with the value 96)
•
RF Jam detection shall be enabled (refer to Wireless Programming (section
[804][801], option 00 shall be OFF)
•
New Alarms will Disconnect 2-way Audio (section [022], opt 6 OFF)
UL Central Station and Police Connect with Standard or Encrypted Line Secu-
rity Service
•
The installation must use the Models TL2803G(R) IP/3G Interface,
3G2080(R) 3G Interface or TL280(R) IP Interface, which communicates
over Cellular Data Network or an Ethernet network 10/100BaseT to the com-
patible Sur-Gard System I/II/III/IV receiver.
•
Polling time shall be 200 seconds and compromise detection time shall be 6
min.
•
For Encrypted line security applications, the Models TL2803G(R) IP/3G
Interface, 3G2080(R) 3G Interface or TL280(R) IP Interface shall have the
Encryption Key enabled (AES128 bit encryption algorithm is validated
under NIST Certificate No.xxx
•
Wireless Supervision window shall be enabled (refer to Wireless Program-
ming, sections [804]>[802])
UL Local, Central Station and Police Connect with No Line Security Service
•
The installation shall use a Bell which is UL Listed for Mercantile local
alarms. An example of a UL Listed bell that can be used is Amseco Model
MBL10B bell with Model AB-12 bell housing. Connections from the control
unit to the bell shall be made in conduit. (Optional for central Station)
•
The bell timeout shall be programmed for 15 minutes minimum
•
At least one system remote keypad with tamper switch shall be employed
•
The integral DACT shall be enabled and shall be programmed to provide a
low battery transmission
•
The control panel shall be in the attack resistant enclosure. The separately
listed CMC-1 or PC4050CA attack resistant enclosure shall be employed
•
The maximum entry delay time shall not exceed 45s as a result of the attack
test. The maximum exit delay time shall not exceed 60 s.
•
A tamper switch shall be used to protect the enclosure cover of the control
unit. A tamper switch shall also be used on the keypad rear to detect removal
from the wall.
•
24 h check in transmission shall be enabled
•
Open/Closing acknowledgement enabled.(Not Police Station)
•
The Installation shall use the internal dialer (DACT) alone or in conjunction
with Models TL2803G(R) IP/3G Interface, 3G2080(R) 3G Interface or
TL280(R) IP Interface, which communicates over Cellular Data Network or
an Ethernet network 10/100BaseT to the compatible Sur-Gard System I/II/
III/IV receiver.
UL Home Health Care Signaling Equipment
•
There must be at least two keypads, one of either one of the compatible key-
pads models HS2LED, HS2LCD(P), HS2ICN(P), HS2LCDRF(P)9, HS2IC-
NRF(P)9
•
Each system shall be programmed to activate an audible Trouble signal
within 90 seconds upon loss of microprocessor memory
ULC Central Station Fire and Burglary Monitoring Installations
•
For installation requirements, levels of security, communication modules and
configurations (Refer to the ULC Installation Information Sheet, DSC
#29002157)
•
Use a CSA/cUL approved transformer (hardwired connections required for
Fire Monitoring)
•
All tamper circuits may be connected to the same zone
Programming
The notes in the programming sections of the PowerSeries Neo Reference Manual
describing the system configurations for UL/ULC listed installations shall be
implemented.
Control of the Protected Premises
In order to have a UL certificated system, the protected area is to be under the
responsibility of one ownership and management (i.e., one business under one
name). This may be a group of buildings attached or unattached with different
addresses but under the responsibility of someone having mutual interest. The per-
son of mutual interest is not the alarm-installing company.
Note:
This does not apply to strip mall applications where each independent busi-
ness must have their own separate alarm system.
e.g.,1: a commercial partitioned system that has an office and a warehouse area in a
building where each area can be armed or disarmed independently.
e.g.,2: a residential system partitioned so that the garage area is armed separately
from the house.
Each of the above examples is under the sole responsibility of a single owner. The
bell and DACT power supply must be in a protected area including partitioned sys-
tems. The bell and DACT power supply must be located where it can be heard by
the person or persons responsible for maintaining the security system during the
daily arming cycle.
Bell Location
The alarm sounding device (bell) shall be located where it can be heard by the per-
son operating the security system during the daily arming and disarming cycle.
Protection of the Control Unit
The local control unit and the local power supply must be protected in one of the
following ways:
•
The control unit and audible alarm device must be in a protected area which
is armed 24 hours a day.
•
Each partition must arm the area protecting the control unit and the audible
alarm device power supply. This may require duplicate protection armed by
each partition. Access to this protected area, without causing and alarm, will
require that all partitions be disarmed.
•
In all cases described above, the protected area for the control unit must be
programmed as not-bypassable.
Casual Users
The installer should caution the user(s) not to give system information (e.g., codes,
bypass methods, etc.) to casual users (baby-sitters or service people). Only the
One-Time Use codes shall be given to casual users.
User Information
The installer should advise the users and note in the User’s Manual:
•
Service organization name and telephone number
•
The programmed exit time
•
The programmed entry time
•
Test system weekly
•
The installer code cannot arm or disarm the system 112
Aux Loading and Battery Selection
HS2128/HS2064/HS2032/HS2016
Board current draw mA
UL Resi Burg
ULC Resi Burg
UL Com Burg
UL Resi Fire
UL Home Health Care
ULC Resi Fire
ULC Com Burg
ULC Fire Monitoring
EN50131
Grade 2/Class II
Max AUX (NSC) current loading
0.7A
0.7A
0.5A
0.5A
Max BELL (Alarm) current loading
0.7A
0.7A
0.7A
0.7A (no local alarm notifica-
tion allowed, only remote
transmission to SRC)
0.7A
UL/ULC Listed enclosure
PC500C
PC5003C
CMC-1
PC4050CAR
PC5003C
PC5003C
PC4050CR (red/transfomer
mounted inside)
PC5003C
Power UC1
Transformer requirements
16.5V/40VA (plug in
type)
PTC1640U (USA)
PTC1640CG (CND)
FTC1637 (cUL listed)
16.5V/37VA (Hardwired type,
mounted inside the enclosure
or outside using electrical
box)
16.5V/40VA
(hardwired type,
mounted inside the
cabinet)
Battery Capacity requirements
7Ah
7Ah
14Ah (2 x 7Ah in parallel) 14Ah (2 x 7Ah in parallel)
7Ah
Standby Time
4 hours
4 hours
24 hours
24 hours
12 hours
Alarm time
4 minutes
15 minutes
4 min (UL resi fire)
5 min (Home Health Care
and ULC Resi Fire)
5 minutes (Alarm Transmis-
sion only)
N/A
Recharging current setting
mA, 700mA
mA, 700mA
mA, 700mA
mA, 700mA
mA, 700mA 113
4.0.2 SIA False Alar
m Reduction Installations: Quick Reference
Minimum required system consists of one Control unit model HS2128 or HS2064 or HS2032 or HS2016 and any one of the compatible l
isted keypads: HS2LCDRF9, HS2LC-
DRFP9, HS2ICNRF9, HS2ICNRFP9, HS2LCD, HS2LCDP, HS2ICN, HS2ICNP, HS2LED.
The following wireless keys can also be used in SIA compatible installations: PG9929, PG9939,PG9949.
NOTE:
For models PG9929 and PG9939, the panic/emergency key shall be disabled for SIA compliant installations.
For a list of the default values programmed when the unit is shipped from the factory, and for any other programming informatio
n, refer to the table below.
The following optional subassembly modules also bear the SIA CP-01-2010 classification and may be used if desired: HSM2108 zone
expander, HSM2208 PGM output module,
HSM2300 auxiliary power supply, HSM2204 output module, HSM2HOST9 2-way wireless transceiver, PG9901 indoor siren, PG9911 outdoo
r siren, and 3G2080(R)/ TL2803G(R)/
TL280(R) cellular and PSDN communication module.
Caution
•
For SIA FAR installations use only modules/devices that are listed on this page.
•
Fire Alarm Verification feature (Auto Verified Fire Zone type [025]) is not supported on 2-wire smoke detectors zones, model F
SA-
210B(T)(S)(ST)(LST)(R)(RT)(RD)(RST)(LRST). This feature may be enabled for 4-wire smoke detectors only (FSA-410B(T)(S)(ST)(LST)
(R)(RT)(RST)(LRST) and wire-
less detectors PG9916/PG9926). The fire alarm delay is 60s.
•
Call Waiting Cancel (Section [382], Option 4) feature on a non-Call Waiting line will prevent successful communication to the
supervising station.
•
All smoke detectors on the system must be tested annually by conducting the Installer Walk Test. Prior to exiting walk test mo
de, a sensor reset must be done on the system,
[*][7][2], to reset all latching 4-wire smoke detectors. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the detector for
details.
Notes
•
Programming at installation may be subordinate to other UL requirements for the intended application.
•
Cross zones have the ability to individually protect the intended area (e.g. motion detectors which overlap).
•
Cross zoning is not recommended for line security Installations nor is it to be implemented on exit/entry zones.
•
This control panel has a communication delay of 30 seconds. It can be removed or increased up to 45 seconds by the end user in
consultation with the installer.
•
The security system shall be installed with the sounding device activated and the communicator enabled for transmission using
SIA or CID format.
•
ULC commercial burglary installations require DEOL resistors.
SIA Feature Programming Section
Comments
Range/Default
Requirement
Exit Time
[005]>[001], option 3
Access to Entry and Exit delays and Bell Time Out for the system.
Range
:
45- 255 seconds
Default:
60 sec.
Required
(programmable)
Progress Annunciation/Disable - for Silent Exit
[014], option 6 ON
Enables audible exit beeps from the keypad for the duration of exit delay. Individual keypads may be disabled
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
Exit Delay Restart
[018], option 7
Opening a Delay zone door after it has already been opened and closed
during an exit delay restarts the exit delay timer.
Default:
Enabled
Required
Auto Stay Arm on Un-vacated Premises
[001]>[001]-[128] Zone type 05, 06,09
Function key: Forces the system to arm in Stay mode if the occupant does
not exit the premises after pressing the Away function key.
If no exit after full arm
Default:
Enabled
Required
Exit Time and Progress Annunciation/Disable
or Remote Arming
[861]>[001]-[005], option 4
System times and audible exit beeps can be disabled when using the wire-
less key to stay arm the system. When away arming, audible exit beeps
can not be disabled.
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
Entry delay(s)
[005]>[001]-[008], options 1 and 2
Access to entry and exit delays and bell time out for the system
Note:
Combined entry delay and communications delay (abort window)
shall not exceed 60s.
Range:
30 sec. to 4 min.
Default:
30 sec.
Required
(programmable)
Abort Window for Non-Fire zones
[002]>[001]-[128], option 7 ON
Access to zone attributes, i.e., swinger shutdown, transmission delay and
cross zone. May be disabled by zone or zone type.
Default:
Enabled
Required
Abort Window Time - for Non-Fire zones
[377]>[002], option 1
Access to the programmable delay before communicating alarms
Note:
Combined entry delay and communications delay (abort window)
shall not exceed 60 seconds.
Range:
00 - 45 sec.
Default:
30 sees
Required
(programmable)
Abort Annunciation
An audible tone is generated when an alarm is aborted during the abort
window.
Hard-coded ON
Required
Duress Feature
[*][5]> master code
> user 2-95> 5> 2
When this feature is enabled, selected user codes send a duress reporting
code to the central station when used to perform any function on the sys-
tem. Section [019], option [6] must be enabled.
Default:
NRequired
Cancel Window
[377]>[002], option 6
Access to the communications cancel window. Minimum duration must
be 5 minutes.
Range:
005-255
Default:
005
Cancel Annunciation
[308]>[001], option 8
Access to the reporting code for Alarm Canceled.
A Cancel was transmitted
Default:
Enabled
Required
Cross Zoning
[042]>Selection 3, option 002
Enables cross zoning for entire system. Zones can be enabled for cross zon-
ing via zone attribute option 8 in sections [002][101] - [128].
Programming required
Default:
Disabled
Required
Burglary Verification Timer
[005]>[000], option 3
Access to the programmable Cross Zone timer.
Range:
000-255 sec.
Default:
60 seconds
Allowed
Swinger Shutdown for Alarms
[377]>[001], option 1
Access to the swinger shutdown limit for zone alarms
For all non-fire zones, shut down at 1 to 6 trips.
Default:
2 trips
Required
(programmable)
Swinger Shutdown Enable
[002]>[001] - [128], option 6 ON
Access to swinger shutdown, transmission delay and cross zone attributes.
Zone attribute option 6 (Swinger Shutdown enabled) is ON.
Non-police response zones
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
24-Hr. Auto-verified Fire
[001]>[001]-[128], Zone type 025 ON
Access to 24-Hr. Auto-verified Fire
Activates if Not restored within the specified time.
Must choose zone type for application Required
Call Waiting Cancel
[382], option 4 OFF
Access to the dialing sequence used to disable call waiting. Call waiting
string can be programmed in [034]
Depends on user phone line
Default:
Disabled
Required
System Test:
[*][6] Master Code, option 4
The system activates all keypad sounders, bells or sirens for 2 seconds
and all keypad lights turn on. Refer to user manual
(part no. 29008365).
Wa l k Te s t M o d e :
[*][8][Installer code][901]
This mode is used to test each zone on the system for proper functionality.
Walk Test Communications
[382], option 2
Enables communication of zone alarms while walk test is active.
Default:
Disabled
Walk Test Start/ End Reporting Codes
[308][401], options 1 and 2
Access to the reporting codes for walk test start and end times. 114
Appendix E: ASCII Characters
!“#
$%&‘ ( ) *+, - . /012345678
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
53 54 55 56
9: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
77 78 79 80
QRSTUVWXYZ [
￥
]^_
╲
abcdefgh
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
i j k lmnopqrstuvwxyz{
׀}⃗⃖
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 160
□「」 ֻ▪ ｦ
ｱｨｩｪｫｶ
ｭｮｼￚｱｲｩｪｫｶ
キク
161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184
ケコサシスセソタダツテトナニヌネノハヒフヘホマミ
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
ムメモヤユョラリルレロワン゙
▢
αäβƐμσρϧ ʃ
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232
⊣ ϳｘ¢￡ñÖｐｑθœΩϋ Σπ
X
ｙ千 Ⴌ Ħ ÷ ▆
233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 115
Appendix F: Wiring Diagrams
HS2016, HS2032, HS2064, HS2
128 UL/ULC Wiring Diagram
Compatible
System Keypads
Bell/Siren
700mA (max)
Observe Polarity.
120V
AC
/60Hz
Primary
16.5V
AC
/40VA
NOTE:
Battery capacity for 4h standby is at least
4Ah. (Max. Aux current must not exceed 700mA).
Battery capacity for 24h standby is 14Ah (Max.
Aux current must not exceed 470mA). Recommended
Batteries: DSC BD4-12 or DSC BD7-12.
12V 4.0Ah/7Ah
12V 7Ah
RJ-31X Telephone
Plug 26 AWG
Maximum battery
charge current
is 400mA
AUX+
PGM2
2k2
EOLR
Normally Open
Push-button Switch
RESISTOR
ID
2-WIRE SMOKE
BELL CIRCUIT
SINGLE ZONE EOL
NOTE:
Refer to Installation Manual & Smoke
Detector Instruction Sheet when locating detectors.
35mA
max.
Class 2 Transformer
Model DSC PTD1640U
SIA-FAR Minimum System Requirements:
1 HS2016/2032/2064/2128 Panel
2 Local annunciation devices
Local annunciation devices may be
any combination of these keypads:
HS2LCD, HS2LCDP, HS2ICN, HS2ICNP, HS2LED

220
POWER LIMITED
POWER LIMITED
DO NOT
combine different models on the same circuit
as operation may be impaired.
Ground wire from
building electrical
installation
IMPORTANT: Minimum
6.4mm (1/4”)
separation must be
Temperature Range: 0°C-49°C [32°F-120°F] / Maximum Humidity:
93% R.H.
The HS2016/2032/2064/2128 is UL Listed for limited energy
installations per NEC Article 760. Recognized limited energy cable
should be used. Observe NEC wiring requirements and local
codes defined by the authority having jurisdiction. Security
detection devices that require power from the control panel must
be UL Listed for the intended application and operate over the
range of 11.6-12.6VDC (residential), 12.0VDC (commercial).
PG9904(P), PG9934(P), and PG9974(P) are recommended UL
Listed motion detectors. Compatible system keypads:
HS2LCDRF(4)(8)(9), HS2LCDRFP(4)(8)(9), HS2ICNRF(4)(8)(9),
HS2ICNRFP(4)(8)(9), HS2LCD, HS2LCDP, HS2ICN, HS2ICNP, HS2LED
This device complies with Parts 15 and 68 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following 2 conditions: [1] this device may not cause harmful
interference and [2] this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Model: HS2128 FCC Reg. No. F53AL01BPHS2128
REN = 0.1B Plug Type: RJ-31X MADE IN CANADA
ULC NOTES
•
For ULC Listed Fire Monitoring Installations & module
requirements, please refer to the ULC Installation
Information Sheet, part #29002157.
• Use a CSA/cUL transformer, hardwired.
• All tamper circuits may be connected to the same
zone.
• Use ULC-LA for AC Power indication.
(a) The delay (power-up) time marked on the installation wiring diagram of the smoke detector or on the installed
smoke detector(s) is to be used.
*AUX Wiring
Use No.14-22 AWG conductor
AUX+ and Keybus (RED) are internally
connected. Total current draw from
keypads, PGM Outputs and AUX circuits
must not exceed 700mA.
NOTE:
Do not connect
transformer to a
receptacle controlled
by a switch.
FSA-210B Series
NOTE:
Refer to the FSA-210 Installation Manual for more details.
Maximum Number of Detectors: 18
HS2016/2032/2064/2128 UL/ULC Wiring Diagram
NAME
MODEL
MAX #
BASE
COMPATABILITY ID
DSC
NONE
FS200
SEE NOTE

Control panel is suitable for the following UL installations: (1)
Grade AA Central Station and Grade AA Police
Connect with high line security (using T-LINK to communicate to the Sur-Gard MLR-IP Receiver). (2) Household Fire
and Grade A Household Burglary and Home Health Care Signaling Equipment (3) Grade A Local I Grade B Central
Station and Police Connect with basic line security (4) Grade C Central Station. Refer to Installation Manual

ULC-LA
HS2016-4
HS2064
HS2128
Only
HS2016-4
HS2032
HS2064
HS2128
2-WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS
PGM CONNECTIONS
700mA*
(see Aux
note above)
CORBUS
AUX INPUT
WIRING
4-WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS
Smoke detector must be latching type (ex. PG4926 Series)
To reset smoke detector, enter [
✱
][7][2]
TYPICAL ZONE CIRCUITS
CORBUS
Compatibility Identifier: HS2-1
Maximum Operating Voltage: 13.8
Maximum Circuit Resistance: 240 ohm (total)
NOTE: For ULC installations, please refer to the ULC Installation Information Sheet part#29002157. 116
HS2016/032/064/128 Standard Wiring Diagram For NA
PC Boar d
Cabinet
Stand Of f
Primar y:120V AC/60Hz.
Secondary: 16.5VDC 40V A
DSCPTD 1640U
Class II Tr ansf ormer
NO TE: Do not connect
transf ormer to receptacle
controlled by a switch
CON1
BAT+BA T-
POWER LIMITED
NON-POWER LIMITED
DSC Model BD7-12
or equivalent
Batter y
StandbyTime:
24Hrs min.
BLA CK
RED
TB-2

AC
+
AUX
-
+
BELL
DSC
UA 50 3
Cable Tie (not supplied) recommended
HS2016-4
HS2064
HS2128
Only
HS2016-4
HS2032
HS2064
HS2128
Only
HS2016/032/064/128
High Voltage . Disconnect AC

Power
and telephone lines before servicing
WARNING:
12V / 7 AHr
12V / 7 AHr
North America Only
-
BLK
RED
YEL
GRN
PGM
1
2
PGM
34
COM
COM
COM
Z1
COM
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
Z8
GND
Tip
Ring
R-1
T-1
PE (Protective Earth) 117
Zone Wiring
Zones can be wired for Normally
Open, Normally Closed Con-
tacts with Single-end-of-line (SEO
L) resistors or Double End-
of-Line (DEOL) resistors. Ob
serve the following guidelines
For UL Listed Installations
use SEOL or DEOL only.
Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG
Do
NOT
use shielded wire
Wire run resistance shall not exceed 100


refer to the chart
below:
Section [001-004] Sele
cts Zone Definition
Section [013] Opt [1] Selects Norm
ally Closed or EOL resistors
Section [013] Opt [2] Selects
Single EOL or Double EOL resis-
tors.
Zone Status
Loop Resistance
- 0

(shorted wire/loop)
- 5600

(contact closed)
- infinite (broken wire, open)
- 11,200

(contact open)
Loop Status
Fault
Secure
Tamper
Violated
Bell Wiring
These terminals supply
700mA of current at 12V
DC
for commercial
installations and 11.1-12.6 V
DC
for residential installations
(e.g.DSC SD-15 WULF). To co
mply with NFPA 72 Temporal
Three Pattern requirements:
Program
Section [013] Opt [8]

ON
.
The Bell output is supervised a
nd power limited. If
unused, connect
a 1000

resistor across Bell+ and Be
ll- to prevent the panel from
displaying a
trouble. See
[

][2].
NOTE: Bell output is current limited
by 2A PTC
NOTE:
Steady, Pulsed and Tempo-
ral Three Pattern alarms are sup-
ported.
Normally Closed Loops - Do NOT use for UL Installations
Single End-of-Line Resistor Wiring
Double End-of-Line Resistor Wiring
OBSERVE
POLARITY
BELL/SIREN
700mA (max.) 118
Telephone Line Wiring
PGM Wiring
PGMs switch to ground when
activated by control panel.
Connect the positive side of the devi
ce to be activated to the AUX+
Terminal. Connect the negative terminal to the PGM.
current output is as follows
•
PGM 1, 3, 4..................... 50mA
•
PGM 2........................... 300mA
For currents levels greater than 300mA a UL listed RM-1 or RM-2
relay module is required.
PGM2 can also be used for 2-wire smoke detectors.
NOTE: Use SEOL resistors on FIRE ZONES ONLY.
PGM 1, LED Output with current limiting resistor and Optional
Relay driver output

2-wire Smoke Detectors Initiating Circuit
• Style B (Class B), Supervised, Power Limited
• Compatibility Identifier ................................................PC18-1
• DC Output Voltage ............................................ 9.8-13.8 VDC
• Detector Load .................................................... 2 mA (MAX)
• Single-end-of-line (SEOL) Resistor ............................ 2200

• Loop Resistance ................................................... 24

(MAX)
• Standby Impedance ...........
..............
................ 1020

• Alarm Impedance................................................ 570

(MAX)
• Alarm Current ................................................... 89 mA (MAX)
• Maximum number of 2-wire Smoke Detectors.................... 18
2-wire Smoke Detectors
Compatibility ID For FSA-210 Series is: FS200
4-wire Smoke Detectors
Wire the telephone connection terminals (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an RJ-
31x Connector as indicated.
For connection of multiple devices to the phone line, wire in the
sequence shown.
Telephone format is programmed in section [350].
Telephone Call Directions are pr
ogrammed in section [351]-[376].
RM-1/RM-2 POWER LOOP
SUPERVISORY RELAY
Compatible DSC 2-wire smoke detectors:
FSA-210A Series for ULC
FSA-210B Series for UL
FSA-210C Series for EU

Compatible DSC 4-wire smoke detectors:
FSA-410A Series for ULC
FSA-410B Series for UL
FSA-410C Series for EU
T-1
R-1
TIP
RING
RJ-31X
RED
GRN
BRN
GRA 119
Appendix G: Specifications
Zone Configuration
•
16, 32, 64, or 128 wireless zones supported and 8 hardwired zones
available on the controller
•
40 zone types and 14 programmable zone attributes
•
Zone configurations available: nor
mally closed, single EOL and DEOL
supervised
•
Hardwired zone expansion (fully s
upervised) available using the model
HSM2108 (eight zone expander module)
•
Wireless zone expansion (fully
supervised) available using the
HSM2Host 2-way wireless integrat
ion module (operating at 915MHz
(North America), 433MHz (Eur
ope) and 868MHz (international)
Access Codes
•
Up to 97 access codes: 94 (level 2-EN),
one system master code (level
3-EN), one installer code (level
3-EN), and one maintenance code
•
Programmable attributes for each user code (see page 20)
•
When using 6-digit access codes, the
minimum number of variations of
access codes are 10526 for HS2128/HS2064,13888 for HS2032 and
20833 for HS2016
Warning Device Output
•
Integral sounder capable of 85 dB @ 3m, self-powered type Z
•
2 remote, wireless indoor/outdoor
warning devices s
upported: models
PGX901 (indoor), PGX911 (
outdoor) (X=4, 8, or 9)
•
Programmable as steady, pulsed or temporal three (as per ISO8201)
and temporal four
(CO alarm) output
•
Warning device sounds alarms in the
following priority: fire, CO, med-
ical, burg
Memory
•
CMOS EEPROM memory
•
Retains programming and system stat
us on AC or battery failure for 20
years min. (not verified by UL)
Power Supply
Transformer: DSC PTD1640U
Primary:120V, 60Hz Class II
Secondary:16.5VAC, 40VA Max.
Regulated power supply:
• 700mA auxiliary supply, 12V DC
• Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) for Bell, Aux+ and
Battery terminals
• Reverse battery detection/protection
• Supervision for AC power and low battery
• Normal and high current battery charge options
• Supervised battery charging circuit
Current draw (panel): 85mA (nominal) 2A(Max)
Bell Output:
• 12V, 700mA supervised (1k Ohm) bell output (current lim-
ited at 2 amps)
• Steady, Pulsed, Temporal 3 fire, CO alarm cadences
• Bell short detection (software + hardware)
Aux+:
• Voltage range = 9.6V - 13.8V DC
• Current = 700mA (shared with PGM outputs)
•
Output ripple voltage: 270mVp-p max.
•
Onboard programmable outputs:
• PGM 1 - 50mA switched programmable output
• PGM 2 - 300mA current-limited switched programmable out-
put. 2-Wire smoke detectors (
90mA current limited) are sup-
ported using this PGM
• PGM 3 - 50mA switched programmable output
• PGM 4 - 50mA switched programmable output
• Hardware PGM over current protection
Battery
•
12V sealed lead acid, rechargeable
•
Battery capacity:
• 4Ah (PS4-12)
• 7Ah (BD7-12)
• 14Ah
•
Maximum standby time: 24 hours (wit
h 14Ah battery and Aux current
limited to 470mA)
•
Recharging time to 80% 72 hours
•
Recharging rate: 240mA (12 hours max.), 480mA (24 hour backup)
•
Backup time: 24 hours (UL)
•
Battery lifespan: 3-5 years
•
Low battery trouble indi
cation threshold 11.5VDC
•
Battery restore voltage 12.5V
•
Main board current draw (battery only):
• HS2016/32/64/128 (no altern
ate communicator) standby
80mA DC
• HS2016/32/64/128, (includi
ng alternate communicator)
standby190mA DC
• Transmit (alternate communicator module)195mA DC
•
Resettable fuses (PTC) used on circuit board
•
Supervision for loss of primary power
source (AC fail), battery loss or
battery low voltage (battery troubl
e) with indication provided on the
keypad
•
Internal clock locked to AC power frequency
Operating Environmental Conditions
•
Temperature range: UL= 0°C to +49°C (32°F-120°F),
•
Relative humidity: <93% non condensing
Alarm Transmitter Equipm
ent (ATE) Specification
•
Digital dialer integral to the main control board
•
Supports SIA and Contact ID
•
Complies with TS203 021-1, -2, -3 Telecom equipment requirements
and EN50136-1-1, EN50136-2-1, EN50136-2-3 ATS 2
•
Optional Dual IP/Cellular co
mmunicators (3G2080(R)/ TL2803G(R)/
TL280(R)) can be installed in the same
enclosure and configured as pri-
mary or back-up, with
AES 128-bit encryption
•
Compliant with EN50136-1-1,
EN50136-2-1 ATS2 requirements
System Supervision Features
The PowerSeries Neo continuously moni
tors a number of possible trou-
ble conditions and provides audible a
nd visual indication at the keypad.
Trouble conditions include:
• AC power failure
• Zone trouble
• Fire trouble
• Telephone line trouble
• Communicator trouble
• Low battery condition
•RF jam
• AUX power supply fault
• Failure to communicate
• Module fault (supervisory or tamper)
Additional Features
•
2-way wireless device support
•
Visual verification
(images + audio)*
•
Proximity tag support
•
PGM scheduling
•
Quick arming
•
User, partition, module, zone and system labels
•
Programmable system loop response
•
Keypad and panel software ve
rsions viewable through keypad
•
Doorbell zone type
•
Low battery PGM type
*Feature not evaluated by UL/ULC. 120
Guidelines for Locating
Smoke & CO Detectors
The following information is for general gui
dance only and it is recomme
nded that local fire codes a
nd regulations be consulted
when
locating and installing smoke and CO alarms.
Smoke Detectors
Research indicates that all hostile fires in homes generate smoke to a greater or lesser extent. Detectable quantities of smoke
precede
detectable levels of heat in mo
st cases. Smoke alarms should be
installed outside of each sleepi
ng area and on each storey of t
he home.
DSC recommends that additional
smoke alarms beyond those required for minimum pr
otection be inst
alled. Additional areas that
should be protected include:
the basement; bedrooms, especially
where smokers sleep; dining room
s; furnace and utility rooms; a
nd
any hallways not protecte
d by the required units.
On smooth ceilings, detectors may
be spaced 9.1m (30 feet) apart as a guide. Ot
her spacing may be requi
red depending on ceiling

height, air movement, the presence of jois
ts, uninsulated ceilings, etc. Consult Nati
onal Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, CAN/ULC-S553
-
02 or other appropriate national standa
rds for installation recommendations.
•
Do not locate smoke detectors at the top of
peaked or gabled ceilings;
dead air space in these loca
tions may prevent smoke det
ection.
•
Avoid areas with turbulent air flow, such
as near doors, fans or windo
ws. Rapid air movement around
the detector may prevent
smoke from entering the unit.
•
Do not locate detectors
in areas of high humidity.
•
Do not locate detector
s in areas where the temperature rises above 38
o
C

(100
o
F) or falls below 5
o
C (41
o
F).
Smoke detectors should always be
installed in USA in accordance with section 11
of NFPA 72, the National
Fire Alarm Code: 11.5.
1.1.
Where required by applicable laws, codes, or
standards for a specific type of occupa
ncy, approved single- and multiple-station
smoke
alarms shall be installed as follows:
1.
In all sleeping rooms and guest rooms.
2.
Outside of each separate dwe
lling unit sleeping area, within 6.4 m (21 ft) of
any door to a sleeping room, the distance measu
red
along a path of travel.
3.
On every level of a dwelli
ng unit, including basements.
4.
On every level of a residential board a
nd care occupancy (small facil
ity), including basements and excluding crawl spaces and

unfinished attics.
5.
In the living area(s
) of a guest suite.
6.
In the living area(s) of a
residential board an
d care occupancy
(small facility).
CO Detectors
CO gas moves freely in the air. The human body is most vulnerable to the effects of CO gas during
sleeping hours. For maximum protection, a CO alarm should be located outside primary sleeping
areas or on each level of your home. Figure 5 indicates the suggested locations in the home. The
electronic sensor detects carbon monoxide, meas
ures the concentration and sounds a loud alarm
before a poten
tially harmful le
vel is reached.
Do
NOT
place the CO alarm in the following areas:
•
Where the temperature may drop below -10ºC or exceed 40 ºC.
•
Near paint thinner fumes.
•
Within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of open flame appl
iances such as furnaces, stoves and fireplaces.
•
In exhaust streams from gas engines, vents, flues or chimneys.
•
Do not place in close proximity to an automobile
exhaust pipe; this will damage the detector.
Figure 3a
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 1
GROUND
FLOOR
BASEMENT
KITCHEN
GARAGE
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR
Figure 5 121
Limited Warranty
Digital Security Controls warrants the original purchaser that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the pro
duct shall be free of defects in
materials and workmanship under normal use. Du
ring the warranty period, Digital Security Controls shall, at its option, repair
or replace any defective product
upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labour
and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are war
ranted for the remainder of the
original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original purchaser must promptly notify Digital Security Contro
ls in writing that there is defect in
material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period. There is
absolutely no warranty on software
and all software products are sold as a user license under the terms of the software license agreement included with the produc
t. The Customer assumes all
responsibility for the proper selection, installation, operation a
nd maintenance of any products purchased from DSC. Custom pro
ducts are only warranted to the
extent that they do not function upon delivery. In such cases, DSC can replace or credit at its option.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any cu
stomer within Canada and the United States, with the exceptio
n that Digital Security Controls
shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distribut
ors and dealers have a warranty
program. Anyone returning goods to Digital Security Controls must first obtain an authorization number. Digital Security Contro
ls will not accept any shipment
whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and wo
rkmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
• damage incurred in shipping or handling;
• damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
• damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or water dama
ge;
• damage caused by unauthorized attachment,
alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
• damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripheral
s were supplied by Digital Security Controls Ltd.);
• defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
• damage caused by use of the products for purp
oses other than those for which it was designed;
• damage from improper maintenance;
• damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Items Not Covered by Warranty
In addition to the items which void the Warranty, the following items shall not be covered by Warranty: (i) freight cost to the
repair centre; (ii) products
which are not identified with DSC's product label and lot number or
serial number; (iii) products disassembled or repaired in s
uch a manner as to adversely
affect performance or prevent adequate inspection or testing to verify any warranty claim. Access cards or tags returned for re
placement under warranty will
be credited or replaced at DSC's option. Products not covered by
this warranty, or otherwise out of warranty due to age, misuse
, or damage shall be
evaluated, and a repair estimate shall be
provided. No repair work will be performed until a valid purchase order is received f
rom the Customer and a Return
Merchandise Authorization number (RMA) is issued by DSC's Customer Service.
Digital Security Controls Ltd.’s liability for failure to repa
ir the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of a
ttempts will be limited to a
replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of
warranty. Under no circumstances shall Digital Security Contr
ols be liable for any special,
incidental, or consequential dama
ges based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability, or any ot
her legal theory. Such damages
include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the produc
t or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of sub
stitute or replacement equipment,
facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims
of third parties, including customers, and injury to property.
The laws of some jurisdictions limit
or do not allow the disclaimer of consequential damages. If the
laws of such a jurisdiction apply to any claim by or against DS
C, the limitations and
disclaimers contained here shall be to the greatest extent permitted by law. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitati
on of incidental or consequential
damages, so that the above may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (
including all implied warranties
of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) and of
all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Secu
rity Controls. Digital Security
Controls neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any
other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to ch
ange this warranty, nor to
assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. This disclaimer of warranties and limited warranty are g
overned by the laws of the
province of Ontario, Canada.
WARNING: Digital Security Controls recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite
frequent testing, and
due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as
expected.
Out of Warranty Repairs
Digital Security Controls will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory accor
ding to the following conditions.
Anyone returning goods to Digital Security Controls must first obtain an authorization number. Digital Security Controls will n
ot accept any shipment
whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Digital Security Controls determines to be repair
able will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Digital Sec
urity Controls has
predetermined and which may be revised from time
to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Digital Security Controls determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product ava
ilable at that time. The current
market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING - READ CAREFULLY
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to brin
g each item in this warning to the
attention of the users of this system.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, however, involving fire, burgl
ary, or other types of emergencies
where it may not provide protection. Any alarm system of any type
may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as exp
ected for a variety of reasons.
Some but not all of these reasons may be:
•

Inadequate Installation
A security system must be installed properly in order to provide adequate protection. Every installation should be evaluated by
a security professional to ensure
that all access points and areas are covered. Locks and latche
s on windows and doors must be secu
re and operate as intended. Wi
ndows, doors, walls, ceilings and
other building materials must be of sufficient strength and construction to provide the level of protection expected. A reevalu
ation must be done during and after
any construction activity. An evaluation by the fire and/or poli
ce department is highly recommended if this service is availabl
e.
Criminal Knowledge
This system contains security features which were known to be effective at the time of manufacture. It is possible for persons
with criminal intent to develop
techniques which reduce the effectiveness of these features. It is
important that a security system be reviewed periodically to
ensure that its features remain
effective and that it be updated or replaced if it is found that it does not provide the protection expected.
• Access by Intruders
Intruders may enter through an unprotected access point, circumvent a sensing device, evade detection by moving through an area
of insufficient coverage,
disconnect a warning device, or interfere with or prevent the proper operation of the system.
• Power Failure
Control units, intrusion detectors, smoke detectors and many othe
r security devices require an adequate power supply for proper
operation. If a device operates
from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be charged, in good
condition and installed correctly. If a device
operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will
render that device inoperative while it does not have power. P
ower interruptions of any length
are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a security system. After a power in
terruption has occurred,
immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
This system’s wireless transmitters have been designed to pr
ovide several years of battery
life under normal conditions. The ex
pected battery life is a function of
the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or large temperatur
e fluctuations may reduce the
expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be
replaced, this monitor may fail to
operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
• Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which
could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path o
r deliberate jamming or other
inadvertent radio signal interference.
• System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inabi
lity to reach the device in time, or
unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alar
m system and that they know how to
respond when the system indicates an alarm.
•Smoke Detectors
Smoke detectors that are a part of this system may not properly
alert occupants of a fire for a number of reasons, some of whic
h follow. The smoke detectors may
have been improperly installed or positioned. Smoke may not be able to reach the smoke detectors, such as when the fire is in a
chimney, walls or roofs, or on
the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not detect
smoke from fires on another level of the residence or building.
Every fire is different in the amount of smoke produced and the
rate of burning. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fire
s equally well. Smoke detectors
may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or
safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent explosions, es
caping gas, improper storage
of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occ
upants to escape in time to avoid
injury or death.
• Motion Detectors
Motion detectors can only detect motion within the designated areas as shown in their respective installation instructions. The
y cannot discriminate between
intruders and intended occupants. Motion dete
ctors do not provide volumetric area protection. They have multiple beams of detec
tion and motion can only
be detected in unobstructed areas covered by these beams. They
cannot detect motion which occurs behind walls, ceilings, floor,
closed doors, glass
partitions, glass doors or windows. Any type of tampering whether
intentional or unintentional such as masking, painting, or sp
raying of any material on the
lenses, mirrors, windows or any other part of the
detection system will impair its proper operation.
Passive infrared motion detectors operate by
sensing changes in temperature. However their effectiveness can be reduced when th
e ambient temperature
rises near or above body temperature or if there are intentional or unintentional sources of heat in or near the detection area
. Some of these heat sources could
be heaters, radiators, stoves, barbeques, fire
places, sunlight, steam vents, lighting and so on.
• Warning Devices
Warning devices such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not
warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an interveni
ng wall or door. If warning
devices are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted
or awakened. Audible warning
devices may be interfered with by other noise sources such as
stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliance
s, or passing traffic. Audible
warning devices, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also an intrude
r may cut the telephone line or
defeat its operation by more sophisticated means which may be difficult to detect.
• Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as inte
nded, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency
due to their inability to
respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time to protect the occup
ants or their belongings.
• Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended du
e to the failure of a
component.
• Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operati
ng as intended can be found by regular testing and maintenance. Th
e complete system
should be tested weekly and immediately after a break-in, an attempted break-in, a fire, a storm, an earthquake, an accident, o
r any kind of construction
activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should in
clude all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating de
vices and any other operational
devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitu
te for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not
a substitute for property owners,
renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or
minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: DSC Software purch
ased with or without Products and Components
is copyrighted and is purchased under the following license terms:
• This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between You (the company, individual or entity who acquired the
Software
and any related Hardware) and Digital Security Controls, a division of Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd. (“DSC”), the manufactur
er of the
integrated security systems and the developer of the software
and any related products or components (“HARDWARE”) which You acq
uired.
• If the DSC software product (“SOFTWARE PRODUCT” or “SOFTWAR
E”) is intended to be accompanied by HARDWARE, and is NOT
accompanied by new HARDWARE, You may not use, copy or install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes
computer software, and may include associated media, prin
ted materials, and “online” or
electronic documentation.
• Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a separate end-user license agreement is license
d to
You under the terms of that license agreement.
• By installing, copying, downloading, storing, accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, You agree unconditionally to
be
bound by the terms of this EULA, even if this EULA is deemed to
be a modification of any previo
us arrangement or contract. If Y
ou do not
agree to the terms of this EULA, DSC is unwilling to license the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to You, and You have no right to use it.
SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual propert
y laws and
treaties. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed, not sold.
1.GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants You the following rights:
(a) Software Installation and Use - For each license You acquire, You may have only one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT installed.

(b) Storage/Network Use - The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be installed,
accessed, displayed, run, shared or used concurrently on or
from
different computers, including a workstation, terminal or other digital electronic device (“Device”). In other words, if You ha
ve several
workstations, You will have to acquire a license for each workstation where the SOFTWARE will be used.
(c) Backup Copy - You may make back-up copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, but You may only have one copy per license installed at a
ny
given time. You may use the back-up copy solely for archival pur
poses. Except as expressly provided in this EULA, You may not o
therwise
make copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHE
R RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS
(a) Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassem
bly - You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble
the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding thi
s
limitation. You may not make any changes or modifications to the Software, without the written permission of an officer of DSC.
You may not
remove any proprietary notices, marks or labels from the Software Product. You shall institute reasonable measures to ensure co
mpliance with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
(b) Separation of Components - The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated fo
r use
on more than one HARDWARE unit.
(c) Single INTEGRATED PRODUCT - If You acquired this SOFTWARE with HARDWARE, then the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed
with the HARDWARE as a single integrated product. In this case, the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may only be used with the HARDWARE as
set forth in this EULA.
(d) Rental - You may not rent, lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. You may not make it available to others or post it on a serve
r or web site.
(e) Software Product Transfer - You may transfer all of Your rights
under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer
of the
HARDWARE, provided You retain no copies, You transfer all of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades and this EULA), and provided
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWAR
E
PRODUCT is an upgrade, any transfer must also in
clude all prior versions of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT.
f)
Termination - Without prejudice to any other rights, DSC may terminate this EULA if You fail to comply with the terms and con
ditions of
this EULA. In such event, You must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and all of its component parts.
(g) Trademarks - This EULA does not grant You any rights in conn
ection with any trademarks or service marks of DSC or its suppli
ers.
3. COPYRIGHT - All title and intellectual property rights in an
d to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including but not limited to any imag
es,
photographs, and text incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT)
, the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT, are owned by DSC or its suppliers. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT. All title and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT are the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual pro
perty laws
and treaties. This EULA grants You no rights to use such conten
t. All rights not expressly granted under this EULA are reserved
by DSC and
its suppliers.
4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS - You agree that You will not export
or re-export the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to any country, person, or
entity subject to Canadian export restrictions.
5. CHOICE OF LAW - This Software License Agreement is go
verned by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada.
6. ARBITRATION - All disputes arising in connection with this Agreement shall be determined by final and binding arbitration in
accordance with the Arbitration Act, and the
parties agree to be bound by the arbitrator’s decision. The place of arbitration s
hall be Toronto,
Canada, and the installation manual of the arbitration shall be English.
7. LIMITED WARRANTY
(a) NO WARRANTY - DSC PROVIDES THE SOFTWARE “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY. DSC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
OR ERROR-FREE.
(b) CHANGES IN OPERATING ENVIR
ONMENT - DSC shall not be responsible for problems caused by changes in the operating
characteristics of the HARDWARE, or for problems in the in
teraction of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT with non-DSC-SOFTWARE or
HARDWARE PRODUCTS.
(c) LIMITATION OF LIABILITY; WARRANTY REFLECTS A
LLOCATION OF RISK - IN ANY EVENT, IF ANY STATUTE
IMPLIES WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS NOT STATED IN
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DSC’S ENTIRE LIABILITY
UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT S
HALL BE LIMITED TO TH
E GREATER OF THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND FIVE CANADIAN DOLLARS (CAD$5.00).
BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, TH
E ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
(d) DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES - THIS WARRANTY CONTAINS THE ENTIRE WARRANTY AND SHALL BE IN LIEU OF
ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WH
ETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED (I
NCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL
AR PURPOSE) AND OF ALL OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR
LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF DSC. DSC MAKES
NO OTHER WARRANTIES. DS
C NEITHER ASSUMES NOR
AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON PURPORTING TO ACT ON ITS BEHALF TO MODIFY OR TO CHANGE THIS
WARRANTY, NOR TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER WA
RRANTY OR LIABILITY CONCERNING THIS SOFTWARE
PRODUCT.
(e) EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTY -
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DSC BE LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDI
RECT DAMAGES BASED UPON BREACH OF WARRANTY,
BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIAB
ILITY, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY. SUCH DAMAGES
INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE OR REPLACEMENT EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES OR SERVICES,
DOWN TIME, PURCHASERS TIME, THE CLAIMS OF THIR
D PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO
PROPERTY.
WARNING: DSC recommends that the entire system be completely
tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent
testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or
electrical disruption, it is possible for this SOFTWARE
PRODUCT to fail to perform as expected. 122
Index
Symbols

16
,
40
,
41
Access Code Required for

41
Sensor Reset

31
Numerics

41
1 – Test Transmis
sion Exception Option

39

31
,
41
200 Baud Open/Close
Identifier Toggle

40
24 Hour Low Temperature

29
,
60
24-Hour Bell/Buzzer

28
,
60
24-Hour Burglary

28
,
60
24-Hour CO

28
,
60
,
67
,
68
24-Hour Emergency

28
,
60
24-Hour Flood

28
24-Hour Gas

28
,
60
24-Hour Heat

28
,
60
24-Hour High Temperature

60
24-Hour Holdup

28
,
60
24-Hour Latch Tamper

28
,
60
24-Hour Medical

28
,
60
24-Hour Non Latch

60
24-Hour Non-Alarm

28
,
60
24-Hour Non-Latching Tamper

29
24-Hour Panic

28
,
60
24-Hour Sprinkler

28
,
60
24-Hour Supervisory

28
,
60
24-Hour Supervisory Buzzer

28
,
60
24-Hour Water

60
2-way Audio attribute

60
2-Wire Smoke

31

41
4-Digit Access Codes

42
50Hz AC/60Hz AC

41

41
6-Digit Access Codes

42

31
,
40
A
About the System

1
AC Fail Trouble Beeps Option

40
AC Failure Communication Delay

48
,
50
AC Trouble Display Option

38
AC Trouble Option

38
AC, Wiring

9
AC/DC Inhibits Arming

41
Access

20
Access Code Length

42
Access Codes

22
Access codes, adding

19
Access While Armed

40
Accessibility Option

41
Account Code

50
Account Code Error Checking

50
Account Codes

47
,
82
Acknowledging Troubles

18
Activity Delinquency

49
Add/Remove Modules

53
Alarm Canceled

44
Alarm Memory Display

18
Alarm When Armed Event Message

27
Alt. Comm Battery Trouble/Restore

46
Alt. Comm Communic
ations Fault/Restore

46
Alt. Comm Ethernet
Trouble /Restore

46
Alt. Comm Lockout Trouble/Restore

46
Alt. Comm Network Fault/Restore

46
Alt. Comm Power Supp
ly Trouble/Restore

46
Alt. Comm Radio/SIM Failure/Restore

46
Alternate Communicator

32
Alternate Communicator Auto Routing (dual-
path)

43
Alternate Communicator DLS/SA Option

51
Alternate Communicator Enable/Disable

50
Alternate Communicator Label

27
Alternate Communicator, Installing

5
Alternate Dial

49
Annunciation

15
Approvals

110
ASCII Characters

26
ASCII Entry

26
Audible 24-Hour Input

32
Audible Bus Fault Option

40
Audible Exit Delay

38
Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arming

40
Audible Exit Fault

37
Audio Verification

23
Audio Verification Module, Installing

5
Auto Arm Cancellation/Postpone

44
Auto Detection

13
Auto DLS Options

51
Auto Enroll Modules

53
Auto Verify Fire

28
,
60
Auto-Arm Schedule Programming

37
Auto-Arm Time

21
Auto-Arm/Disarm

21
Auto-Arming Bypass

40
Automatic Clock Adjust

30
Automatic Closing/Opening

44
Automatic DLS/SA Options

51
Automatic Zone Bypass/Unbypass

44
Aux Power Wiring

8
Auxiliary Input Alarm and Restore

44
Auxiliary Power Supp
ly Trouble/Restore

45
Available Models

1
Available User Codes

19
Away Armed Status

32
Away Armed with No Zone Bypasses Status

32
Away to Stay Toggle

40
B
Batteries, wiring

9
Battery Settings

54
Bell Audible

29
Bell Circuit Trouble/Restore

45
Bell Cutoff

30
Bell Cutoff Time

30
Bell Duration Auto-Arm

38
Bell Pulsed

29
,
60
Bell Squawk Attribute

20
Bell Squawk on Away Arming/Disarming

39
Bell Squawk on Away Arming/Disarming Option
39
Bell Squawk On Entry Option

38
Bell Squawk On Exit Option

38
Bell Squawk On Trouble Option

38
Bell Squawk Option

38
Bell Status and Programming Access Output

33
Bell Timeout

11
Bell Wiring

6
Bell/PGM Support

12
Bell/Siren Configuration

12
Bell/Siren Operation

11
binary data input

25
Brightness Control

21
Bulglary Verified Counter

42
Burglary and Fire Bell Follower

31
Burglary Not Verified

44
Burglary Verification

29
Burglary Verification Selection

42
Burglary Verification Timer

30
Burglary Verified

44
Buzzer Control

22
Bypass Enabled

29
,
60
Bypass Open Zones

17
Bypass Recall

17
Bypass Status Display Option

39
Bypass Stay/Away/Night Zones

17
C
Call Waiting Cancel

49
Call Waiting Cancel String

43
,
79
Capacitance

5
Change Case

26
Chime Function

29
,
60
Chime on Closing

39
Chime on Opening

39
Clear Bypasses

17
Clear Display

26
Clear to End

26
Closing Confirmation

49
CO Alarm Message

27
CO Detector, Wiring

8
Cold Start

45
Combus
capacitance
5
line loss
5
Command Outputs 1, 3, 4

22
Command Outputs 1-4

22
,
32
Commands

16
Communication Attempt Limit

13
Communication Delay

48
Communication Paths

13
,
43
Communication Variables

47
,
84
Communications

12
Communications Enabled/Disabled

48
Communications Options

13
Communications Paths

79
Communications Priority

49
Communicator Backup Options

50
Communicator Formats

47
,
84
Communicator Option One

48
Compatible Devices

2
Configuration steps

10
Confirm Module

54
Connecting Power

6
Contact ID

98
Contrast Control

22 123
Control Panel Information

53
Control Panel Installation

3
Controls and Indicators

10
Corbus Wiring

4
Courtesy Pulse

31
Crystal Timebase

41
Current Calculation
main panel
4
Current Rating
module
4
D
Data, Entering

10
Day Zone

28
,
60
Daylight Savings Begin/End

30
Daylight Savings Time

39
Daylight Savings Time Option

39
DC Trouble

33
Default All Keypad Programming

54
Default All labels

12
Default Alternat
e Communicator

54
Default Keypads 1-8

54
Default Labels

27
Default Master Code

54
Default System

54
Default, Hardware

12
Defaults

54
Delay 1

27
,
60
Delay 2

27
,
60
Delay Call Window

52
Delay Stay/Away

28
,
60
Delayed 24-Hour Fire

28
,
60
Delayed Fire and Burglary

31
Delete Module

53
Delinquency

45
,
49
DEOL

30
,
60
Device Supervision

11
DLS Access Code

51
DLS Call-Back Enabled/Disabled

50
DLS Disconnect

41
DLS Lead In and Lead Out

45
DLS Phone Number Programming

51
DLS Programming

24
,
50
DLS Window

41
DLS/SA Panel ID

51
Door Bell

29
,
60
Door Chime

15
Door Chime Enable/Disable

19
Double Call

50
Double End of Line Resistors

7
DTMF/Pulse Dialing Option

49
Duress Alarm

44
Duress Code Attribute

20
Duress Codes

19
,
40
E
Enable DLS/Allow System Service

21
End-of-Line Options SEOL/SEOL

37
Enrolling 1st Keypad

11
Enrolling Devices

10
Enrolling Keypads

10
Entry Delay 1

30
Entry Delay 1-2

30
Entry Delay 2

30
Entry Delay Only Attribute

20
European Dial

41
Event Buffer

21
Event Buffer 75% Full

45
Event Buffer Swinger

37
Event Buffers, Viewing

13
Event Labels

15
Event Reporting

43
Exit Delay

30
Exit Delay Restart

40
Exit Delay Termination Option

38
Exit Fault

44
F
Fail To Arm Event Message

27
Fast Loop/Normal Loop Response

30
Faults and Errors

104
Fire Alarm Message

27
Fire and CO Zone Types

12
Fire Bell Timeout Option

38
Fire Key Option

38
Fire Key Options

40
Fire Pre-Alerts

11
Fire Supervisory

28
,
60
Fire Trouble & Restore

45
Firmware Update Begin/was Successful

45
Firmware Update Fail

45
Force Arm

29
,
60
Force Dial Option

41
Freeze Trouble/Restore

45
FTC Bell Option

41
FTC Events Communicate

50
Full Enrollment

11
Function Key Definitions

15
Function Keys

15
G
Gas Trouble/Restore

45
Global Keypad, vs Partition

14
Global Zones

12
Global/Multi Partition

12
Global/Multiple Partition Operation

14
Ground Start

32
Ground Wiring

9
H
Hardware Default

12
Hardware Reset

12
Heat Trouble/Restore

45
Hex and Decimal Data, Programming

25
HEX Programming

25
High Current Output Battery

54
High-Current Output Supply Label

27
Holdup Output

32
Holdup Time

30
Hold-Up Verification Counter

42
Holiday Schedules

52
HSM2HOST Label

27
I
I.D. Tone Option

41
I/O Module, Installing

5
ICON keypad

25
Installation

3
Installer Code

19
,
30
Installer Defined Codes

63
Installer Lead In and Lead Out

45
Installer Lockout

54
Installer Programming

22
,
25
Installer Walk Test

13
Installer Walk Test Enable/Disable

53
Instant

27
,
60
Instant Stay/Away

28
,
60
Interior

27
,
60
Interior Delay

28
,
60
Interior Stay/Away

28
,
60
Interval Toggles-Holidays

52
IP/Cellular Fault Check Timer

48
IP/GS Wait for Ack

84
K
Key Annunciation

38
Keypad Backlighting Option

39
Keypad Blanking Option

39
Keypad Blanking Requires Code

39
Keypad Blanking While Armed

40
Keypad Buzzer Alarm Option

40
Keypad Buzzer Follow

31
Keypad Fire Alarm

44
Keypad Function Keys

15
Keypad Labels

27
Keypad Lockout

37
,
44
Keypad Lockout, Number of Invalid Local At-
tempts

37
Keypad Medical Alarm

44
Keypad Panic Alarm

44
Keypad Partition Operation

12
Keypad Tampers Option

39
Keypad Types

25
Keypad Zone Assignment

6
Keypads, Default
to Factory Settings

54
Keyswitch Arms in Away Mode

40
Kissoff

32
L
Label

26
Label Programming

26
labels, defaulting

12
Labels, Event

15
Labels, Module

14
Labels, Partition

14
Labels, Partition Command Output

15
Labels, Zone

14
Land Line Test Transmission Option

41
Language Selection

16
,
26
Latch Tamper

28
,
60
Latched System Event (Strobe)

33
Latching Troubles Option

40
Late to Close Option

39
Late to Close/Open

44
Late to Open

21
Late to Open Time

21
LCD Keypad

25
LED Indicators

10
LED keypad

25
letter case

26
Line Loss

5
Loaned Partition

12
Local Firmware Upgrade

13
Lockout

37
Low Signal Trouble and Restore

46
Low Temperature Warning

15 124
M
Maid’s Code Attribute

20
Main Bell Mask

33
Main Bell Operational Mask

31
Maintain Arm

29
,
60
Maintain Disarm

29
,
60
Maintenance Code

19
,
30
Manual Enroll

53
Manual Enrollment

11
Master Code

19
,
30
Master Code Option

38
Model Differences

1
Module AC Trouble/Restore

45
Module Aux Trouble/Restore

46
Module Battery Absent/Restore

46
Module Battery Trouble/Restore

46
Module Information

53
Module Labels

14
Module Low Voltage Trouble/Restor

46
Module Supervisory Trouble/Restore

46
Module Tamper/Restore

44
Modules, Installing

5
Modules, Removing

11
Momentary Arm

29
,
60
Momentary Disarm

29
,
60
Mounting

3
Multi Hit Option

39
Multiple Siren Output Operation

11
N
NC Loop/EOL

37
Network Fault and Restore

46
Night Zone

28
,
60
No Entry Arming

22
Normally Closed

29
Normally Closed (NC) Loops

60
Null PGM

31
Null Zone

27
,
60
Number of Rings to Answer On

51
O
One Time User Code

19
One Time User Code Attribute

20
Open After Alarm

33
Open/Close Events

44
Opening after Alarm

44
Opening After Alarm Bell Ringback

49
Opening After Alarm Keypad Ringback

49
Output 1 Fault/Restore

46
Output Expander Label

27
Output Expander, Installing

5
Overview of Installation Process

3
P

38
Panel AC Fail Trouble/Restore

45
Panel Battery Absent Trouble/Restore

45
Panel Battery Settings

54
Panel Call-Up Baud Rate Option

51
Panel Low Battery Trouble/Restore

45
Panel/Receiver Communication Paths

43
Parallel Communications

49
Partial Closing

44
Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask

42
Partition 1-8 Labels

27
Partition 1-8 Timer

30
Partition Account Codes

47
Partition Auto-Arm Postpone Timer

42
Partition Auto-Arm/ Disarm

74
,
75
,
76
Partition Auto-Arm/Disarm

42
Partition Auto-Arming
Pre-Alert Ti mer

42
Partition Auto-Arming Times

42
Partition Auto-Disarming
Holiday Schedules

42
Partition Auto-Disarming Times

42
Partition Call Directions

47
,
82
,
83
Partition Command Output Labels

15
,
27
,
58
Partition Labels

14
Partition Mask

42
,
77
Partition No Activity Arm Timer

42
Partition No Activity Armi
ng Pre-Alert Duration
42
Partition Status Alarm Memory

32
Partition vs. Global Keypad

14
Partition Zone Assignment

43
Partition, Setting Up

11
Partitions, Assign
ing to Users

20
Partitions, Wo
rking With

11
PC-Link, Local Programming with

24
PC-Link, Programming

24
Periodic DLS

51
Periodic DLS Days

51
Periodic DLS Time

52
Periodic Test Transmission

46
Periodic Test Transmission with Trouble

46
PGM 1-28 Attributes

34
PGM 2 2-Wire Alarm/Restore

44
PGM 2 Two-Wire Trouble/Restore

45
PGM Attributes

33
,
67
PGM Configuration Options

37
,
70
PGM Output Types

66
PGM Partition Assignment

31
,
63
,
64
PGM Timer Programming

31
PGM Timers

65
,
70
PGM Wiring

6
Phone Number Account Code

50
Phone Number Programming, Central Station

43
Placement Test Wireless keys

54
Placement Test Zones 1-128

54
Power Save Mode Option

39
Power Supply Label

27
Power-up Sequence

10
Pre-Enrollment

11
Priority Alarms

44
Probe Disconnected Trouble/Restore

45
Program Group 1

17
Program User Codes

19
Programming Methods

26
Programming Schedule 1

52
Programming, DLS

24
Programming, How to

24
Programming, Installer

25
Programming, Template

24
Proximity Tag Used

33
Proximity Tags, Assigning

20
PSTN 1 Communication Path

43
PSTN Double Call Timer

51
Pulse Dial after 5th attempt

49
Q
Quick Arm/Exit

22
Quick Arming /Function Key Option

38
Quick Exit Option

38
R
Ready LED Flashes for Force Arming

40
Ready to Arm

31
Real Time Clock

13
Real Time Clock Option

41
Real-Time Redundant Communications

13
Receiver 1 to 4 FTC Trouble and Restore

45
Receiver 1 to 4 Supervis
ion Failure and Restore
46
Receiver 1 to 4 Trouble and Restore

46
Receiver 2 Backup Option

50
Receiver 3 Backup Option

50
Receiver 4 Backup Option

50
Recent Closing

44
Reduced Dialing Attempts

49
Regulatory Approvals

105
,
110
,
114
,
115
Remote Firmware Upgrade

13
Remote Firmware Upgrade, Modules

13
Remote Firmware Upgrade, Panel

13
Remote Lockout

37
Remote Lockout Duration

37
Remote Operation

33
Remote Programming

24
Remote Reset

40
Repeater Labels

27
Reporting

43
Reporting Codes

98
Restore Transmission on Bell Timeout

48
RF Jam Trouble/Restore

45
S
SA Access Code

51
SA Lead In and Lead Out

45
Save Label

26
Schedule Labels

27
Schedule Programming

52
Select Option menu

26
SEOL

30
Sequential Detection

60
Set End Day

52
Set End Time

52
Set Start Day

52
Set Start Time

52
Settle Delay

30
Shared Zones

12
SIA Format

98
Silent 24-Hour Input

32
Single End of Line (SEOL) Resistors

60
Single Partition

12
Single Partition Operation

14
Single Siren Output Operation

11
Siren Labels

27
Smoke Detector, Wiring

5
SMS Command and Control

22
SMS Messages

23
SMS Programming

21
Special Closing/Opening

44
Specifications

1
Standard 24-Hour Fire

60
Status LED

10
Stay Armed Status

32
Supervision

11
Supervision Restore

13
Supervisor Attribute

20
Supervisor Codes

19
Swinger Shut Down

29
Swinger Shutdown

29
,
47
,
60 125
System Account Code

47
,
50
System Area

30
System Armed Status

32
System Call Direction

47
,
82
System Information

53
System Label

27
System Labels

14
System Lockout

37
System Option 1

37
,
73
System Option 10

40
System Option 11

40
,
73
System Option 12

41
System Option 13

41
,
73
System Option 2

38
System Option 3

38
,
73
System Option 4

38
System Option 5

39
,
73
System Option 6

39
System Option 7

40
,
73
System Option 8

40
System Option 9

40
,
73
System Tamper

33
System Test

21
,
46
System Trouble

32
T
Tampers Inhibit Arming

41
Telephone Line Monitor Audible When Armed
38
Telephone Line Monitor Option

38
Telephone Line Trouble and Restore

45
Telephone Line Wiring

6
Temperature Display

15
Temperature in Celsius

40
Template Programming

24
Temporal Three Fire Signaling

37
Test Transmission Cycle

48
Test Transmission Receiver

49
Testing

54
Testing the System

13
Time and Date

21
TLM and Alarm

32
TLM Trouble Delay

48
Tone Generated-1200Hz

41
Transmission Counter in Hours

40
Transmission Delay

29
,
60
Trouble Beeps Control

40
Trouble Display

17
Trouble Indicators

12
Troubleshooting

93
U
User Authentication

42
User Authentication Options

20
,
22
User Call-up

21
User Call-Up Enabled/Disabled

51
User Closing/Opening

44
User code and proximity tag

20
,
42
User Code Attributes

20
User code or proximity tag

20
,
42
User Codes

19
User Codes, Assigning

19
User Enables/Disables DLS

50
User Functions

21
User Labels, Adding

20
User Walk Test

21
Using the Keypad

10
V
Verified Events

42
Video Verification

23
Viewing Event Buffers

13
Viewing Programming

25
Voice Chime

15
W
Walk Test

13
Walk Test Communications

49
Walk Test Start & End

46
Wireless Device AC Failure/Restore

46
Wireless Device Fault/Restore

46
Wireless Device Low Battery Transmission De-
lay

48
Wireless Device Low Battery Trouble/Restore

46
Wireless Devices, Enrolling

11
Wireless Placement Test

54
Wireless Receiver, Default

54
Wireless Transceiver Module, Wiring

5
Wiring

3
Word Library

26
Words

26
Z
Zone Assignment, Partition

43
Zone Attributes

29
,
60
Zone Bypassing Attribute

20
Zone Expander Labels

27
Zone Expander Supervis
ory Alarm and Restore
44
Zone Expander, Installing

5
Zone Fault Label

27
Zone Follow PGM By Zone

33
Zone Follower

33
Zone Label Options

26
Zone Labels

14
,
26
,
57
Zone Loop Options

37
Zone Loop Response Time

30
Zone Reporting

43
Zone Tamper Label

27
Zone Types

27
,
60
Zone Types, Fire and CO

12
Zone Wiring

6 © 2014 Tyco International Ltd. and its Re
spective Companies. Al
l Rights Reserved.
The trademarks, logos, and service marks di
splayed on this document are registered in
the United States [or other countries].
Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly pro-
hibited and Tyco International Ltd. will aggr
essively enforce its intellect
ual property rights
to the fullest extent of the law
, including pursuit of cr
iminal pros
ecution wher-
ever necessary. All trademarks
not owned by Tyco International Ltd. are the pr
operty of their respective
owners, and are used w
ith permission or allo
wed under applicable
laws.
Product offerings and specifications are subject to change withou
t notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all produc
ts include all features
. Availability varies
by region; contact your sales representative.
Technical Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Can/US)
www.dsc.com
29008362R001